hrf*

' T-

■*^

ft!

MH

y^.

- v. ri *w

- 'w

v^V

*V

Journal of tlx

Ropal microscopical Societp

CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS

AND
A SUMMARY OK CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

z o o n, o o y ^.nsriD botawy

(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia)
MIOROSOOPY, cSsc.

EDITED BY
R. G. HEBB, M.A. M.D. F.R.C.P.

WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND

J. ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A. F.R.S.E.

Regius Professor of Natural History in the University of Aberdeen

A. N. DISNEY, M.A. B.So. CECIL PRICE-JONES, M.B. Lond.

FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY
AND

A. B. RENDLE, M.A. D.So. F.R.S. F.L.S. HAROLD MOORE, B.Su.

Keeper, Department of Botany, IVoohvicli Arsenal

British Museum

Minimis partibus, per tot urn Naturae campum, certitudo omnis innititur
quas qui fugit pariter Naturam fugit. — Linnceus.

FOR THE YEAR

1909

TO BE OBTAINED AT THE SOCIETY'S ROOMS,

20 HANOVER SQUARE, LONDON, W.

of Messrs. WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 Henrietta Street, London, W.C.
and of Messrs. DULAU & CO., 37 Soho Square, London, W.

Extra and informal Meetings are held on the 1st and 4th
Wednesday evenings of the month. These Meetings are devoted
to : — (1) Biology, Bacteriology, and Histology ; (2) Microscopical
Optics and Microsope Construction.

t~¥

THE

|topl Jftiniascojjtcat

Established in 1839. Incorporated by Royal Charter in 1866.

The Society was established for the promotion of Microscopical and
Biological Science by the communication, discussion, and publication of observa-
tions and discoveries relating to (1) improvements in the construction and
mode of application of the Microscope, or (2) Biological or other subjects of
Microscopical Research.

It consists of Ordinary, Honorary, and Ex-officio Fellows of either sex.

Ordinary Fellows are elected on a Certificate of Recommendation
signed by three Ordinary Fellows, setting forth the names, residence, and
description of the Candidate, of whom the first proposer must have personal
knowledge. The certificate is read at two General Meetings, and the Candidate
balloted for at the second Meeting.

The Admission Fee is 11. 2s. ; and, thft Annual Subscription 21. 2s., pay-
able on election, and subsequently in advance on 1st January annually. The
Annual Subscriptions may be compounded for at any time for 31/. 10s. Fellows
elected at a meeting subsequent to that in February are only called upon for
a proportionate part of the first year's subscription. The annual Subscrip-
tion of Fellows permanently residing abroad is 1/. lis. 64. or a reduction of
one-fourth.

Honorary Fellows (limited to 50), consisting of persons eminent in
Microscopical or Biological Science, are elected on the recommendation of five
Ordinary Fellows and the approval of the Council.

Ex-offieio Fellows (limited to 100), consisting of the Presidents for the
time being of any Societies having objects in whole or in part similar to those of
the Society, are elected on the recommendation of ten Ordinary Fellows and the
approval of the Council.

The Council, in whom the management of the property and affairs of
the Society is vested, is elected annually, and is composed of the President,
four Vice-Presidents, Treasurer, two Secretaries, and twelve other Ordinary
Fellows.

The Meetings are held on the third Wednesday in each month, from
October to June, at 20 Hanover Square, W. (commencing at 8 p.m.). Visitors
are admitted by the introduction of Fellows. (See preceding page.)

The Journal, containing the Transactions and Proceedings of the
Society, and a Summary of Current Researches relating to Zoology and Botany
(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), Microscopy, etc., is published
bi-monthly, and is forwarded post-free to all Ordiuary and Ex-officio Fellows
residing in countries within the Postal Union.

The Library, with the Instruments, Apparatus, and Cabinet of Objects,
is open for the use of Fellows daily (except Saturdays), from 10 a.m. to 5 p.m.
It is closed for four weeks during August and September.

Forms of proposal for Fellowship, and any further information, ma;/ be obtained by
application to the Secretaries, or Assistant-Secretary, at the Library of the Society,
20 Hanover Square, W.

a 2

flatron

HIS MAJESTY THE KING.

^last-^hcsibciits.

Elected

•Sir Richard Owen, K.C.B. D.C.L. M.D. LL.D. F.R.S. 1840-1

*John Lindley, Ph.D. F.R.S 1842-3

*Thomas Bell, F.R.S 1844-5

•James Scott Bowerbank, LL.D. F.R.S 1846-7

•George Busk, F.R.S 1848-9

*Arthur Farre, M.D. F.R.S 1850-1

•George Jackson, M.R.C.S 1852-3

•William Benjamin Carpenter, C.B. M.D. LL.D. F.R.S. 1854-5

*George Shadbolt 1856-7

*Edwin Lankester, M.D. LL.D. F.R.S 1858-9

*John Thomas Quekett, F.R.S 1860

*Robert James Farrants, F.R.C.S 1861-2

•Charles Brooke, M.A. F.R.S 1863-4

•James Glaisher, F.R.S 1865-6-7-8

*Rev. Joseph Bancroft Reade, M.A. F.R.S 1869-70

* William Kitchen Parker, F.R.S 1871-2

*Charles Brooke, M.A. F.R.S 1873-4

*Henry Clifton Sorby, LL.D. F.R.S 1875-6-7

*Henry James Slack, F.G.S 1878

•Lionel S. Beale, M.B. F.R.C.P. F.R.S 1879-80

*Peter Martin Duncan, M.B. F.R.S 1881-2-3

*Rev. William Hy. Dallinger, M.A. LL.D. F.R.S. 1884-5-6-7
•Charles Thos. Hudson, M.A. LL.D. (Cantab.), F.R.S. 1888-9-90

Robert Braithwaite, M.D. M.R.C.S 1891-2

Albert D. Michael, F.L.S 1893-4-5-6

Edward Milles Nelson 1897-8-9

William Carruthers, F.R.S. F.L.S. F.G.S 1900-1

Henry Woodward, LL.D. F.R.S. F.G.S. F.Z.S 1902-3

Dukinfield Hy. Scott, M.A. Ph.D. LL.D. F.R.S. F.L.S. 1904-5-6
The Right Hon. Lord Avebury, P.C. D.C.L. LL.D.

F.R.S., etc 1907-8

* Deceased

COUNCIL.

Elected 20th January, 1909.

presto ent.

Sir Edwin Ray Lankester, K.C.B. M.A. LL.D. F.R.S. F.L.S. F.Z.S.

$tcc-presiucnts.
*Frederic J. Cheshire.
Rev. W. H. Dallinger, LL.D. D.Sc. D.C.L. F.R.S.

F.L.S. F.Z.S.
The Right Hon. Sir Ford North, P.C. F.R.S.
E. J. Spitta, L.R.C.P. (Loud.), M.R.C.S. (Eng.).

treasurer.

Wynne E. Baxter, J.P. D.L. F.G.S. F.R.G.S.

^ecrctarus.

R. G. Hebb, M.A. M.T). F.R.C.P.
J. W. Gordon.

#rbwarp ^Umbers of Council.
F. W. Watson Baker.
*A. N. Disney, M.A., B.Sc.
J. W. H. Eyre, M.D. F.R.S. (Edin.).

E. Heron Allen, F.L.S. F.Z.S. F.R.Met.S.
Henry George Plimmer, F.L.S.
Thomas H. Powell.

C. Price-Jones M.B. (Lond.).
Percy E. Radley.

*Julius Rheinberg.
*Charles F. Rousselet.

F. Shillington Scales, M.A. (Cantab.) M.B. B.C.

D. J. SCOURFIELD, F.Z.S.

* Members of the Publication Committee.

LIBRARIAN.

Percy E. Radley.
curators.
Charles F. Rousselet.
F. Shillington Scales, B.A. (Cantab.) M.B. B.C.

assistant secretary.
F. A. Parsons.

CONTENTS.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

PAGE

I. — The Mouth-parts of the Nemocera and their Relations to the other
Families in Diptera. Corrections and additions to the paper
published in 1904. By W. Wesche, F.R.M.S. (Plates I. to IV.) .. 1

II. — Note on a New Growing Cell for Critical Observations under the Highest

Powers. By A. A. C. Eliot Merlin. (Fig. I) 17

III.— A Workshop Microscope. By J. E. Stead, F.R.S. (Fig. 2) 20

IV. — A Simple Method of Illuminating Opaque Objects. By J. E. Stead,

F.E.S. (Figs. 3-5) 22

V. — On Mounting Rotifers and Protista in Canada Balsam. By The Rev.

Eustace Tozer. (Fig. 6) 24

VI.— The "Red Snow" Plant, Sphserella nivalis. By G. S. West, M.A., D.Sc.

F.L.S 28

>

VII. — The President's Address: On Seeds with Special Reference to British
Plants. By the Right Hon. Lord Avebury, P.C., D.C.L., LL.D.,
F.R.S. (Figs. 20-41) 137

VIII. — Some Remarks on a German Silver Powell Portable Microscope made in

1850. By A. A. C. Eliot Merlin 167

IX. — On Syncliseta fehnica sp. n., and Remarks on the Resting-egg of Synchxta

peclinata. By C. F. Rousselet, F.R.M.S. (Plate V.) 170

X. — On the Fresh-water Crustacea of Algeria and Tunisia. By Robert

Gurney. (Plates VII. to XIV.) 273

XI. — On the Recent and Fossil Foraminifera of the Shore-sands of Selsey Bill,
Sussex.- II. By Edward Heron-Allen, F.L.S.. F.R.M.S., and

Arthur Earland. (Plates XV., XVI.) 306

XII. — A New Illuminator for the Microscope. By J. W. Gordon, F.R.M.S.

(Figs. 71, 72) 417

XIII. — On the Recent and Fossil Foraminifera of the Shore-snnds of Selsey Bill,
Sussex.— III. By Edward Heron-Allen, F.L.S., F.R.M.S.. and
Arthur Earland. (Plates XVIL, XVIII.) 422

XIV.— On the Measurement of Very Minute Microscopical Objects. By Edward

M.Nelson 540

XV.— The Disappearance of the Nucleolus in Mitosis. By E. J. Sheppard,

F.R.M.S. (Plate XIX.) 551

XVI.— On the Recent and Fossil Foraminifera of the Shore-sands of Selsey Bill.
Sussex,— IV. By Edward Heron-Allen, F.L.S., F.R.M.S., and
Arthur Earland. (Plates XX.. XXI.) 67 <

viii CONTENTS.

OBITUARY.

PAGE

Jean Alfred Nachet. (Plate VI.) 174

Henri van Heurck 555

Rev. W. H. Dallinger, LL D., D.Sc., D.C.L , F.R.S., F.L.S., F.Z.S. (Plate XXII.) 699

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES

Relating to Zoology and Botany (principally Invebtebrata and
Cryptogamia), Microscopy, &c, including Oeiginal Communications
from Fellows and Others.* 31, 176, 337, 447, 558, 703

ZOOLOGY.
VERTEBRATA.

a. Embryology.

Winiwarter, Hans v., & G. Sainmoint— Oogenesis in Cat 31

Kuschakewitsch, Sergius — Origin of Primitive Germ-cells in Rana esculenta . . 31

Widakowich, V. — Entrance of Dogfish Ovum into the Oviduct 31

Kaufmann- Wolf, Marie — Hyperdactylism in Houdan Fowls 32

Riddle, 0. — Fault-bars in Feathers 32

Ritchie, James — Hump-bached Trout 32

Pearl, Maud de Witt, & Raymond Pearl — Race-crossing and Sex Ratio .. 33

Jordan, David Starr — Geminate Species 33

Cook, O. F — Evolution without Isolation 33

Heape, Walter — Russo's attempt to show Differentiation of Sex in Ovarian Ova of

Rabbit 176

Guver, Michael F. — Sex of Pheasant Hybrids 176

Kingsbury, B. P., & H. D. Reed — Columella auris in Amphibia 177

Delage, Yves — Electric Stimulation and Parthenogenesis 177

Tbaube, Isidor — Factors in Artificial Parthenogenesis 337

Chappellier, A. — Degeneration of Ovarian Follicles in White Mice .. . .. 337

Bouin, P., & P. Ancel — Function of Corpus Luteum 33 i

Bali.owitz, E. — Spermatozoa of Bats and Lemurs 338

Metzner, R. — Development of Salivary Glands of Cat 338

Weiss, Otto — Development of Poison-glands in Anura 338

Maximuw, A. — Amitosis in Embryonic Tissues of Mammals .. 338

Tornier, G. — Artificially Induced Albinism of the Shin in Axolotl larvae .. .. 338

Nusbaum, J. — Development of SJcull in Teleosts 338

Guitel F. — Expulsion of Eggs in Entelurus xquoreus 389

Hurst, C. C. — Inheritance of Eye-colour in Man 339

Mudge, G. P. — Inheritance of Coat-colour in Rats 839

Da rbi shire, A. D. — Experimental Estimation of the Theory of Ancestral Contribu-
tions in Inheritance 339

Punnett, R C. — Alleged Influence of Lecithin on Determination of Sex .. .. 447

Lecaillon, A. — Parthenogenetic Segmentation in Birds 447

Niskoubina, N. — Structure and Function of Corpus Luteum 448

Ancel, P., & P. Bouin — Corpus Luteum and Mammary Gland 448

Regaud, Cl., & G. Dubredil — Two Ova together in Rabbit 4 is

Oh ampy. Christian — Interstitial Cells of Testis in Frog 44 S

Dubreuil, G., & Cl. Regaud — Interstitial Gland in Ovary of Rabbit 448

Lecaillon, A. ^Interstitial Cells of Mole's Testis 448

* In order to make the Contents complete, the papers printed in the ' Transactions '

and Uiu Notes printed in the 'Proceedings' are entered here.

CONTENTS. ix

7 PAGE

Wolterstorff, W. — Hyrid Neiots 449

Meves, Fk. — Chondriosomes as Bearers of Inheritance 449

Ussoff, D. D. — Notochord and Archenteron 449

Krauss, Fr. — Notochord Cartilage in Urodela 44!»

Wilson, James — Colours 0/ Highland Cattle 44!)

Heape, Walter — Proportion of Sexes produced by Whites and Coloured People in

Cuba 558

Morgan, T. H. — Breeding Experiments with Rats 559

Bouin, P., & P. Ancel — Function of Corpus luteum .".Co

Gorwitsch, Al. — Regulation Phenomena 560

Joseph, H. — Ovary of Anthropoids 560

Fernandez, Miguel — Development of Tatusia ;>t;u

Lecaillon, A. — Changes in Cicatricula of Unfertilised Egg of Fowl 561

Sonnenbrodt — Growth-period of Oocyte of the Foivl 561

Knape, Ernst v. — Development of Cornea in the Chick 561

Chambers, Robert — Influence of Size of Egg and Temperature on Growth of Frog 561

Ahrend, W. — Three-year-old Tadpoles .. '.. 561

Ziegler, H. E. — Embryo of Chlamydoselachus anguineus 562

Nussbaum, M. — Study of Heredity 562

Hart. D. Berry — Mendelian Action on Differentiated Sex 703

Wunderer, H. — Development of the Alpine Salamander .. .. 705

Lecaillon, A. — Parthenogenetic Segmentation in Hen's Eggs 706

Kurkiewicz, T. — Development of Myocardium 707

KiNZ, A. — Sympathetic Nervous System of a Pig 7 n 7

Pearl, Raymond — Regulation in Shell- Making 7n7

Pearl, R., & F. M. Surface — Formation of Shell on Birds' Eggs 707

Regaud, Cl., & G. Dibrelil — Ovarian Interstitial Gland in Rabbit 708

Guyer, M. F. — Spermatogenesis of Guinea-fowl 7' 18

b- Histolog-y.

Kollmann, Max — Leucocytes in Invertebrates 33

Franz, V. — Structure of Pigment-cells 34

Lupxi. Helene — Regeneration of Intestinal Epithelium in Cobitis fossilis .. ». 34

Winiwarter. Hans v. — Interstitial Tissue of Mammalian Ovary B4

Harrison, Ross G. — Regeneration of Peripheral Nerves 34

Ebnek, V. v. — Structure of Dentine 340

Lelievre, A., & E. Retterer — Smooth Muscles of Birds 340

Jolly. J. — Lymphatic Ganglia in Birds 340

Michalovsky, J. — Functional Changes in Bird's Proventriculus 341

Osawa. Gakutaro — Minute Structure of Japanese Giant Salamander 341

Drzewina, Anna — Blood of Fishes 341

Pawlowsky. E. — Poison-glands of Fishes 341

Parker, W. N., & T. H. Bcrlend— Efferent Ducts of Testis in Chimxra .. .. 341

Hammar, J. Aug. — Thymus of Teleosteans *50

Li lievre, A., & E. Retterer — Structure of Red Blood Corpuscles 450

Jordan, H. E. — Shape of Mammalian lied Blood Corpuscles 450

Retterer, Ed. — Form and Size of Red Blood Corpuscle* in Domestic Animals .. 151

Reichenow, E. — Degenerative Changes in Intestine of Tadpoles ^51

Lelievre, A., & E. R 1 tterer — Skeletal Muscle of Vert eh-ates 451

Gallardo, Angel — Bipolar ity of Cell-division 562

Regaud, Cl. — Mitochondria of Seminal Epithelium of Rat 562

Retterer, E., & A. Lelievre — Intestinal Musculature in Tench 562

Halpenny. J., & F. D. Thompson— Thyroid and Parathyroid •• 562

Cri-si, G. Vastarini — Structure of Afferent and Efferent Arteries of the Renal Glo-
merulus in Mammals ■ •.'',-;

Retterer, E., & A. Lelievre — Structure of Myocardium 50.

Valle, Paolo Della. Variability in Number of Chromosomes J0J

Winkler, C. — Nervou* System of a Deaf White Cat ^jj; s

Franz, Victor — Eye of Birds l";'

Arcangeli, A. — Stomach Glands of Lizard ' j

Viguier, G.— Thyroid Gland of Gecko ' 0!

CONTENTS.

o. General. page

Menegaux, A. — Habits of Sloths 34

Sewertzoff, A. N. — Theory of Pentadactyl Limb 35

Revilliod, P. — Relation of Size and Structure of Intestine to Diet .. .. . . 35

Reichert, E. T., & A. P. Brown — Hemoglobins of various Vertebrates 35

Gray, Albert A. — Labyrinth of the Ear , 35

Brunner, H. L. — Moulting in Lizards 35

Lesage, J. — Skeletal Sexual Character in Argentine Frog 36

Genzoe, K. J. — Age and Rate of Growth of Eel 36

Smith, <i. Elliot— Brain of Lepidosiren 36

Agar, W. E. — Vascular Filaments on Pectoral Fin of Lepidosiren paradoxa .. 36

Gill, Theodor —Habits of Miller's Thumbs 37

Stead, D. G. — Fishes of New South Wales 37

Schneider, Guido — Fauna of the Obersee 37

Platk, L. — Fish living inside Strombus 37

Matthew, W. D. — Mammalian Migrationsin Tertiary Times 177

Polak, Clara— Structure of Colobus 177

Sweet, Georgina— Eyes of Chrysochloris 178

,, „ Variations in Hyla aurea 178

Poll, Heinrich — Hybrid Newts 178

Hammar, J. A. — Thymus of Teleosteans 178

Bishop, W. L. — Eels and their Migrations 179

Regan, C.Tate — Char of Great Britain 180

Smith, G Elliot— Tuberculum olj 'actor turn 341

Pika, Adolf— Races of Swine 342

Petit, L., Sen. — Albinism in Birds and Mammals 342

Fuchs, Hugo — Remains of Parasphenoid in an Opossum 342

Lonnberg, Einar— Notes on Clawless Otters 342

Fraipont, J. — Affinities of the Okapi 342

Tornier, G. — Partial Albinism in Grass Snake 342

Sternfeld, R.— Mimicry in bnakes 342

Zavattari, E. — Musculature of Tongue in Geckos 343

Tornier, G. — Root Growing through Lizard's Egg 343

Ogneff, J. F. — Influence of Darkness and Starving on Chromataphores of Axolotl

and Goldfish 34:;

Vaillant, L. — Drowning of Younj Toads .. .. 343

Ziegler, H. E. — Horny Fibres of Selachians and Fin-rays of Teleosteans .. .. 343

Loeb, J. — Heliotropism of Pelagic Animals 344

Grinnell, Joseph — Animal Life of San Bernardino Mountains 344

Shipley, A. E. — Cause of Appendicitis 344

Poll, H. — Are there Suprarenal Bodies in Invertebrates ? 344

Howard, W. T. — Kern-plasma Relation Theory 451

Piekon, H. — Study of Autotomy 452

Shimer, H. W. — Dwarf Faunas 452

Corsy — Rat without a Tail 452

Frets, G. P. — Variations in Vertebral Column of Echidna 452

Kukenthal, W. — Asymmetry of Skull in Toothed Whales 452

Scharff, R. F. — Early History of Irish Horse 452

Gelston, VV. R. — Osmotic Pressures of Blood and Eggs of Birds 453

Barrington, R. M.— Three New Bird Records for Britain 453

Hooker, Davenport — Behaviour of Newly-hatched Loggerhead Turtles 453

Hiksch-Tabor, 0. — Brain of P or tens anguineus 453

Dollo, Louis — Sailing Pishes . 454

Gill, Theodore — Story of Devil-fish 454

Giaja, J. — Removal of Swim-bladder in Minnow 454

Forbes, S. A., & R.E.Richardson — Fishes of Illinois 454

Llon, N. — Parasites in Roumania 455

Przibkam, Hans — Experimental Biology 563

Midge, G. P. — Chemical Nature of Albinism 563

Lloyd, R. E. — Races of Indian Rats 563

Kazzanduk, Julius — Hairs on Mole' s Hand 564

Beddard, F. E.— Notes on Ungulates 564

CONTENTS. xi

PAOB

Bentham, T. — Asiatic Horns and Antlers 564

Shull, Charles A. — Abnormal Incisors of Woodchuck 564

Francois- France, Ch. A. — Respiration in Tortoise 564

Siebenkock, F. — Synopsis of Ghelonia 564

Kellicott, W. E. — Survival after Injury in Toads 565

Allen, E. J. — Mackerel and Sunshine 565

Tschernoff, N. D. — Ear of Flying Fish 565

Johnstone, J as. — Abnormal Brill 565

Gentes, L. — Inferior Lobes of Torpedo Brain 565

Eemlingeb, P. — Hereditary Immunity to Rabie* 566

Phisalix, M. — Immunity of Snakes to Amphibian Poison ."itifi

Brinkmann, August — Integumentary Glandular Organs in Anthropoids .. .. 709

Panella, A. — Action of Extract of Suprarenal Capside on the Isolated Heart .. 709

Williams, S. R. — Hibernating Racoon 709

Andersson, Lars Gabriel — Genital Organs of Rodents 710

Kuthenthal, W. — Hairs in Adult Dolphins 710

Bean, R. B. — Types of Human Ears 710

Versloys, J. — Large Parasphenoid in Turtle 710

Siebenrock, F. — Pseudemydura 710

Aime, Paul, & Christian Champey — Organ of Bidder in Toad 710

Reichard, J. — Warning Colours in Coral-Beef Fishes 710

Allis, E. P., Jun. — Cranial Anatomy of Mail-Cheeked Fishes 711

Gill, Theodore -Archer-fish 711

Panella, A. — Nuclein Material in Various Stages of Eel 711

Boeke, J. — Nervous System of Lancelet 711

Tunicata.

Pizon, A. — Phagocytosis and Auto-digestion in Diphsoma 37

Streiff, R. — Musculature of Sal pa .. 37

Julin, Charles — Phosphorescence of Pyrosoma 180

Martini, E. — Constancy of Histological. Element* in Oikopleura longicauda .. .. 344

Chatton. E. — Asidian Fixed in Skin of Holothurian 345

Daumezon, G. — New Species of Didemnoides 455

Neumann, G. — New Species of Pyrosoma 455

„ New Species of Doliolum • • • • • 455

Brooks, W. K. (the late)— Pelagic Tunicates of Gulf Stream 566

INVERTEBRATA.

Mollusca.
Reynell, A. — Molluscs from Bay of Biscay 566

a- Cephalopoda.

Distaso, A. — Embryos of Sepia ^

Cuenot, & others— Branchial Hearts of Cephalopods J*°

Rcssell, E. S. — North Sea Cephalopods •'.•_'

Guerin, J.— Tentacular Apparatus of Cephalopods '•'•;

Baglioni, S.— Olfactory 'and Tactile Sensitiveness of Octopus »°b

Isgrove, Annie — Memoir of Eledone

j8 Gastropoda.

Calugareanu, D., & J. Dragoiu— Respiratory Epithelium in Pulmonale Gastropods K8

Tschachotin, S. — Statocysts of lieteropods ^

Eliot, Sir Charles — Sudanese Nudibranchs

Heath, Harold— Subradular Nervous Sydem of Solenogastres

Nierstrasz, H. F. — Antarctic Solenogaster .',',' (

Thiele, J.— Bathysciadium, Lepetella, and Addiwnia

Xli CONTENTS.

PAGE

Danforth, C. H. — New Pteropod from New England 345

Colgan, N. — Use of Slime-threads in Marine Gastropods 346

Vles, M. — Snail on the Windoic -pane 456

Robert, A. — Movements of Gastropods 456

Koehler, R., & A. Vaney — New Prosobranch on Sea-urchins 456

Bauer, Albert — Abnormal Tentacles inWater-snails 456

Thiele, J. — Revision of Chitons 566

Bohn, G . — Homing of Limpets 567

Perrier, Remy, & Henri Fischer — Pallial Cstcum in Bulloidea 567

Massy, Anne L. — Pteropods and ' Heteropods of Coasts of Ireland 567

Nekrassoff, A. — Maturation and Fertilisation in Cymbulia peronii .. .. • 567

Bellion, Marguerite — Hibernation of Snail 712

„ „ Respiration of Hibernating Snail 712

Tur, Jan — Action of Radium Rays on Ova of Philine 712

MacFahland, F. M. — New Brazilian Opisthobranchs 713

5. Lamellibranchiata.

Stenta, Mario — Classification of Lamellibranchs 39

Pelsenf.er, Paul — Branchial Eyes of Bivalves 180

Dakin, \V. J. — Striped Muscle in Mantle of Lamellibranchs 346

„ „ Pecten 346

Stafford, J.— Life-history of Canadian Oysters 346

Stenta, Mario — Observations on Pinna 347

Mautin, F. — Movements of Cyclas 347

Kobelt, W. — Geological Interest of Distribution of Fresh-ioater Mussels 456

Milroy, J. A. — Seasonal Variations in the Glycogen made by Oysters 567

Arthropoda.

a. Insecta.

Wesche, W. — The Mouth-parts of the Nemocera and their Relations to the other
Families in Diptera. Corrections and additions to the papers published in

1904 (Plates I. to IV.) 1

Meisenheimer, J. — Regeneration of Wing in Lepidoptera 39

Sohleip, W. — Polar Body Formation in Ant 40

Woodwokth, C. W. — Leg Tendons of Insects 40

Kennel, J. — Palsearctic Tortricidse 40

VVeise, J. — Philippine Cassididse 40

Hesse, Ekich — Lucilia as a Parasite 41

Banks, Charles S. — Mosquito Breeding in Salt- and Fresh-water 41

Kammerek, P. — Regeneration of Wing in Flies 41

Willesi, Victor — Chironomid Larvse living in Leaves 41

Chadwick, G. H. — Phytoptid Galls of North America 41

Thompson, O. S. — Abdominal Appendages of Male Dragon flies 41

Bordas, L. — Arborescent Glands of Female Cockroach 42

Bruntz, L. — Kidneys of Thysanvra 42

Carpenter, G. H. — Antarctic Aptera 42

Pantel, J. — Vestigial Organs in Larval Muscids 181

Kahle, W. — Piedogenesi* of Cecidomyids 181

Guilbeau, Braxton H. — Froth in Spittle-inserts .. ., 181

Silvestri, F. — Development of Parasitic Humenoptera 182

Enderlein, Gunther — Myrmecophilu* Wingless Fly 182

Bruyant, L. — Mites on Mosquitoes 182

Newstead, Robert — Economic Entomology 182

Silvestri, F. — Primitive Insects 182

Wesche, W. — Proboscis of Blow-fly 182

Hallez, P. — Crystals of the Cockroach' s Egg-shell 183

Bordas, L. — Genital Apparatus of Female Cockroach .. 183

Vosseler, J. — Myrmecophana fallax Brunner 183

CONTENTS. xiii

PAGE

Meitnier, F. — Flies in Amber 183

Berlese, A. — Treatise on Entomology 347

Bonnier, Gaston — Sense of Direction in Bees 347

Leeiwen, W. Docters van — Metamorphosis in Isosoma graminicola 347

Portier, P. — Respiration of Aquatic Insects . .. 348

„ „ Stii/mata of Aquatic Insects 348

„ „ Digestion in Larvx of Water Beetles 348

Guyenot, E. — Sensorial Papillae on Proboscis of Lepidoptera 34s

Samson, Katharina — Excretion during Metamorphosis of Heterogenea 348

TragIrdh, Ivar — Thaumatoxena 349

Smith, F., & others — Tumbu-fly 349

Berger, E. W.— Whitefly Studies 349

Bugnion, E., & X. Popoff — White Wax of China 349

Bueno, J. R. de la Torre — Autotomy of Hemelytra in certain Halobatime .. .. 319

Werner, F. — African Mantids and Belated Forms 350

Niessen. J. — Galls of the Lower Rhine 350

Riley, W. A. — Muscle Attachment in Insects 456

Foot, Katharine, & E. C. Strobell — Nucleoli in Spermatocytes and Ova .. . . 457

Carpenter, G. H. — Injurious Insects and Acarines in Ireland 457

Cuenot, L. — Do Drones arise from Parthenogenetic Ova? 457

Roubaud, E. — Links between Solitary and Social Wasps 457

Kirmayer, R. -Month-parts of Wasps 457

Kolisko, Alfred — Inbreeding of Deli na tilise 458

Knoche, E. — Ovaries of Pine Beetle 458

Hirschler, Jan — Development of Donatio crassipes 458

Wesche, W. — Eyes of Diptera .. .. 458

Pantel, J. — Number of Segments in Muscid Larvae 459

Borner, C. — Br aula and Thaumatoxena 459

Holmgren, Nils — Endogamy in Termites 459

Borner, C — Morphological Character of Tracheal Gills 459

Pantel, J., & R. de Sinety — Reproduction of Phasmidx 459

Silyestri, F. — Studies on Thysanura 459

Brues, C. T. — Tropisms of Insects 568

Japha, Arnold — Terrifying Attitude of Eyed Hawk-moth 568

Kosminsky, Peter — Influence of Cold and Moisture on Lepidoptera 568

Guyenot, Emile — Papillx on Proboscis of Lepidoptera 569

Delcourt, A.— Abrupt Var iation in Drosophila confusa .. 569

Perez, Charles— Metamorphosis of Anterior Part of the Alimentary Canal in

Muscid Larvae •• ?.&)

Hirschler, Jan — Gastrulation in Gastroidea viridula »bJ

Scott, L. L. — Study of Genus Disonycha «^ l {

Patton, W. S — Bed Bugs «gj

Wielowieyski, H. — Ovary of Rhynchota ?'

Leigh, H. S. — Study of Lea; -insect ^'

Bordas, L. — Accessory Genital Organs in Female Cockroach 'J-'

Crampton, G. C. — Thoracic Sclerites of Insects 'J|*

Picard, F. — Burroiving Wasp Destructive of Glossina.. J 1 ^

Davis, H. S. — Spermatogenesis in Acrididee and Locustidse «j«

Marchal, P. — Oviposition in Aphelinus ' ?

Adlerz, G. — Gyuandromorphs of Anergates atratulus '^\

Lutz, Ad. — Studies of Diptera _.,,

Kerlin, D.— Larvae of a Fly in Earthworms 'J.^

Perez, Charles — Metamorphosis of Muscles in Muswte ,i|^

Comes, Orazio, & A. Berlese— Insects Injurious to Olives '*|j

Garcia- Varela, Antonio— Procession Moth in Galacia '

Hollande, A. Ch. — Blood of Beetles ,_,,,

Jeannel, Rene — Cave Beetles „,y

Blaisdell, Frank E. — Genus Eleodes „^~

Roques, Xavier— Ferments in Larval \ Trichoptera •• •■ •• ••

Variations in Oxidising Ferment in Metamorphosis of Caddis-* ly /J/

Lutz, F. E. — Taxonomic Characters of Gryllus i.^

Shelford, R. — Amphibious Cockroaches

XIV CONTENTS.

&• Myriopoda.

Ancel, P., & P. Bouin — Dimorphic Spermatogenesis in Scutigera 42

Verhoefp, K. W. — New Littoral Millipede 183

SiLVESTRi, F. — New North American Millepedes 350

„ „ Studies on Centipedes 571

Attems, Carl Graf — Ethiopian Myriopods 571

Doncaster, L. — Abnormal Pair of Appendages in Lithobius 571

Chalande, J. & H. Ribaut — Taxonomy of Hi ma.ntariidse 718

Attems, Carl Graf — ' Vega' Myriopods 718

y- Prototracheata.

Spencer, Baldwin — New Species of Peripatoides 570

Bouvier, E. L. — New Australian Peripatus 719

Muir, F., & Kershaw, J. C. — New Peripatus from the Moluccas 719

S. Arachnida.

Hirst, A. S. — Stridulating Organs in Mygalomorph Spiders 42

Montgomery, T. H. — Activities of Araneads 43

Wallstabe, P. — Development of Spiders ,. .. 43

Williamson, Wm. — Hydrwhnid* from Tiree 43

Ruhlemann, H. — Malleoli of Solpugidse . . 43

Norman, A. M. — Podosomata of Temperate Atlantic and Arctic Oceans 43

Smith, Frank P. — British Spider* 183

F age, Louis — New Marine Spider 184

Williamson, W. — Scottish Hydrachnids .. 184

Soar, C. D. — Hydrachna ?84

Diguet, L., & E. Simon — Social Mexican Spider .. 350

Marshall, Ruth — Species of Arrhenur us in the United States 350

Borrel, A. — Demodex and Disease 350

Sokoloff, Iwan — Lymphoid Glands in Scor pi 'on 459

Paok-Beresford, Denis R. — Irish Spiders 460

Gozo, Angela — Arachnids of Caves 460

Schurmann, W. — Mange in Bats 460

Williamson, W. — Atax and Unionicola 460

Borrel, A. — Demodex and Leprosy 460

Jarvi, T. H. — Vagina of Lycosidx 571

Hirst, A. S. — Oriental Selifugae 571

Nuttall, G. H. F., & others — Monograph on Ixodoidea 572

Simon, Eugene — Spiders af Morocco 719

Brcyant, L. — Harvest Mites on Man 719

Verdun, P. — Trombidium and its Allies 719

Ewing, Henry E. — Gribatoidea of Illinois 720

Cole, Leon J. — Eastern Pacific Pycnogonids 720

e. Crustacea.

Hindle, E. — Variation of Green Gland of Crayfish 44

Briot, A. — Abnormality in Copulatory Appendage of Crayfish .. .. '. 44

Chichester, F. E. — Daily Life of Cambarus bartonius 44

Nascimento, Luiz Gonzaga Do — Breeding-periods of Portuguese Crustaceans .. 44

Racovitza, Emile G. — New Mediterranean Isopod 45

,, „ Cavernicolous Trichoniscinx 45

Harman, Mary T. — Regeneration and Moulting in Gammarus , .. .. 45

Stebbing, T. R. R. — Two Neiv Northern Amphipods 45

Smith, G. W. — Anaspididse 45

Tattersall, W. M. — Antarctic Schizo pods 46

Farran, G. P. — Species of Oithona 46

Woodward, Henry — Loricula darwini 46

Wolfenden, R. Norris — Antarctic Copepods 46

CONTENTS. XV

PAQK

Dogiel, V. — New Parasitic Copepod 47

Fischel, Alfred — Nerves of Entomostraca 47

Esterley. C. 0. — Optie Organ* of Eucalanw .. 47

Brozek, Arthur— Variation in Palx.nonetes Varians .. 184

Bruntz, L. — Blood-forming Organs in Cumacea 184

Ridewood. W. G. — Abnormal Oviducts in Lobster 184

Calman, W. T. — New Crab from Telegraph Cable in Indian Ocean 185

Bare, Freda — Body-spaces and so called Excretory Organs of Ibla quadrivalvis .. 185

Bordage, Edmond— Mutation in Atyidas 185

Scott, Thomas— New and Rare Entomostraca from Scottish Seas 185

Legendre, K. — Traces of Autotomy in a Fossil 185

Gurney. R. — On the Fresh-water Crustacea of Algeria and Tunisia (Plates VII.

to XIV.) 273

Cowles, R. P. —Behaviour of Ocypoda arenaria 351

Kiernik, E. — Luminescence in Grustace i .. ., 352

Calman, W. T. — Notes on Palinuridte 352

Tattersall, W. M. — Mediterranean Schi.opods 352

Police, G. — Visceral Nervous System in Sqtiilla mantis .. .. . 352

Caullery, Maurice — Studies on Liriopsidas 352

Wenke, W. — Eyes of A pus 353

Woltereck, R. — Varieties of Daphni 'a 353

Byrnes, Esther F. — Species of Cyclops 353

Chatton, E. — Copepod Parasites of Tunicates 354

Drzewina, Anna — Experiments on Locomotion of Crabs 4tJ0

Boudage. E. — Regeneration in Aty a serrata . . 4G1

Lloyd, R. E. — Bathynomns giganteus 4til

Minkiewicz. Romauld — Colours of t] 'ippolyte variant 401

Baker, VV. H. — South Australian Marine Isopods 462

Ortmann, A. E. — New Schizopods from Alaska 572

Stebbing, T. R. R. — New Species of Grandidierella 572

Man, J. G. De — Caridina nilotica and its Varieties 572

Carl, Joh. — Monograph on Swiss Isopods 572

Richardson, Harriet — Leidya distorta -">72

Stebbing, T. R. R. — New Amphi pod from Costa Rica 573

McC'lendon, J, F. — Spon gi colons Crustaceans = 573

Potts, F. A. — SaccuUna on Shore-crab 573

Da kin, W. J. — Alimentary Canal and Food of Copepoda 573

Birge, E. A. — Summer Resting Stage in Cyclops bicuspidatus . 574

Brehm, V. — Entomostraca from Tripoli* and Barh a •■ 574

Sars, G. 0. — Tanganyika Copepods 574

Gravier, Ch. — Regeneration of Antennas in Palsemon olfersi •• 720

Cummings, Bruce F. — Land Isopods oj Lundy Island 720

Annandale, Nelson — Indian Barnacles 720

Hoek, P. P. C— ' Siboga ' Cirripeds 7-1

Brement, E. — Ascidicolous Copepods 721

Annulata.

Falger, F. — Luminescence of Acholoe astericola 48

Enders, Howard E. — Tube* of Chxtopterus

Elrington, G. A. — Larva of Eunice conch d egi i

Plessis, G. Du — Protandry in Grubea

Soulier, A.— Polyspermy in Protula meilhaci

AshwoRTH, J. H. — Giant Nerve-cell* of Holla

Michel, Aug. — Regeneration in Saccocirrus

Ivanov, P. — Regeneration in Spirograplii* *po1lanzani

Lanchester, W. F. — Antarctic Species of Phascolosoma 50

Ikeda, Iwaji — New Deep-sea Echiurid 50

Martiis, Luigi Cognetti de — Penis of Criodrilini 50

Hemingway, Ernest E. — New Leech .. *>0

Stimmer-Traunfels. Rudolf Ritter von — New Myzostomum 50

Moltchanoff, L. A. — Nephridia of Phasoolion |,v '

XVI CONTENTS.

AGa

Michel, Ai'G. — Stolons of Syllids 186

,. Sijllis vivipara 186

Mayer, A. G.— Atlantic Palolo 186

Ikeda, I. — New Eehiuroid 187

Michel, A. — Multiple Cephalisation in SyUis 354

Maule, Vaclav — Innervation of the Pharynx in Oligochxta .. 354

Southern, Rowland — Oligochxta of the British Isles 462

Gravier, Ch. — Ilegeneration of Anterior Portion of Chxtopterus 462

Malaquin, A. — Nephridia of Salmacina and Filograna 462

Miciiaelsen, W. — Study of Tubificidx • . . . 462

Mencl, E. — Ley dig's Punktsubstanz in Nerve-cord of Leech 462

Jakiibski, A. W. — Supporting Tissue of the Nervous System of Leeches at the Anterior

and Posterior Ends 463

Braem, F. — Change of Sex in Ophryotrocha puerilis 575

Kostanecki, K. — Artificial Parthenogenesis in Aricia 575

Elwes, E. V. — Littoral Polychxta of Torquay 575

Salensky, W.— Development of Echiurus 575

Ritter-Zahony, R. von — Mediterranean Chsetognatha 575

Goddard, E. J. — Australasian Oligoch seta 575

Sterling, S. — Vascular System of Oligochxta 576

Joseph, H. — Amozbocytes of Lumbricus 576

Michaelsen, W., & J. Stephenson — Indian Oligochxta 577

Michaei sen. \V. — Fresh-water Oligochxta 577

Johansson, L. — Fresh-water Hirudinea 577

Goddard, E. J. — New Australian Leech 577

Bilek, Fr. — Minute Structure of Vascular System in Branchiobdella 577

Hesse, E. — Spermatogenesis in Earthworm 721

Pierantuni, Umberto — New Marine Oligpchxt 721

Cerruti, Attilio — Paraonidx 722

Martiis, Luigi Oognetti de — Modifications of Earth-worm's Structure Due to

Nematodes .. 722

CJbavely, F. H. — Polychxt Larvx 722

Eoeser, R. — Ciliated Organs of Birudinex 722

Moltschanuff. L. A. — Chsetognatha of Black Sea 722

Galzon, P. — Chsetognatha of Pacific- Boreal Sub-region 723

ISTematohelminthes .

Fayet & Moreau — Notes on Nematodes 50

Goldschmidt. R. — Nervous System of Ascaris 51

Shipley, A. E., &R. T. Leiper — Cystidicola farionis 51

Schepotieff, A. — Excretory System of Echinorynch us gigas 187

Potts, F. A. — Sexual Phenomena in Free-living Nematodes 187

Railliet, A., & A.Henry — Classification of Strongylidx 187

Martini, E. — Development of Nematodes ■■ 354

Unterbeuger, Fr. — Oxyuris in connection with Appendicitis ■• 354

Shipley, A. E. — Nematodes in Grouse 355

Raillet, A., & A. Henry — Classification of Strongylidx 463

Glaue, H. — Ascaris cam's and Ascaris felis 463

Rheindorff — Filar ia in Human Spleen 463

Rosseter, T. B. — New Tapeworm from Wild Duck 464

Fiebiger, J. — Parasites on Zeus faber .. . . 464

Ja'gerskiold, L. A. — Trematodes from Birds 464

Arnsdorff, A. — New Species of Monostomum 464

Bruyant, A. — Planaria alpina in Auvergne 464

Dawydoff, C — Regeneration in Nemerteans 464

Sweet, Georgina — Australian Endoparasites 578

Jagerskiold, L. A. — Fresh-water Nematodes 578

Camerano, L. — Indian Gordiacea 578

Schaffner, John H. — Chromosome Differentiation in Ascaris megalocephala .. .. 723

Mathis, C, & M. Leger — New Filaria in a Lemur 723

Ja'gerskiold, L. A. — Eustrongylides and Hystrichis 723

CONTENTS. xvii

Platyh.elminth.es.

i i

Sabussow, H. — Crystalloids in Epithelial Cells of Planarians 51

Hallez, Paul — History of Nuclei of Yollt-celh in Rhabdocoelids .51

Linton, Edwin — Cestode Cysts in Flesh of Butterflth 51

„ „ Egg-making in a Trematode f>'2

>teinmann. P. — Regeneration in I'lanarian 1ST

Pieron, H. — Movements of Convoluta 188

Hallez, Paul — Paracortex scrobicularix Wahl 1K8

Athias. M. — Trematode in Hibernating Gland, of Hedgehog 188

Miestinger. K. — Structure of Sterrhwrus fusiformis Liihe 188

Rosseter, T. B. — Hymenolepis farciminalis 1S8

Neveu-Lemaire, Maurice — Larval Ligula in Cranial Cavity of Tench 188

Hajimerschmidt, J. — Spermatozoa of Planar ia lactea 355

Hofsten, Nils von — Planaria alpina on Northern Swedish Mountains 355

Wilhelmi, J. — Observations on Otoplana 355

Raillet, A., & A. Henky — New Species of Echinostoma in Dog 355

Linstow, O. von — Distomum Larvae, in a Caterpillar 355

Nicoll, W., & W. Small — Larval Trematodes 355

Ward. Henry B.— Determination of Human Entozoa 356

Garrison, Philip E. — New Intestinal Trematode of Man 356

Shipley, A. E. — Tapeworms in Grouse 356

,, „ Triasnophorus nodulosus 356

Barbieki, C. — New Species of frhthyotsenia , 356

Linton, Edwin — Cestodes of the Dry Tortugas 356

Fuhrmann, O. — Anonchotsenia .. : ; 57

Salensky. W. — Development of Prosworhmus viviparus 357

Johnstone, Jas. — Endoparasites of Fishes 578

Fuhkmann, O. — New Davaineidse 578

Nicoll, W. — Structure and Classification of Digenetic Trematodes 578

Barrois, Th. — New Species of Chiorchis 578

Nicoll, W. — Entozoa of British Fishes 723

Tsuchiya, J. — Japanese Schistosomiasis .. 723

Garrison, P. E., & R. Leynes — Conditions of Development in Paragonimus . . . . 724

Mo.nticelli, F. S. — Nitzsehia 724

Oxner, M. — Hermaphroditism in a Nemertean "2-t

Incertse Sedis.

Masterman, A. T. — Nutritive Process in Tornaria '-

Tkeda, Iwaji — Swimming Habit of Japanese Enteropneust 52

Oka, Asajiro — New Genus of Fresh-water Bryozoa from Japan »2

Poche, Franz — Review of Aetinotrocha liS ^

Menneguy, F. — Remarkable Epithelium in Bryozoa, 188

Caullery, M., & A. Lavallee — Fertilisation and Development in Orthonectids .. 357

Waters, A. W. — Bryozoa from the Sudanese Red Sea 358

Spencer, Baldwin— 4n/maZ of Doubtful Affinity •• *65

Martin, C. H. — Weldonia parayguensis •"''

Annandale. N. — New Indian Phylactolssmnta ■'*'

Reynell, A. — Br ichiopods from Bay of Biscay °°'

Yakowlew, N. — Attachment of Brachip'ds 724

Zschiesche, A. — Metamorphosis of Alcyonidium mytili '"

Rotifera.

Murray, James — Philodina macrostyla and its AUies ■.'•;

Beauchamp. P. VE—Notommata (Copeu*) pseudocerberus sp. n -J;;

Lauterborn, R. — Gelatinous Envelope in Plankton Rotifers •_';;

Whitney, D. D. — Desiccation of Rotifers V •" " '-'■■

Surface. Frank M.— Formation of New Colonies of Megalotrocha alboflameans .. ■■■>

Hlava, Stanislav — Monograph of the Melicertidx •'

Stevens, John — Rotifera of the Exeter District

Dec. 15th, 1009 b

xviii CONTENTS.

PAGR

Rousselet, C. F. — On Synchxta fennica sp. «., and Remarks on the Resting-egg of

Synchxta pectinata (Plate V.) 170'

Wesenberg-Lund — Seasonal Variation in Plankton RotiJ 'era . 189

Rousselet, C. F. — Rotatorian Fauna of Boston 189

Penahd, E. — Parasitic Rotifer in Rhizopod 579

Echinoderma.

Bell, F. Jeffrey — Antarctic Echinoderms 54

MacBride, E. W., & J. C. Simpson— Echinoderm Larvsefrom the A ntarctic. . . 54

Morgulis, 8. — Effect of Alkaloids on Early Development of Sea-urchin 54

Edwards, C. L. — Species of Holothuria Studied Biometrically 54

Chadwick, H. C. — Sudanese Crinoids 55

Clark, A. H. — Ecology of Recent Crinoids 55

Millan, F. Aranda y — Echinoderms of the Coasts of Spain 189

Pritchard, G. B. — Genus Linthia in Victoria 189

Clark, H. L. — Australian and Indo- Pacific Echinoderma 358

Bohn, G. — Movements of Starfishes on the Shore 358

Reichensperger, A. — Glands of Ophiuroids 358

Trojan, Emanuel — Luminescent Ophiuroids 465

Godlewskt, E., jun. — Nucleus and Cytoplasm in Sea-urchin Development .. .. 465

Fritsch, Anton — Echinoderm Larva from Lower Silurian .. .. 465

Tennent, D. H. — Cross-fertilised Echinoid Ova 580

Stockard, C. R. — Regeneration in Ophiuroids 580

Clark, A. R.—New Crinoids 580

„ „ Abnormal Arm-structure in Crinoids 581

„ „ Genus Eudiocrinua 581

„ „ Japanese Comat'dids 581

Koehler, Rene — Deep-aea Starfishes 725

Becher, Siegfried — Statocysts of Synaptids 725

Clark, A. H. — Non- Muscular Articulations in Crinoids 725

Wood, Elvira — Crinoids of Tennessee 725

Ccelentera.

Clubb, Joseph A. — Antarctic Sea- Anemones 55

Old, E. H. H. — Stinging by Jellyfish 55

Kukenthal, W. — New Chrysogorgids 56

Thomson, J. Arthur, & James M. McQueen — Sudanese Alcyonarians .. .. 56

Kukenthal, W. — Revision of the Family Melitodidse 56

Motz-Kossowska, S. — Variation in Plumidari a 56

Thornelt, Laura Roscoe — Sudanese Hydroids 57

Broch, Hjalmar — Distribution of Diphyes aretica 57

Koelitz, W. — Transverse Division in Hydra 57

Pieron, H. — Rhythms in Sea- Anemones 189

,, Opening and Closing of Sea- Anemones 190

Herouard, E. — Developmental Cycles of a Scyphi stoma 190

Mayer, A. G. — Pulsation in Medusse 190

Kinoshita, Koiao — New Primnoids 191

Kukenthal, W. — Neio Plexaurids 191

Billard, A. — British Museum Sertulariidee 191

Thomson, J. Arthur, & G. Crane — Alcyonarians from Gulf of Cutch 358

Jaderholm, E. — Hydroids of Behring Sea 359

Morse, Max — Autotomy of Hydra nth of Tubularia 359

Ritchie, James — Clad ocar pus for mosua 359

Brauer, A. — Speciea of Hydra 465

Koelitz, W. — Transverse Division in Hydra 466

Billard, A.- — New Plumular id in the ' Challenger' Collection 466

Franz, Y„ & E. Stechow — Commensalism of Fish and Hydroid 466

Torrey, H. B. — Leptomedusm of San Diego 466

Hartlaib, Cl. — Medusoids from East Africa 466

Bohn, G. — Fission and Autotomy in Sea-anemones 466

CONTENTS. xix

PAGE

Bohn, G. — Green Pigment of Actinia equina 4H7

McClendon, J. F. — Crawling Sea- anemone ."i>sl

Gardiner, J. Stanley — Indian Ocean Fungiidm 581

Cooper. C. Forster — Indian Ocean Antipatharians 582

Balss, H. — Japanese Pennatulids 582

KiiKENTHAL, W. — Japanese Gorgon ids 582

Nutting, Charles C. — Alcyonarian* from Hawaiian Maud* 582

Gravier, Ch. — Alcyonarians of Tadjoimth 583

Jonesen, C. N. — Eurhamphxa vexilligera 583

Stockard, C. R. — Begeneration in a Medusa 583

Boulenger, C. L. — Migration of Thread-cell* of Mosrisia 583

Goodey, T. — Gonadial Grooves of Aurelia aurita 584

Hickson, Sydney J., & Helen M.England — Indian Ocean Stylasterina . . .. 584

Hadzi, Jovan — Budding of Hydra 584

Ritchie, J ajjes — SelaginopsU 584

„ „ Hydroids of the Scottish Antarctic Expedition 585

., „ Hydroids from Andaman Islands 585

Billard, Armand — Revision of Lanwuroux's Collections of Hydroids . 725

Torrey, H. B. — New Leptomedusm 725

Bigeli iw, Henry B. — New Medusa 726

Herouard, E. — Relationship of Scyphomedusse and Anthozoa 726

Annandale, Nelson — Pelagic Sea- Anemone without Tentacles 726

Bassler, Ray S. — Dendroid Graptolites 726

Porifera.

Jenkin, C. F. — Antarctic Calcarea 57

Kirkpatrick, R. — Antarctic Sponges 57

,, „ New Genera of Pharetronid Sponges 57

Annandale, N. — Fresh-water Sponges in Scotland 58

Topsent, E. — Neptune's Cup 191

Annandale, N. — New Fresh-ioater Sponge 585

., „ South African Freshwater Sponges 726

„ New Freshioater Sponges 726

Vosmaer, G. C. J. — Poterion, a Boring Sponge '• 727

Kirkpatrick, R. — Merita and its Encrusting Sponge J_27

Seale, Alven — Philippine Sponges 727

Protozoa,

Penard, E. — New Rhizopods 58

Sidebottom, H. — Foraminif era from Coast of Delos 58

Faure-Fremiet, E. — Peridinians of the Bay of Hougue 58

Roubaud, E. — New Flagellate in Congo Flies 58

Prowazek, S. — Life-history of Glaucoma scintillans 59

Laveran, A. — Trypanosoma congolense 59

Dobell, C. C. — Alleged Autogamy of Bodolacertm 59

Porter, Annie — New Schizogregarine from an Ascidian 59

Martin, C. H. — Observations on Acinetaria

Poyarkoff, E. — Neui Ciliated Infusorian

Franqa, C. — Hxmogregarina splendens l"o

Layekan, A., & Salembeni — Neio Hsemogregarine from a Lizard

Laveran, A., & A. Pettit — llsemogregorina lacertse

Edington, A. — Try panosome in Zanzibar Horse

Leger, P., & O. Dtjbosq— Sexual Reproduction in Actinoce.phalidse 193

Heron-Allen, E., & A. Earland— On the Recent and Fossil Foraminifera of the

Shore-sands of Selsey Bill, Sussex— II. (Plates XV., XVI.) 306

Zuelzer, Margarete — Wagnerella borealis j^

Cushman, Joseph A. — Forminifera of Woods Hole &y

Staff, Hans v. — Dimorphism and Fusion in Fusulinids j™«

Stolc, A.— Intracellular Agglutination in Pelomyxa

/' _

XX CONTENTS.

PAGE

Noc, F. — Amoeba of Dysentery in Cochin-China 360

Mast, S. 0. — Habits of Didinium nasutum 360

Brodsky, Abraham — Frontonia leucas 361

Beauchamp, P. de — Infusorians in Holothurians 361

Powers, J. H. — Studies on Volvox 361

Faure-Fremiet, E. — Macronucleus of Ciliata 361

Kiernik, E. — New Species of Cfiilodon on Fishes 361

Roubaud, E. — New Leptomonad in Muscids 362

Leger, L., & O. Duboscq — Microsporidian parasitic in a Gregarine 362

Gonder, R. — Position of Spirochseta .... . 362

Hekox-Allen, E., & A. Earland — On the Recent and Fossil Foraminifera of the

Shore-sands of Selsey Bill. Sussex— III. (Plates XVII., XVIII.) 422

Heron-Allen, E., & A. Earland — New Technitella and its Selection of Shell

Material 467

Bureau, G., & A. L abbe — Botryomycosis 467

Janicki. C. — Cockroach's Parasites 468

Minchin, E. A. — Flagellates in Blood of Fresh-water Fishes 468

Bouet, G. — Trypanosomes of Cold-blooded Animals 468

Woodruff, Lorande L. — Influence of Alcohol on Lfie-cycle of Infusoria .. .. 468

Wrtjblewski, K. J. — Trypanosome in European Bison 468

Noc, F. — Balantidum coli in Macaque Monkey 469

Franca, C. — Hsemogregarines of the Lizard 469

Negri, A. — Studies on Sarcosporidia 469

Leger, L., & 0. Duboscq — Parasites from Lobster's Intestine tt'>'.<

Leger, Louis — Costia as a Trout-parasite 469

Perez, Charles — New Microsporidian 470

Prowazek, S. — Hsemogregarines in a Pentastomid 470

Mackinnon, Doris L. — Optical Properties of Contractile Elements in Eeliozoa . . 585

Bagg, R. M., Jun. — Foraminifera from Hawaiian Islands 586

Martin, C. H. — Dimorphism of Ophryodendron .. .. ' 586

Fiebiger, J. — Parasites of Fishes . . 586

Chatton, E., & E. Roubaud — Amcebidium in Larvx of Simulium 586

Mesnil, F., & E. Brimont — New Hsematozoon from Sloth 586

Bouet, G. — Hsemogregarines of East Africa 586

Brumpt, E. — Origin of Huemoflagellata in Vertebrates 587

Laveran, A. — Species of Trypanosomes 587

Heron-Allen, E., & A. Earland — On the Recent and Fossil Foraminifera of the

Shore-sands of Selsey Bill, Sussex — IV. (Plates, XX., XXI.) 677

Collin, B. — Conjugation in Acinetx 727

Martin, C. H. — Dimorphism, of Ophryodendron . . . . 728

Laveran, A., & A. Pettit — Hsemamceba in a Bird 728

Chatton, E. — New Trypanosome in a Bug 728

Leger, L., & 0. Duboscq — Intestinal Parasites of Larval Tipulid 728

Chatton, E. — New Trypanosomid in a Nycteribiid 729

Brimont, E. — Hrematozoa in Guiana 730

Alexieff, A. — Intestinal Flagellates of Amphibians 730

Brumpt, E. — Spirochsets of African Fowls 730

Leger, L., & 0. Duboscq — Alleged Sporozon 730

„ „ Microsporidian inside Gregarine 730

Weber, A. — Sarcosporidian in Gecko .. 730

Laveran, A., & A. Pettit — Hsemogregarines in Snakes 730

„ „ Hsemogregarine of Python 730

Miller, W. W. — New Hsemogregarine in Mites 731

Galli-Valerio, B. — Lymphangitis of Horses 731

CONTENTS. xx i

BOTANY.

GENERAL,,

Including' the Anatomy and Physiology of Seed Plants.

Cytology,

including Cell-Contents. page

Bealverie, J. — Aleurone Grains 60

Schappner, J. H. — Chromosomes of Marchantia 363

Griggs, R. F. — Amitosis in Synchytrium .. .. .. 363

Sheppard, E. J.— The Disappearance of the Nucleolus in Mitosis (Plate XIX) .. 551

Densmore, H. D. — Polar Caps in Smilacina 588

Schaffxer, J. H. — Reduction Division in Agave virginica .. 588

Yamaxouchi, S. — Mitosis in Fucus 588

Chamberlain, C. J. — Spermatogenesis in Dioon 589

d'Arbaumont, J.— Chlorophyll Bodies 732

Structure and Development.

Vegetative.

Dorety, H. A. — Seedling of Ceratozamia 60

Sprecher, A. — Secretory System of Ginkgo 60

Gatix, C. L. — Anatomy of Embryo of Cannacese and Musacese 61

Noll, Dr. — Adventitious Moots of Dicotyledons 61

Harshberger, J. W. — Leaf -structure of Sand-dune Plants of Bermuda .. .. 61

Legault, A. — Anatomy of the Geraniacese 62

Lixdinger, L. — Structure of Aloe dichotoma 194

Thiessen, R. — Anatomy of Dioon edule 194

Alien*, H. von — Thylose-formations 363

Berxatsky, J. — Phylloclades of Ruscus 3G4

Chandler, B. — Aerial Roots of Tibouchina Moricandiana 471

Col, M. — Parasitism of Lathrsea clandestine! 471

Dorety, H. A. — Vascular Anatomy of Microcycas 589

Jeffrey, E. C — Progress of Plant Anatomy .. 589

Coulter, J. M. — Recent Advances in Vascular Anatomy 590

Hill, T. G., & E. de Fraine— Seedling Anatomy 732

„ ., Seedlings of Conifers 732

Harshberger, J. W. — Leaf-Structure 'of Strand Plants 733

Strigl, M. — Anatomy of the Cortex of the Tubers of Balanophor a 733

Ledoux, M. — Root-modifications due to Artificial Wounding 734

Llsler, ill. — Extra-floral Nectaries and Papillse in Diospyro? 7.^4

Kirchmayr, A. — Extra-floral Nectaries of M eh tmpyrum 731

Lowr, E. — Leaf-fall and its accompanying Phenomena 734

Reproductive.

Coulter, J. M. — Embryology of Gnetum 62

Burlingame, L. L. — Male Cone and Gametophyte of Podocarpus 62

Tieghem. Ph. van — Structure of the Pistil, Ovule, Fruit, and Seed of Acanthacex 62
Avbboby, Lord — The President's Address: On Seeds, with Special Reference to

British Plants (Figs. 20- 41)

Kildahl. N. J. — Reproductive Organs of Phyllocladus alpinus '94

Brown, W. H. — Embryo-sac of Peperomia

WiNT, F. A. F. C. — Embryology of the Podostemaceie *'■[■'

Modilewski, J. — Embryo -formation of Gunnera

XX11 CONTENTS.

PAGE

Becquerel, P. — Fertilisation of the Poppy 364

Palibine, J. W. — Floral Anomaly in Doronicum 365

Thomson, K. B. — Pollen of Microcachrys tetragona 590

„ „ Megasporophyll of Saxegotha a and Microcachrys 735

Himmelbadr, \V. — Closing of the Micropyle of Gymnosperms 735

Guttenberg, H. von — Structure of the Antennas in Catasetum 735

Saxton, W. a T. — Parthenogenesis in Pinus Pinaster 736

Cook, M. T. — Embryo-sac of Passiflora adenophylla 736

Harshberger, J. W. — Chemical Solutions and Bud Development 736

Physiology.

Nutrition and Growth.

Freeman, G. P. — Transpiration in Plants 64

Molisch, H. — Rise in Temperature of Foliage-leaves 196

Hilton, A. E. — Reversing Currents in Plasmodia of Mycetozoa 196

Wissehngh, C. van — Physiology of the Cells of Spirogyra 197

Daniel, L. — Grafting of Perennial upon Annual Plants 365

Brocq-Kousseu & E. Gain — Amylase in Old Seeds 365

Maige, G. — Respiration of the Stamens and Pistil 365

Krascheninnikoff, Th. — Green Plants and Carbon Monoxide 471

Atkins, W. R. G. — Absorption of Water by Seeds 472

Jsicolas, G. — Respiration of the Aerial Parts of Vascular Plants 472

Kovessi, F. — Utilisation of Atmospheric Nitrogen by Specialised Hairs 736

Irritability.

Newcombe, F. C. — Gravitation-sensitiveness of Root 64

Fluri, M. — Influence of Aluminium Salts on Protoplasm 64

Bibliography 64

Lubimenko, W. — Influence of Light on Fruit Development 197

Nadson, G. A. — Effect of Light upon the Colour of Algm 197

Morgulis, S. — Effect of Alkaloids in Regeneration 197

Crocker, W., & L. I. Knight — Effect of Gas upon Carnations 198

Bruchmann, H. — Chemotaxis of Spermatozoids of Lycopodium 366

Lorch, W. — Hygroscopic Movements of Leaves 366

Heinricher, E. — Germination of Phacelia 472

Seefried, F. — Organs of Light-perception in Foliage-leaves 737

Haberlandt, G. — Light-perception in Foliage-leaves 737

General.

Correns, C. — Function of the Male Cell in the Determination of Sex 198

Chifflot, M. — Castration in Zea Mays produced by Ustilago 366

Vries, H. de — Triple Hybrids 473

Kerr, A. F. G. — Pollination of Dendrobium 473

Gamble, J. S., & others — Flora of the Malayan Peninsula 473

Burtt-Davy, J. — Incomplete Dichogamy in Zea Mays 591

d'Herculais, J. K. — Insects and the Asclepiadacese 591

Lovell, J. H. — Floral Coloration in Relation to Bees 737

Hill, E. J. — Cleistogamy in Linaria 738

CRYPTOGAMS.

Pteridophyta.

Browne, I. — Phytogeny and Inter -relationships of Pteridophyta 65

Jeffrey, E. C — Absence of hollar Gaps in the Lycopsida . . 65

Gwynne-Vaughan, D. T. — Nature of the Tracheal in Ferns 66

Tansley, A. G. — Vascular System of the Filicinese 66

Benson, M. — Sporangiophore in the Pteridophyta 66

McNicol, M. — Cavity Parenchyma and Tyloses in Ferns 66

CONTENTS. xxiii

PACK

Sykes, M. G. — Abnormality in Psilotum triquetrum 67

Stiles, W. — Structure of a Branch Cone in Equisetum 67

Lignier, O. — Origin of the Sphenophyllex 67

Weiss, F., & others — Fossil Ferns 67

Nathorst, A. G. — Use of Collodion Casts of Fossil Ferns 68

Bruchmann, H. — Frothallium of Lycopodium complanatum 68

Campbell, D. H. — Prothallium of Kaulfussia and Gleichenia 68

Buugerstein, A. — Effect of Different Liijht-rays on Prothallia 68

Step, E. — British Ferns 68

Hertee, W. — Pteridophyta of the French Mediterranean Basin 68

Hayek, A. v. — Ferns of Styria 69

Pirotta, B. — Ferns of Mount Buicenzori 69

Bidley, H. N. — Ferns of the Malay Peninsula 69

Hicken, C. — Ferns of Argentina 69

Bibliography 69

Browne, I. — Phytogeny of the Pteridophyta 199

Bertrand, P. — Stipes of Clepsydropsis 199

Jeffrey, E. C. — Foliar Gaps in the Lycopsida 199

Stephenson, G. B. — Young Stages of Dichsonia and Cyathea .. 199

Eknst, A. — Submersed Fern 200

Chaveaud, G. — Inconspicuousness of Ophioglossum vulgatum 200

Bruce, W. B. — Lycopidium alpinum in Dublin 200

Clute, W. N.. & others — North American Ferns .. 200

Beddome, R. H., & others — Indian Ferns .. .. 202

Christ, H. — Ferns of An nam 202

Copeland, E. B., & others — Ferns of South China 203

Christ, H. — Corean Ferns 203

Christ, H., & others — Ferns of the Philippines 203

Copeland, E. B. — Ferns of the Philippine Islands 203

Herter, W. — New Lycopodium from Tahiti 203

Bosenstock, E. — Ferns of New Guinea 204

Field, H. C, & others — Notes on Ferns of New Zealand 204

Hamilton, A., & others — Abnormal Ferns in New Zealand 204

Christensen, C, & H. Christ — Ferns of West Africa 205

Rosenstock, E., & H.Christ — Bolivian Ferns 205

Bosenstock, E. — New Ferns 205

Fritel, P. H. — Neic Fossil Species of Salvinia 205

Gordon, W. T.— Fossil Prothallus 205

Leavitt, B. G., & M. A. Day— Obituary Notice of Alvah A. Eaton 205

Browne, I. — Phytogeny of the Pteridophyta 367

Lang, W. H. — Alternation of Generations based on Ontogeny 367

„ „ Alternation of Generations 36S

•Schaffner, J. H. — Water -cavities of Equisetum : '*jS

Walter, E. — Ferns of the Vosges . . ^6S

Pitard, J., & L.Proust — Ferns of the Canary Islands 369

Benedict, B. C. — New Hybrids of Dryopter is in North America 369

•Copeland, E. B. — Ferns of Borneo

„ „ New Species of Cyathea from Asia M>9

Rosenburgh, C. R. W. K. Van Alderwerelt v ah— New or Interesting Malayan

Ferns 369

Behrend, F. — Ferns of the Carboniferous Period 370

Brick, C.—Fern Bibliography for 1906.. .. ._ : '"_\\

Bruchmann, H. — Structure of Selaginella Lyallii

Stokey, A. G. — Anatomy of Isoetes ^13

Gray, A. J. — Abnormal Sporocarp of Salvinia jj.;'

Senn, G. — Floats and Stripes in Marsilia *^

Bally, W. — Adventive Buds in Ceratopteris ^!'_'

Fritel, P. H., & R. Yigviek— Fossil Equisetacex and their Structure 4m

Jeffrey, E. C. — Nature of Algal or Boghead Coal ''';

Lammermayr, L. — Adaptation of Ferns to Light ''!

Herter, W. — Urostachys, a subgenus of Lycopodium, ' ]

Ferriss, J. H., & others — North American Ferns

XXIV CONTENTS.

PAGE

Sodiro, A., & others — New Ferns from South America 477

Blackman, V. H. — Alternation of Generations 591

Stone, G. E. — Force Exerted by Growing Plants .. 592

Sykes, M. (-J. — Sporophyll of Lycopodium inundatum 592

Halle, T. G. — Mesozoic Equisetales 592

Praeger, R. Lloyd — Lastrea rem ota in Ireland 592

Merino, P. B.. & F. de las Bakras — Spanish Ferns 592

Menezes, C. A. — Madeira Ferns 593

Benedict, R. C, & others — North American Ferns .. .. 593

Hieronymus, G. — South American Ferns 593

Kechinger, K. — Pteridophytes of Samoa 594

Maxon, W. R. — Neiv Spleenwort from China 594

Christ, H— Chinese Ferns 594

Copeland, E. B. — Ferns of the Malay-Asiatic Region 594

Rosenstock, E., & G. M. Hicken — Neiv Exotic Ferns 594

Boodle, L. A., & W. E. Hiley — Vascular Structure of Gleichenia 738

Sinnott, E. W. — Mesarch, Structure in Lycopodium 738

Beer, R. — Spore-wall of Equisetum 739

Thomas, H. H.— Fossil Cone of Calamostachys Binueyana 7:; ( J

Watson, D. M. S. — Mesostrobus, a new Fossil Cone l'.'<'->

Benedict, R. C. — Genus Ceratopteris • 740

Christensen, C. — Stigmatopteris, a neiv Genus of Ferns 740

Giesenhagen, K. — Galls on Ferns , 740

Bryophyta.

Schenck, H. — Phylogeny of the Archegoniatse and of the Characese 70

Leeuwen-Reijnvaan, J. & W. Doctors v. — Reduction and Fertilisation in Poly-

trichum 70

Blakesliuo, A. F. — Sexual Differentiation in the Spoi-es of Fegatella .... 70

Grout, A. J. — Structure of Mosses in Relation to Habitat 71

Geheeb, A. — Mouses and Environment 71

Zacharias, E. — Resting Periods in Ricci a 71

Gyorffy, I. — Abnormal Sporogonia in Mosses 71

Maheu, J. — Artificial Production of Propagula in Barbula 71

Fky, Sir Edward — Introduction to British Mosses 72

Wilson, A., & J. A. Wheldon — Muscinese of Inaernessshire 72

Larter, C. E. — Muscinem of North Devon 72

Macvicar, S. M. — Distribution of Lunularia in Britain 72

Yeates, H. R. — Means of Distribution of If epati cm 72

Arnell, H. W., & C. Jensen — Rare Scandinavian species of Cephalozia .. .. 72

Friren, A. & others — French Mosses 73

Dismier. G. — Philonotis in France 73

Douin, C.— French Hepatics 73

Friren, A., & T. Hdsnot — Death of C. Lacouture 73

Hammerschmid, A. P. — Mosses of Bavaria 74

Kern, F. — Moss-flora of the Bohe Tauem 74

Evans, A. W. — North American Eepaticse 74

Stephani, ¥.—Hepaticse of Samoa .. 74

Negri, G. — New Mosses from Mount Ruivenzori 74

Cardot, J. — Antarctic Mosses 75

W allace, A. II.— Life of Richard Spruce 75

Bibliography 75

Ernst, A. — Androgynous Inflorescences in Dumortiera 20(J

Barnes C. R., & \V. J. G. Land— Origin of Cupule of Mar chant ia 206

Davis, W. B. — Farrants' Medium for Mosses 206

Docin, 0.— Importance of Pedicel in Classification of Hepatics .. . .. .. 206

Brotherus, V. F. — Classification of Mosses 207

Report of the Moss Exchange ('I ub ... .. .. 207

Ingham, W. — Yorkshire Muscine/e 207

Evans, W., & others — Scottish Muscinese 207

CONTEXTS. XXV

FAGB

McArdle, D., & others — Irish Muscinem 208

Dismier, G. — Discovery of Pohlia bulbifera in France .. 209

Sebille, R. — Schistidium tarentasiense , 209

Dismier, G., & F. Camus — Sphagnum molle in France 209

Roll^ J. — Sphagnum pseudocontortum 209

Timm, R. — Moss-flora of Hamburg 210

Weber, C. A. — Mosses in the Peat on the Baltic Coast 210

Nicholson. W. E. — Mosses of the Eastern Alp* 210

Gyorffy, L — Some Hungarian Masse* .. 210

Elenkin, A. A., & A. A. Sapehin — Russian Bryology 210

Schiffner, V. — Bryophytes of Persia and Lyilia 211

Hagen, J. — Mu^cime of Spitsbergen 211

Frte. T. C, & others — North American Bryopltyte* 211

Williams, R. S. — Mosses of Panama 211

Schiffner, V. — South American Species of Piiccia 212

Paris. E. G. — Muscinem of French Guinea 212

Cardot, J. — Congo Mouses 212

Fleischer, M. — Moss- flora of Java 212

Stephani, F.— Hepatiae of the Philippine Islands 212

Okamfra, S. — Two New Genera from Japan 212

Cardot, J., & others — Nero Mosses of Japan, China, and New Caledonia .. . . 213

Paris, E. G. — Chinese Mosses 213

Dismier, G. — Fissidens algarvicus .. ~Si'.\

Burrell, W. H. — Formation of Leucobryum Cushions 213

Schtpfneb, V — Bucegia romanica 213

„ ,, Bryological Notes 214

Weber, C. A. — Mosses in the Peat of the Baltic Coast 214

Fkere Gasilien : an Obituary Note 214

Doein, C. — Germination and Sex in Sphserocarpus 370

Wilson, M. — Spore Formation and Nuclear Division in Mnium hornum 370

Horne, A. S. — Discharge of Antherozoids in Hepatics :!71

Paul, H. — Dislike of Sphagnacese for Lime 371

Dixon, H. N. — Distichophyllum, a Genus New to Europe 372

Watson, W. — -Moss-distribution in Somersetshire 372

MiJLLEB, K. — Hepaticx, of Europe 372

Bauer, E. — European Mosses 372

Dixon. H. N. — New and Rare British Muscinex 372

Lorexz A. — North American Bryophyta :; 73

Petard, J., & others — Bryophytes^of the Canary Islands 374

Cardot, J. — West African Mosses 3/4

Theriot, I. — Mosses of China, Japan, and New Caledonia :; ^

Paris. E. G. — Bryophytes of New Caledonia 374

Cardot, J. — Mosses of the Antarctic Regions 374

Muller. K. — Absorption of Water by Mosses and other Plants 477

Dixon, H. N. — Abnormal Bracts in Funaria hygrometrica 471

Davis, W. B. — Photomicrography of Mosses ' 478

Richteks, F. — Fauna of Mosses 478

Spixdler, M. — Moss Galls 478

Schiffner, V. — Bryological Notes 4 ^ s

Roth, G. — European Specie* of Drepanocladus 478

C'PPey, A. — Phascum lotharingicum, a New Species

Jexsen, C. — Sphagnum subsecundum and itsAllies

Krieger. \Y. — Key to Orthotrichum 479

Meylan. C. — Calypogeia trichomanus and its Allies 479

Torka, V. — Distribution of Timmia megapolitana

Brotheres, V. — Monograph of the World's Mosses Completed 480

Moss Exchange Club 4S0

Horne, A. S. — British Fossombroniie ..

Dixox, H. N. — Catharinea rhystophylla CM. in Britain

Watson, W., & W. Ingham — Bryophytes of Somerset

HohWGOD, A. R. — Bryophytes of Leicestershire

Dayies. J. H. — Irish Mosses

XXVI CONTENTS.

PAGE

Coppey, A. — French Mosses 481

Hagen, J. — Moss-flora of Norway 482

Dixon, H. N. — Bryology of Tornean Lapland 482

Loeske, L. — Bryophytes of the Algau Alps 482

Glowacki, J., & others — Austrian Mosses 482

Schifpner, V., & others — Hungarian Mosses 483

Schiffner, V. — Hepatics of Dalmatia and Istria , 483

„ „ Dalmatian Hepaticse 484

Loitlesberger, K. — Moss-flora of the Austrian Coast-lands 484

Glowacki, J. — Bosnian Mosses 484

Kosanin, N. — Bryogeographical Note on Polytrichum alpinum in Servia . . . . 484

, , ,, Muscinese of Servia 484

Zodda, G. — Sicilian Bryophyta 485

Luisier, A. — Mosses of Madeira 485

Frye, T. 0., & others — North American Mosses 485

Cardot, J., & others — Mexican Mosses 485

Brotherus, V. F. — Mosses of the Pacific 486

Dixon, H. N. — Mosses of Bombay Presidency 486

Macvicar, S. M. — Two New British Hepaticse 594

Ingham, W. — Tortula cernua Lindb 595

Wheldon, J. A., & W.G.Travis — Hepaticse of Soieth Lancashire 595

Travis, W. G. — Shropshire Hepaticse 595

Bagnall, J. E. — Worcestershire Muscinese 595

Waddell, C. H., & others — Irish Muscinese 595

Hagen, I. — Norwegian Mosses 596

Sladden, C, & E. Marchal — Hepaticse of Belgium 596

Culmann, P. — Muscinae of the Swiss Oberland 596

Bottin'i, A., & G. Zodda — Italian Mosses 596

Glowacki, J. — Austrian Mosses 596

Muller, K. — European Hepaticse 596

Britton, E. G., & others — North American Bryophytes 597

Cardot, J. — Mexican Mosses .. .. , 597

Paris, E. G. — Mosses of Annum 597

Bauer, E., & L. Loeske — Critical European Mosses 597

Monkemeyer, W., & L. Loeske — Forms of Drepanocladus 598

Roll, J. — Sphagnum robustum 598

Janzen, P. — Climacium dendroides var. turgescen* .. .. 598

Schipfner, V., & W. Wollny — Hypogastranthus a New Genus 598

Dismier, G. — Fruiting State of Campylopu* polytrichoides 598

Balle, E. — Teratology in Pogonatum . . 598

Steinbrinck, C. — Cohesion-mechanism of Moss-leaves 599

G ehumann, K. — Fertilisation in Marchantia 740

Nicholson, W. E. — Tortula aciphylla in Britain 741

West, W. — liicciocarpus natans 741

Cornet, A., & others — Belgian Bryophytes 741

Kern, F. — Mosses of Carinthia 741

Mueller, K. — European Hepatics 741

Dixon, H. N. — Mosses of the Atlantic Islands 742

Kindberg, N. C. — Synonymy of European and North American Mosses 742

Putt, C. C, & others — North American Mosses 742

Cardot, J. — Mosses of Mexico 742

Thallophyta.

Algse.

West, G. S.— The" Red Snow" Plant, Sphxrella nivalis .. 28

Techet, C. — Aberraid Forms of Marine Algse produced artificially 76

France, E. H. — Light-perception in Algie 76

Forti, A., & A. Trotter — Biology of Crater-lakes in South Italy 76

Sommier, S. — Algse of Lampedusa and Linosa 76

Heering, W. — German Fresh-water Algse 77

CONTENTS. XXvii

PAGR

Schneider, G., & others — Fresh-water Algse at Reval 77

Wkst, W. & G. S. — British Desmidiacese 77

Brand, F. — Rhizoclonium and Cladophora 77

Ernst, A. — Morphology and Development of Pithophora 77

Atkinson, G. F. — Rhodochytrium a Parasitic Alga 78

Saivageau, C. — Green Coloration 0/ Oysters caused by a Diatom 78

Schroder, B. — Adriatic Diatoms 78

Besana, (4. — Fishing Spoiled by Algse 78

Forti. A., & D. G. Aftonelli — Italian Diatoms 78

Cepede, C. — Diatoms of Pas-de-Calais , 79

Terry, W. A. — Diatoms of Connecticxd 79

Oestriip, E. — Mongolian Diatoms 79

Paulsen, O. — Danish Per idiniese 79

Lemmermann, E. — Siamese Plankton 79

Kofoid, C. A. — Studies on Ceratium 79

Johnstone, J. — Marine Biology 79

Tobler, F. — Regeneration in Myrionema .. .. 80

Tobler- Wolff, G. — Biology of Polysiphonia fastigiata 80

Nienburg, W. — Develmental History of the Delesseriacex 80

Foslie, M. — Notes on 80

„ C or allinacese of ihe Pacific 81

Mazza, A. — Studies in Marine Algae. 81

Migcla, W. — European Algse 81

Reinhold, T. — Antarctic Algse 81

Hariot, P. — Marine Algse of San Thome 81

Harvey-Gibson, R. J. — Red Sea Algse 81

Bibliography .. 81

Letts. E. A., & W. E. Adeney — Viva latissima in relation to Sewage Pollution of

Sea-water .. 215

Mangin, L. — Method of Analysing Plankton 215

Dakin, W. J. — Methods of Plankton Research 216

Gomont. M. — Marine Flora of Inland Salt Marshes 216

Maire, U. — Phyllosiphon Arisari 216

L'omere, J. — Form Variations in Cosmarium 217

Schmidt, M. — Algse of the Eppendorf Moor 217

West, W. & G. S. — Freshwater Algse of Burmah and India 217

West, G. S. — Fresh-ivater Algse of Java 217

Playkair, G. 1. — Desmids of Sydney, N.S. W 218

Stiles, M. H. — Yorkshire Diatoms 218

Nadsmn, G. A.. & L. P. Brullowa — Metachromatic Bodies in Vaucheria .. .. 218

Sauvageau, C. — Invasion of Colpomeni a sinuosa 218

., „ Fucus platycarpus and F. lutarius 219

WisLorcH, S. M. — Cytology of Porphyra 219

Schiller, J. — Ceramium radiculosum, a Brackish-water Species 219

Adams, J. — Irish Algse 220

•Collins, F. S., & R. E Buchanan — North American Algse 220

Gepp, A. & E. S— Indian Ocean Algse 220

Laing, R. AI. — Algse of Netv Zealand and Norfolk Islands 221

Okamura, K. — Japanese Algse 221

Fliche, P. — Liasophycus, a New Fos*il Alga 221

Sauvageau, V.—Bory de Saint-Vincent 222

Dangeard, P. A. — Bisection of a Monad by a Diatom 375

Copeland, W. F. — Periodicity in Spirogyra 375

Svedelius, N. — Structure and Development of Martensia 366

Keeble, F. — Yellow-brown Cells of Convoluta paradoxa 376

Lankester, E. Ray — Archerina transferred from the Protozoa to the Protophyta .. 'Ml

Hustedt, F. — New Endophytic Alga in Nostoc Ml

Minakata, K., & A. D. Hardy — Fish infected with Algse .. .. .. ■■ 377

West, G. S. — Red Snow •>^~

Howk, M. A. — Phycological Studies >

Muller, Otto — Movement of Diatoms :; ^ v

Hustedt, F. — Diatoms of Bremen 378

XXV111 CONTENTS

PAGE

Lemmermann, E. — Fresh-wafer Plankton of Italy and Germany 378

Ostenfeld, C. H. — PhytoplanMon of Victoria Nyanza 378

„ ., PhytoplanMon of the Aral Sea 379

West, W. & G. 8. — PhytoplanMon of the English Lakes 379

West, G. S. — Algse of the Yan Yean Reservoir 379

Conn, H. W , & L. W. Webster — Fresh-water Algse of Connecticut 380

Heyurich, F. — Car pogonium and Auxiliary Cell of Melobesiese 380

Pilger, R. — Indian Ocean Algse 381

„ Algai of Peru, Chile, and South-west Africa 381

Bibliography 381

Fiirmiggini, L. — Italian , Characeas 480

Preda, A. — Italian Marine Algse 486-

Okambra, K. — Japanese Algse 487

Andreesen, A. — Physiology of Desmidiacese 487-

Lambert, F. D. — Two New Species of Characium 487

Wille, N. — Wittrockiella, a Neiv Genus , 488

Meyer, K. — Life-history of Trentepholia umbrina 488

Wille, N — Development of Oocyst/ s 488

Collins, F. &.— Cl,adophora and Monostroma 489

Eothpletz, A. — Fossil. Algse 48&

Mangin, L. — Observations on Diatoms .. .. 489

Comere, J.— Abnormal Coloration of Epiphytic Diatoms 490

Forti, A.— Pyxilla and Allied Genera 491

„ New Fossil Diatom 491

Arnoldi, W. — New Fresh-water Phseophycea 491

Tobler, F. — Ascopltyllum-galls caused by Mytilus edulis 492

Griggs, R. F. — Juvenile Kelps and the Recapitulation Theory 492

„ „ Sporophylls of Lessoniopsis 492

Petersen, H. E. — Danish Species of Ceramium 493

Nichols, M. B. — Corallinacese of California 493

Pilger, R. — Anatomy and Classification of Corallinacese .. 4!)3

Lemoine, P. — Anatomy of Lithothamnion and Lithophijllam 493

Kurssanow, L. — Cytology of Floridese .. .. 494

Derschau, M. von — Connection between Cell-nucleus and 1'yrenoid 494

West, W. & G. S. — British Fresh-water PhytoplanMon 599'

„ „ PhytoplanMon of the English Lakes 601

West, G. S. — Peridiniese of Sutton Park, Warwickshire <i (, l

Wolf, E.— Water-bloom 602

Lohmann, H. — Marine Plankton 602

Sciiuoder, B. — PhytoplanMon of the West Indies 603

Stuwe, W. — PhytoplanMon of the North Atlantic 603

Pavillard, J. — French. Peridiniese 603

Mtjller, O. — Bacillariacese from South Patagonia 604

Paschkr, A. — Some New Clirysomonadinese <' |(, 4

Dangeard, P. A. — Fertilisation in Zygnema 604

Gardner, N. L. — New Chlorophycese from California 605

Scuurfield, D. J. — Cladophora xgagropila 605

Griffiths, B. M. — Two Neio Members of Volvocacese 605

Gepp, A. & E. S. — Neiv Siphoneous Alga ,;, W

Borgesen, F. — Fucus spiralis 606

Baker, S..M. — Zoning of Broum Seaweeds 606

Heydrich, F. — Sphserantht-ra lichenoides 607

Nichols, M. B. — Californian Species of Crustaceous Corallines 61)7

Rosenvinge. L. K. — Marine Algse of Denmark 61)8

Cotton, A. D. — New Zealand Marine Algse 608

Gutwinski, R. — Algse of the Tatra Mountains 608

Hdstedt, F. — Algse of Bremen ., = 609

Buchanan, R. M,.'— Algse of Iowa 609

West, G. S.— African Algse 609

Agardh, C. A. — Nomenclature of Algse ' 609

Pascher, A. — Amceboio I Movements in Algal Spores ''"'• ,

Teodoresco, E. C. — Movements of Low Organisms at Low Temperatures .. .. »>10

CONTENTS. x.\ ix

1 AGIi

Howe, M. A. — Collections of Algae in the New York Botanical Garden 610

Chalon, J. — Henri van Heurck gj]

Cotton, A. D. — Marine Algae of the West of Ireland 712

Yendo, K. — Algae Neio to Japan 743

Okamura, K. — Japanese Algae 7);;

Muschler, R. — Algae of Egypt 743

Ostenfeld, C. H. — Phytoplankton of Victoria Nyanza 743

Collins, F. S. — Green Algae of North America 744

Bokge. O. — North American Fresh-water Algae 744

Lauby, A. — Action of Mineral Waters on Diatoms . . 744

Calvert, L., & P. Paul — Green Coloration of Oysters 744

Peklo, J. — Marine Diatom which stores up Manganese 715

Chaves, F. A. — Fossil Diatoms at Furnas 745

Brand, F. — Morphology of the Base of Cladophora .. .. 745

Hakiot, P. — Growth of Fucus 74G

Ziidda. (r. — Laminar iae of the Mediterranean 746

Toni, G. B. De — Ceramium pollens 747

Bibliography.. .. 747

Fungi.

Lendner, Alf. — Swiss Mucorini . . 82

Butler — Genus Pytliium and some Chytridiaceae 82

Tubeuf, C. v. — Witches' Brooms on Frunus padus 83

Thaxter, R. — Monograph of the Laboulbeniaceae 83

Zachakewicz — Culture of Truffles 83

Lindau. G. — Hyphomycetes 83

Diedicke, H., and others — Parasitic Fungi on Bubus dumetorum 84

Kern, Frank D. — Studies in the Genus Gymnosporangium Si

Freeman, E. M., & B. J. C. Umberger — Smuts of Sorghum 84

Hard, M. E., & F. Kauffman — Higher Fungi .. .. 84

Cooke, M. C, & H. T.. Wharton — Mushrooms propagated from Spores 85

Brefeld, 0. — Researches in Mycology 85

Negri, Giov ann. — Atlas of Edible and Poisonous Fungi 85

Dufour, Leon — Classification of the Basidiomycetes 85

Lloyd, C. G. — Mycological Notes : Nos. 30 and 31 So

Handbook of Fungi 86

Pearson, R. Hooper — Book of Garden Pest* 86

Brooks, Charles, & others — Plant Diseases 86

Bibliography 8y

Cockayne, A. H.— Spread of Phytophthora infestans, with special reference to

Hibernating Mycelium .. .. 222

Dandeno, J. B. — Winter Stage of Sclerotinia fructigena 222

Maire, R. — Fraudulent Substitutions for Truffles .. , 222

Durand, E. J. — Geoglossaceae of N.America 223

Guilliermond, A.- r Contribution to the Study of Endomyces 22:1

Mayor, E. & E. 8. Salmon — Erysiphaceae 223

Krcyff, E. de — Indigenous Yeasts of Java 223

Laubert — Bust-eating Larvae 221

Smith, Worthington G. — British Basidiomycetes 224

Roll, J.. & G. F. Atkinson— Edible and Poisonous Fungi 224

Probst, R., & others — Vredineae 225

Atkinson, G. F. — Polyporus lucidus and some of its Allies 226

Hohnel, F. v., & V. Litschauer — German Corticeae 226

Ludwig, F. — Abnormal Formations in Hymenomycetes 226

Fontana, E. — Research on Elaphomyces .. .. 226

Bernard, Ch. — Notes on Aseror 227

Mackay. A. H. — Fungi of Nova Scotia 227

Brefeld, O. — Mycological Research 227

Laear — Handbook of Technical Mycology 227

Mangi, L. — Necessity of Precision in the Diagnosis of Moulds 22 ,

X\'X CONTENTS.

PAGR

Bainier, G., & A. Sartory — Pathogenic Aspergillus 228

Peglion, Vittorto — Vegetable Pathology 228

Rqques, E. G., & others — Plant Diseases 228

Bibliography 228

Wisniewski, P. — Zygorhynchus Moelleri Vuill 381

Guttenberg, Hermann Ritter von — Study of Synchytrium-galls 381

Piedallo, Andre — Monascus purpureus 382

Ferraris. Teodoro — Observations on the Morphology of the Oidium of the Oak .. 382

Steiner, J. A. — Specialisation of Sphserotheca Humuli within the Genus Alchemilla 382

Brooks. F. L. — Biology of Botrytis cinerea 383

Colin, Henri — Nutrition of Botrytis cinerea 383

Kohl. F. G.— Yeast Fungi 383

Guilliermond, A. — Development of Glceosporium nervisequum 384

Lind, J. — Notes on Glazosporium 384

Lire, Ivar J., & J. L. Sheldon — Uredinex 384

Krieg. W. — Origin of Specialisation and Heteroicism in Uredinex 385

Migula, W. — German Flora 385

Cheesman. W. — Contribution to the Mycology of South Africa 385

Gueguen, Fernand — Study of the Album Pelletier de Guerniac 385

Magnin, L., & L. Masse — Poisonous Fungi 386

Shear, C. L. — Treatment of Monotypic Genera of Fungi 386

Crossland, C. — Yorkshire Fungi 386

Boyd, D. A., & others — British Mycology 387

Ericksson, J. — Gooseberry Mildew 387

Schander, R. — Gooseberry Mildew 388

Spieckerman, A., & others — Plant Diseases .. 388

Duthie, G. A., & others — Mycorhiza 390

Gruenberg, B. C. — Some Aspects of the Mycorhiza Problem 391

Bibliography 391

Sartory, A. — Pseudo-Absidia vulgaris 495

Blakeslee, A. F. — Notes on Mucors 495

Goilliermond, A. — Sexual Reproduction in Endomyce* Magmi*ii 495

Picard, F. — Parasitism of Laboulbeniu cern , ■ 496

Engelke, C. — Bare Pyrenomycete 496

Anderson, J. P., & others — Erysiphacex 496

Seaver, F. J. — North American Hppocreales 496

Lindau — Hyphomycetes 497

Tranzschel, W., & others — Uredinex 497

Reidemeister, W. — Conditions of Sclerotium-formation in Botrytis cinerea .. .. 498

Gueguen, F. — Xylaria polymorpha 498

Schionning & L. T. Thorne — Tonda in Beer -brewing 499

Saito, K. — Yeast of Rum Fermentation 499

Hohnel, Fr. von — Mycological Notes 499

Bayliss, J. S. — Biology of Polystictus versicolor 499

Nakazawa, R. — Saccharomyces in Sake 500

Schorstein, J. — Wood-destroying Fungi 500

Edible Fungi 500

Lagarde, J. — Fungi of Southern France 500

Bucholtz, Fedor — Underground Fungi in Russia 500

Feltgen. Johann — Luxembourg Fungi 501

Migula, W. — German Fungus Flora 501

Trotter, Alex., & L.Petri — Dalian Flora 501

Barbier, Maurice — Hymenomycetes 501

Zimmermann, A., & F. W. Neger — Ambrosia-Fungus 502

Rolffs, li. H, & H. S. Fawcett — Fungus Diseases of Scale Insects and White Fly 502

Pest ana, J. Camara — Destruction of Harmful Insects by Fungi 503

Schmidt, E. W. — Parasitism of Fungi 503

Muth, Franz — Fungi of Seeds 503

Murrill, W. A. — Edible Mushrooms 503

Weigmann & A.Wolff — Fungi found in Butter 504

Lutz, Otto — Changes Effected by Filamentous Fungi on the Media in which they

are Grown 504

CONTENTS. X \.\i

PACK

Hall, Van. & others — Plant Diseases 51, ^

Bibliography mt - i(1) .

Johnson, T., & F. Weiss— Chrysophlyetis endohiotica .. .. " " gll

Johnson,! 1 . — Chrysophlyctis endobiotica and other Ghytridiacese .. 611

Ratbaud, L. — Notes on Mucor gjj

Seaver, F. J. — Studies in Pyrophilous Fungi. I. ijio

Harvey-Gibson, R. J., & G. Massee— A r e«j Genus of Ascomycetes .. .. '.'. " 612

Massee, G. — Structure and Affinities of British Tuberaceie 612

Dale, Elizabeth — Morphology and Cytology of Aspergillus repens 612

Fischer, Ed. — Development of Genea Thwadesii ( ;i^

Dombrowski, W., & others — Endomyces gjg

Westlino, Rich. — Byssochlamys nivea, g.et sp. n 613

Klocker, A. — Saccharomycetes . . .. i,lj

Dzierzbicki, A. — Influence of Humus on the Development of Yeast and on Alcoholic

Fermentation <;14

Lindau — Hyphomycetes 614

H6ye, K. — Infection of Split Cod by Torula epizoa 614

Sorauer, Paul — International Statistics of Cereal Busts 614

Hecke, L. — Notes on Smut •. 615

PAqi e, E. — Notes on Harmful and Interesting Fungi 615

Beauvekie, J. — Distinctive Characters of the Mycelium of Merulius lacrymans .. 615

Falck. Richard — Dry-rot 615

Scharfetter, R. — Notes on the Higher' Fungi 616

Bkinkman, W. — New Genus of Thelephoreie 616

Molliard, M. — Development af Crucibulum vulgare 616

Stevens, F. L., & J. G. Hall — Variation of Fungi due to Environment 616

Blakeslee, A. F. — Method of Sending Pure Cultures of Fungi 616

Coupin, Henbi — Fungal Parasites of Men and Animals 617

Petri, L. — Value of GhemotropUm in the Parasitism of Fungi C17

,, Gall-fungi (117

Maximow, N. — Freezing Tests with Aspergillus uiger C,17

Fkitel, P. H, & others — Fossil Fungi 618

Scholl, E. — Chitin in Boletus edidis 618

Ilikevic, C. — Cellular Membranes of Fungi 618

Rostrup, O. — Fungus-spores Present in the Air 618

Levison, J. J. — Filling Tree-cavities 618

Rvbsaamen, Ew. H. — Diseases of the Vine 619

Issatschenko. B.. & others — Plant Diseases 619

Peklo. Jaroslay — My corhiza Problems 621

Bibliography 621

Kttsano, S. — Contribution to the Cytology of Synchytrium and its Hosts 747

Brown. W. H. — Nuclear Phenomena in Pyronema confluens 74s

Cutting. E. M. — Sexuality and Development of the Ascocarp in Ascophanns carneus 748

Guillermond, A. — Nuclear Division in the Ascus 748

Reed, G. M.— Mildews of Cereals 749

Seaver, J. — Hypocreales of N. America : II. 749

Gueguen, F. — Xylaria polymorpha 749

Hariot, P., & N. Patoltllard — New Genus of Mucedinese 749

Lindau — Hyphomycetes 74'.»

Doebelt, H. — Pigment-forming Penicillium 750

Dietel. P., & others— TJredinese .. .. .. ... .. 750

Legne. L., & others — Notes on the Larger Fungi 7.")1

Brinkmann, W. — Study of Thelephorese 752

Buller, A. H. R. — Researches on Fun g i 7.V2

Raciborski, M. — Java Fungi p'-

Neger. F. W. — Ambrosia Fungus 53

Theiszen, F. — Notes on various Fungi 753

Dittrich — Influence of Parasitic Fungi on the Form of the Host-Plant /53

Rayneu, J. F., & others — British Fungi 753

Muller, Karl — Influence of Parasitic Fungi on Currant Wine ~- r >3

Lloyd, C. G.— Mycological Notes, No. 32 754

Sturli, A. — Penicillium glaucum as a Cause of Pellagra 754

XXX11 CONTENTS.

PAGE

Saccardo, P. A. — International Nomenclature 754

Eichixgeb, A., & others — Plant Diseases 754

Nadson, G. A. — Mycorhiza as a Parasite 757

Bibliography . .. .. 757

Lichens.

Olivier, H. — European Lichens 90

Lindau, Gr. — American Lichens 90

Bibliography 90

Mahew, J. — Lichens from the High Altitudes of Savoy (La Tarentaise) 230

Hue — Tarbellien Lichens 231

Merrill, G-. K., & T. C. Frye — American Lichens 231

Bibliography 231

Jatta, A. — Italian Lichens 507

Fink, Bruce — Problems of Lichenology 507

Zahlbruckner, A. — Physma dalmaticum .. 624

Howe, R Heber — The Genus Usnea 624

Bitter, Georg — Studies in Peltigera ,<> .. 624

Ericksen, F. — Cyphelium (Acolium) verrucostim sp. n. 624

Lesdain, Bouly de, & Harmand — Collection of Lichens 624

Fink, Bruce — Composition of a Desert Lichen-flora .. 625

Galloe, O. — Ecological Study of Lichens 625

Bibliography 625

Tobler, F. — Physiological Importance of Algse and Fungi 'in Lichens 760

Kiitte, Ignaz — New Instances of Parasymbiosis 7<>0

Bibliography 760

Mycetozoa.

Seayer, F. J. — North Dakota Slime-moulds 232

Maire, R., & A. Tison — Sorosphzera Veronic 232

Bibliography 232

Meylan, Oh. — Myxomycetes of the Jura 392

Lagarde, J. — Myxoiuyretes of Aigonal 392

Torrend, C. — Portuguese Myxomycetes 507

Maire, Rene, & Adrien Tison — Plasmodiophoracem and Phytomyxinese .. .. 626

Molliard, M. — New Plasmodiophora 627

Leger. Locis — Insect Parasite 627

Bibliography 627

Schizophyta.

Schiaomycetes.

Ei:>enberg, P. — Elastico-tropic Appearances in the Groivth of Bacillus anthracis

and allied Bacilli in Serum Medium 91

Altona, G. — Tetragenus tardissimus 91

■Savage, W. D.— Organisms of the Gaertner Group 91

Savage, W. G.— Bacterial Studies of Milk 92

Andrewes, F. W., & M. H. Gordon — Pyogenic Cocci 93

Andrewes, F. W. — Micro-organisms in Sewer Air 93

Horder, T. J. — Micro-organisms and Rheumatic Fever 93

Basile, G. — New Add-fast Bacillus 94

Jungano, M. — Anaerobic Pseudo-coli Bacillus 94

„ ,, Bacillus parvus liqtiefaciens 94

Bibliography 94

Barbeu, M. A. — Rate of Multiplication of Bacillus coli 232

Kruyff, E. de — Myxococcus Javanensis '-'33

ValeriO, B. Galli — Pathogenic Sarcina 233

Rothermi ndt, M. — Behaviour of Bacteria to the Surface of Flowing Water . . • . 234

Ghon, A., & M. Sachs — Etiology of (" Schaumorgane") Foamy Organs 234

CONTENTS. xxxiii

I'Ar. K

Stokvis, C. S. — Toleration of Bacteria for Alcohol and for Acetic Acid 235

Zickes, H. — Bacterium Pol ychromicum ' .. 235

Terreira, Agueda, & others — Bacillus eoli communis 235

Buchanan, R. E. — Gum produced by Bacillun rail icicola 236

Metchnikoff, E. — Intestinal Flora 236

Clerc, A.. & A. Sartory — Red Coccus resembling Micrococcus cinnabareus .. .. 236

Jungano, M. — Bacillus sporogenes non-liquefaciens 236

Calmette. H., & C. Guerin— Properties of Bacillus tuberculosis cultivated on Bile 237

Bibliography 237

Buchanan, K. E. — Bacteroids of Bacillus radicicola 393

Ball. O. M. — Bacillus radicicola 393

Roger, H., & others — Oospora buccalis 393

Meyer, A. — Aerobic and Anaerobic Growth 393

Babes, V. & A. — Organism of " Phlegmon emphysemateux" 394

Repaci. G. — Anaerobic Flora of the Mouth :; c .i4

Schurmann, W. — Varieties of Streptotrichex 508

Pitt, W. — Bacillus nodulifaciens bovis 508

Foulerton, A. C. R.. & H. K. Whittingha m—Coccal Infection and Elephantiasis 508

Lasseur, Ph. — Bacillus chlororaphis 508

Valerio, B. Galli. & P. Vorloud — Bacillus anthracis and Cold-blooded Animals 509

Gueguen, F. — Bacillus endothrix 509

Nagler, K. — Spiroclwta flexibilis ... .. 509

Bredemann, G. — Bacillus amylobacter A.M. et Bredemann , 509

Martin, S. — Pathogenic Effects of Streptococcus fsecalis and of its Endotoxin .. 509

Repaci, G. — Bacillus fusiformis of Vincent 510

Sauerbeck, E. — Sarcina mucosa 510

Gougerot & Caraven — Hemispora stellata 510

Babes. V. & A. — Bacillus mucogenes bipolar is hominis 510

Bibliography 510

Savage, W. G. — Garget in Cows 627

Andrewes, F. W. — Bacteria of Sewer Air 627

H order, T. J. — Protective Agents in Meningococcus Infection 028

Savage, W. G. — Gaertner Group of Organisms 628

Grimbert, L., & M. Bagros— Indirect Denitrifying Bacteria 628

Babes, J., & Keodorasco — Bacteria Inter mediete between Bacillus paratyphosus B

and Bacillus typhosus .. 628

Iredell, C. E., & E. P. Minett — Effect of Radium on Bacteria 628

Saito, K. — Bacteria in the Air 629

Stickdorn, W. — Biological Study of Glanders bacilli 629

Vincenzi, L. — Cultural Differences of two Pseudo-tubercle Bacilli 629

Gaucher, L. — Chromogenic Bacillus isolated from a Mineral Water 629

Dobell, C. C. — Spore Formation in the Disporic Bacteria <; -^

Repaci, G. — Anaerobic Vibrios from the Mouth 629

Cohen —Bacillus of Septicemic Cerebrospinal Meningitis 630

Cruveilhier, L. — Endotoxin of Bacillus Diphtherias ,i: ; 1

Griffon, E.—Flugge's Fluorescing Bacilli • • 631

Calmette, A., & C. Guerini — Determination of the Bovine or Human Origin of

Tuberculosis 631

Lipman, C. B. — Effects of Salts on Bacillus subtilis 632

Cinca, A., & G. Fenea — Presence of Anthrax in the Intestinal Contents of Animal* <i3-!

Bibliography 639

Paranhos, U. — New Hemophilic Bacterium •• •• •• 761

Bottojiley, W. B. — Nitrogen-fixing Bacteria and Non-leguminous Plants ■■ ■■ <_ { \ {

Lebram, F. — Ratin bacillus and Bacillus enteriditis Gaertner 761

Bang, O. — Avian tuberculin and Pseudo-tuberculous Enteritis of Cattle ^>\

Klimenko, W. N. — Morphology and Biology of the Whooping-cough Bacillus .. .. 762

Ambroz, A.— Life Cycle of Bacillus Nitn sp.n £62

Smith, R. Greig — Coagulation of Condensed Milk 'J';\

Reichert, K. — Movement of Bacteria ■;

Makrinoff, J. — Influence of Organic Substances on the Culture of Nitrifying

Organisms i~~

Holzmuller, K. — Bacillu • mycoides Flugge '"

Dec. 15th, 1909 c

XXXIV CONTENTS.

MICROSCOPY.
A. Instruments, Accessories, etc.

(1) Stands. rAGE ,

Stead, J. E. — A Workshop Microscope (Fig. 2) 20

Reiohebt's Demonstration Microtcope (Fig. 7) 95

Watson's " Standard " Microscope (Fig. 8) 95

" Club " Portable Microscope (Fig. 9) 97

" Simplex" Dissecting Microscope (Fig. 10) .. 98

Bausch & Lomb's Stand DDR (Figs. 41, 42) 238

Hensoldt's A e«? Micrometer Microscopes (Fig. 43) 240

Makktanner-Turneretscher, G. — Application of Microscopes as a Means of

Demonstration in Public Museums 240

Bausch & Lomb's Pocket Dissecting Microscope Stand S (Fig- 44) 241

„ „ Compound Erecting Body (Kig. 45) 241

Koristka's Lowp o/ 2 T »oo Achromatic Lenses (Fig. 46) 242

Bibliography 242

Bausch & Lomb's Petrographical Microscope Stand L C H (Fig. 60) 395

Watson & Sons' Porro-prism Erector for Dissecting Microscopes (Fig. 61) .. .. 396

C.Baker's New Model D.P.H. Microscopes (Figs 73, 74) 511

Baker's New Model Histological Microscope (Fig. 75) 514

Bibliography 514

Old Microscope by George Adams (Figs 96, 97) .. .. 633

Dissecting Stand, with Lens (Fig. 118) 764

Koristka's Large Model I (Fig. 119) 765

Bibliography 765

(2) Eye-pieces and Objectives.

Bifocal or Multifocal Lenses (Fi;t:s. 11-14) 98

Hensoldt's Micrometer- Oculars (Figs. 47, 48) 243

Gipford, J. W. — Improved Triple Object-glass 765

Bibliography 768

(3) Illuminating and other Apparatus.

Stead. J. E. — A Simple Method of Illuminating Opaque Objects (Figs. 3-5) .. .. 22-

Koristka's Complete Apparatus for Macro- ami Micro-projection (Fig. -id) .. .. 243

., Apparatus for Drawing with Weak Magnification (Fig. 50) .. .. 244

Cleminson, R. — Colour-disks for Microscope Condensers (Fig. 51, 52) 246

Bausch & Lomb's Filar Micrometer (Fig. 53) 247

Schmidt & Haensch's Special Episcope (Figs. 54-56) 247

Krusz's Epidiascope (Figs. 57, 58) 251

Bibliography 252

Siedentopf's Dark-ground Illumination (Fig. 62) 396

Giltay. E. — Microscopic Illumination 397

Watson & Sons' Eye-piece Analyser (Fig. 63) 398

Kobistka's Illuminator for Opaque Objects Fig. 64) 398

Watson & Sons - Hall's Crip Nose-piece 398

Stiles' " Universal" Microscope Lamp (Fig. 66) 399

Gordon, J. W. — A New Illuminator for the Microscope (Figs. 71, 72) 417

Rilev, W. A. — Simplified, Apparatus for Drawing with the aid of the Projection

Microscope (Fig. 76) 514

Koenigsbergeu, J. — Direct-vision Prism and Apparatus for the Projection of Spectra

and for Illumination with Spectral Light 515

CONTENTS. XXXV

PAOB

Ignatowsky, W. v. — Illuminating Arrangement for the Metal- Microscope (Fi^s

77, 78) I °. 515

Siedentopf, H. — Microscopical Observations with I) 'n-k- ground Illumination 'Figs.

79-81) 517

Scheffer, W. — Work vrith the Paraboloid Condenser 518

Hensoldt & Sons' Neio Angle Prisms for 90 . ISO , 45°, owl Roof-prism (Fi°-s.

82-8.=.) " 518

Imboden, W .— Simple Drawing awl Projection Apparatus (Figs. 86, 87) .. .. 518
Reichert's Reflecting Condensers for Dark-ground Illumination, and some Auxili-
aries (Figs 98-105) 636

Berget, A. — Divergent Microscopical, Amplifier (Fig. 106) .. 041

Lord Rayleigh — Apparatus for Measurements of the Defining Power of Objectives 641

Meyer's Search-stage ii. (Perquirator) (Figs. 107, 108) 642

Poschl, V.— New Method of Measuring Hardness (Fig. 109) 644

Swift & Sons' Stage Goniometer (Fig. 110) 646

Watson's New Eolos Immersion Paraboloid (Fig. Ill) 647

Boeke, H. E. — Arrangement for Microscopical Observations at Extreme Tempera-
tures (Fig. 120) .. ' 768

Lehmanx, Dr. H. — Eighly lleflecting Lantern Screens for Aidoehrome and other

Projections 769

Koristka's Paraboloid Condenser (Fig. 121) 770

Koristka's Projection Apparatus for Liquid (Fig. 122) 771

(43 Photomicrography.

Calmers. H., & L. P. Clerc — Contribution to the Theory of the Photographic Web 252

Makktanner-Tirneretscher. G. — Advances in Photomicrography and, Projection 253

Bibliography 253

Siedentopf, H. — Resolution of Edges in Microscopical Images (Fig. 88) .. .. 520
Heusner, H. L. — Simple Stand for Photography of Macro- and Microscopic Objects

(Fig. 89) ' 521

Jullien, J. — Economic Monochromatic Filters 522

Ries, J. — Kinematography of Fertilisation and Cell-division (Fig. 90) 522

Jullien, J. — Practical Photomicrography 523

Bibliography 524

Fournier, E. E. — Photography by Reflection under Contact 647

Chevroton, L. — Chronophotomicrography 648

Scheffer, W. — Mirror-reflex Camera for Photomicrography (Fig. 112) 648

Bagshaw, W. — Elementary Photomicrography 772

(5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation.

J. D. — Microscopic Measurements 100

Perkin, J., & E. E. Fournier — Brownian Movements 253

Lord Rayleigh — Aberration of Sloped Lenses, and their Adaptation to Telescopes

of unequal Magnifying Power in Perpendicular Directions . 254

Evans, J. W. — The Optical Examination of a Crystal Section in a Rock Slice .. 271

Bibliography 523

Nelson, E. M. — On the Measurement of Very Minute Microscopical Objects .. .. 549
(Jlerici, B.— Simple Arrangement for Determining Microscopically the Index of

Refraction •■ 649

Bibliography •• •• 64'.»

Keelet, F. J. — Microscopical Image Formation 772

Perrin, J., & Dabrowski — Bmwnian Movement and Molecular Constants .. .. 7/4

(6) Miscellaneous.

100

Gage's Microscopy

Powell, C— Cholesterol, Fluid Crystals, and Myelin Forms '"

White, C. Powell — Crystals in Tumours j"J

Smith. J. I.orrain, & (J. Powell White— Crystals in Fat-cells

Quekett Microscopical Club

Rules for the Sections and Sectional Meetings

XXXVI CONTENTS.

" PAGB

Merlin, A. A. C. Eliot — Some Remarks on a German Silver Powell Portable

Microscope, made in 1850 167

Qcekett Microscopical Club 255

Nelson, E. M. — Some Hairs upon the Proboscis of the Blow-fly ■ .. 399

Merlin, A. A. G. Eliot— Navicula Smithii and N. Orabro 399

Quekett Microscopical Club 41)0

Qtjekett Microscopical Club 523

Bibliography .. 524

Stoney, J.— Telescopic Vision (Figs. 113, 114) 649

Royal Microscopical Society's Microscopes at the Franco- British Ex-
hibition 651

Rohr, M. von — History of Optical Glass 775

Scales, Shillington— Practical Microscopy 775

B. Technique.

(1) Collecting- Objects, including 1 Culture Processes.

Merlin, A. A. C. Eliot — Note on New Growing Cell for Critical Observations under

the Highest Powers (Fig. 1) 17

Mayer, A. G. — Marine Expeditions 103

Dakin, W. J. — Methods of Plankton Research 104

Almqeist, E. — Behaviour of Certain Pathogenic. Micro-organisms at Low Tempera-
ture 104

Chatterjee, G. C. — Differentiation of Bacilli of Typhoid Group 104

Cordier. M. — Achromogenic Culture* of Micrococcus prodigiosu* 105

Lafforgue — Blood Cultures 105

Dopter, C, & Raymond Koch — Action of Meningococcus and similar organisms on

Sugar Media 105

Gage, G. E. — Media for Detection of Bacillus colt in Drinking-water 256

Porodko, Th. — Filtration of Agar through Glass-wool 256

Piorkowski — Simple Medium for < ionococcus 256

Dantec, A. le — Cultivating Amozbik and Anguillulx for Class Work 256

Lippens — Differential Reaction for Bacillus coli communis and Bacillus typhosus.. 257

Caulfield, A. H. — Flask for Fluid Media 400

Duv al, C. M., & J. L. Todd— Cultivation of Spirochxta Duttoni 524

Fonder, C. — Examining Living Leucocytes in vitro (Figs. 91,92) 524

Harrison, F. C, & J. van der Leck — Mscnlin Bile-salt Media for Water and

Mill; Analysis 525

Doepner — Modification of Kindborg's Acid-fuchsin Agar 526

Nicolle, C. — Cultivation of Leish mania infantum, the Parasite of Infantile Kala-

azar 52(!

Morelli, G. — Method of Detecting I ndol 526

Twort, F. W. — New Method of Isolating Human Tubercle Bacilli 526

Bibliography 527

Bernstein, E. P. — Bacillus typhosus and B. coli on Media containing Blood and

Carbohydrates.. ". 661

Dieedonne, A. — Special Nutrient Medium for Cholera Vibrio 661

(Jlegg, M. T. — Cultivation of Bacillus Leprse .. . . 661

Tobler, F. — Fixation Methods and the Swelling of Algal Membranes Oo'l

Escoyez, E. — Demonstrating Karyokinesis in Stypocaulon Scoparium 60 1

Row, R. — Cultivating the Parasite of Oriental Sore 662

Sieeert, C. — Study of Tubercle Bacilli 776

Stoker, W. R., & H. W. (Stoner — Dextrose and Lactose for Detecting the Colon

Bacillus .. .. 776

Vincenzi, L. — Normal Cerebrospinal Fluid as Nutrient Medium for Pathogenic

Bacteria 776

Uhlenhuth. P. — Shaker (Kinotherm) for Use at a desired Temperature (Fig. 123) 776

Altmann's Shakers (Figs. 124, 125) 778

Bibliography 778

CONTENTS. XXXV11

I (2) Freparing Obiects.

PAGE

Kollmann, M. — Researches on the Leucocytes and Lymphoid Tissue of Invertebrates 106

Kahle, W. — Studying the Development of Cecidomyidne 257

Hamerton, A. E. — Preparing Disease-carrying Injects 258

Davis, H. S. — Studying Spermatogenesis in Acrididse and Locustidse 259

Wilson, G. E. — Studying Fat-absorption in the Intestine 259

Krauss, F. — Studying the Chorda-cartilage of Urodela 259

Fiessinger, N. — Demonstrating Hepatic Glycogen ; 259

Mater, A. G. — Carbon-dioxide for Killing Marine Animals 260

Betegh, L. von — Method for Demonstrating Spores of Tubercle Bacilli.. .. - 401

Bibliography 401

Taube, E. — Examining Euphausi dm 527

Borrel, A. — Study ing the Relations between Acari and Cancer 527

Rawitz, B. — Phosphomolybdic Acid as Fixative 528

Fleischmann, L. — Demonstrating the Organic Constituents of Enamel 528

Krause, R. — Wash-bottle for Microscopical Purpose (Fig. 93) 528

Lidforss, B. — Demonstrating the Kinoplasmatic Connecting Threads between the

Nucleus and the Chromatophores 528

Minchin, E. A — Demonstrating the Structure of Tnjpanosoma lewisi 662

Bibliography 663

(3) Cutting - , including- Imbedding and Microtomes.

Wolff, M. — New Freezing-stage for the Zimmermann Microtome (Fig. 59) .. .. 260

Leitz' Base Sledge Microtome (Figs. 94. 95) 529

Leitch, A. — Rapid Examination of Tumours for Diagnostic Purposes 530

Gandolfi, Herzog — Combined, Imbedding Method 531

Bibliography 531

Kracse, E. — New Freezing and Cooling Arrangement for the Microtome (Fig. 115) 663

Wolff, M— Minots Small Microtome (Figs. 116. 117) 664

Ssobelew, L. W. — Theory and Practice of Whetting 779

Materia, L. — Vacuum Paraffin Oven (Figs. 126,127) 781

Krafse, R. — Transparent Red Injection Mass 782

Bibliography "82

C4") Staining and Injecting.

Yamamoto, J. — Bacillus of Anthrax and Silver Impregnation 106

Smith, J. Lorrain — Staining of Fat with Basic Anilin Dyes 106

„ „ Simultaneous Staining by Oxazine Dyes 107

Smith, J. Lorrain, & \V. Mair— Principles of Weigert's Method 107

Ravaut, P., & A. Ponbelle— Staining Spirochseta pallida in Smears with Largine 261

Eisenberg, P. — Fat-granules of Bacteria _ 261

Manicatide — Demonstrating Bacillus tuberculosis in Cerebrospinal Fluid, .. .. 261

Meyes, F. — Demonstrating Chondriosomes 2b_

Perrin, T. G.— Staining Treponema pallidum 262

Sayini. E. & Therese— New; Method of Nerve-cell Staining 262

Amato, A. — Minute Structure of Bacteria 263

Cann, A. — Methods for Staining Tubercle Bacilli 401

Bibliography 401

Regaud. C, & J. Maw as— Differentiating Ergastoplasm and Mitochondria in the

Human Submaxillary Gland ^;jj

Yamamoto, J.— New Method for Staining Spirochseta pallida in Tissues o31

Bongiovanni. C. — Staining Vegetable Phosphorus Compounds 532

Lcnghetti, H. — Staining Fibrocartilage j?j™

Neri, F. — New Method of Staining Negri's Corpuscles ?;;-

Barannikoff, J. — Silver-staining of Spirociixta pallida .. Dt >-

Sabrazes, J., & II. Dopebie— Thionin and Picric Acid after Silver Impregnation

of Spirochetes "2^

Heidenhain. M. — Vanadium-hxmatoxyliu and Picro Blue-black .. .. •• ^

Rawiiz, B.— New Staining Methods ?^

Heidenhain, M. — Permanence of Microscopic Preparations Oo " i

XXXV111 CONTENTS.

PAGE

Proca, G., & P. Danila— Differential Staining of Spores 666

Twort's Neutral-red and Light-green Stain 666

Bibliography 667

Lopez, A. E. — Double Staining Vegetable Tissue 782

Rodenwaldt — Modification of NissV 's Method 783

Hadlfy, P. B. — Van Gieson and Romanowsky Stains for Detection of Coccidia . . 783

MakcoRA, F. — Demonstrating the Intra cellar Network of Nerve-cells 783

Vertetjil, P. L. db — Staining Treponema pallidum 783

Beckton, H. — Absence of Altmann's Granules in Cancer Cells 784

(5) Mounting-, including' Slides, Preservative Fluids, etc.

Tozer, Rev. E. — On Mounting Rotifers and Protista in Canada Balsam (Fig. 6) . . 24

Ogushi, K. — Mounting Amphibian Eggs 108

Nieuwland, J. A. — Mounting of Algae 401

Gelderd, 0. — Examining and Mounting the Digestive System of Schizopoda . . .. 667

Bibliography 785

(6) Miscellaneous.

Herzog, Alois — Photomicrographic Atlas of Fibres important in Arts and Commerce 108

Jookel, B. — Apparatus for the Aeration of Aquaria (Fig. 15) 109

Thilo. O. — Aeration of Aquaria (Figs. 16, 17) 110

Toni, G. B. de — Schweizer's Reagent Ill

Zirolla, G. — Apparatus for observing the Suction of Insects (Fig. 18) 112

White, B.— Small Bacterial Grinder (Fig. 19) .' 113

Dannerth, F. — Methods of Textile Chemistry 113

Wolff-Eisner, A. — Shake Apparatus (Figs. 69, 70) 402

Pearl, R., & F. M. Surface — Use of Atropin Sulphate for Anesthetizing Birds 534

Coles, A. C — Detection of Spirorhseta pallida 534

Corin & Stokis — Detection of Seminal Stain* on Clothing 535

Bibliography 535

Gobbi, E,— Metal Filter 667

McDonald, S. A.— Micrometer Attachment (Fig. 128) 785

Metallography, etc.

Benedicks, C. — Quenching Velocities 114

Upton, G. B. — Iron-Carbon Equilibrium 114

Milton, J. T. — Copper and Copper Alloy* 114

Bengough, G. D., & O. F. Hudson— Mechanism of Annealing 115

Philip, A. — Phosphor Bronze 115

Rosenhain, W. — Metallographic Investigation of Alloys 115

Desoh, C. H. — Intermetallic Compounds 115

Sawedr, A.— Structure of a Brittle Steel Sheet 115

Boylston, H. M. — Magnetic Changes in Steel 116

Scott, A. P. — Hard Spots in Steel Castings 116

Burgess, G. K. — Methods of obtaining Cooling Curves 116

Rosenhain, W. — Recalescence Curves 116

Turner, T. — Transparent Metallic Films 117

Rosenhain, W., & P. A. Tucker — Structure of Eutectics 117

Potdar, G. N. — Partition of Silver between Zinc and Lead 117

Benedicks, C. — Troostite 117

Revillon, L., & P. Bouveiue — Colour-photography in Metallography 263

Revillon, I.. — Resilience, and, Testing by Impact 263

Guillet, L., & L. Revillon- Shock-tests at Different Temperatures 263

Guillet, L., & A. Portevin — Temper-colours 263

Robin, F. — Hardness of Steels at Loio Temperatures 264

„ Hardness of Steels at High Temperatures 264

Arrivaut, G. — Silicon-silver Alloys . 264

Stern, E, — Micrography of Cement 264

CONTENTS xxxix

I'AGE

Gallo, G. — Microscopic Study of Mortar 264

Guillaume, C. E. — Different Phases of Matter 26.")

Eosenhain, W. — Study of Breakages 265

Jude, A. — Microstructure and Mechanical Properties of Steel 265

Wust, F., & L.Laval — Experimental Study of the Thomas Process 265

Gutowsky, N. — Solidification of Cast Iron 265

Friedrich, K., & A. Lbkoux — Platinum-antimony Alloys 403

Wust, F. — Influence of Manganese on the Iron-carbon System 403

Tammann, G. — Heat-contents of Binary Systems 403

Lindsay, T. A. — Recalescence Temperatures of Nickel 403

Mazzotto, D. — Melting-point Curves of Binary Alloys 403

Charpy, G. — Alloys of Iron and Carbon 404

Reissig, J. — Ultra-microscopic Observations 404

Carpenter, H. C. H. — Freezing-point of Iron 404

Campbell, E. D. — Constitution of Carbon Steels 4(i4

Demozay — Influence of Thermal Treatment on Linear Deformations of Steel .. .. 404

Eevol. G. — Simple Apparatus for Micrograph;/ 405

Ziegler — Alloys of Iron with Sulphur 405

Benedicks, C. — Metallography of Quenched Steels 405

National Physical Laboratory 405

Pusghin, N. A.. & P. N. Laschtschenko — Platinum-lead Alloys 406

Tamaru, S.,& Ft. Vogel — Alloys of Silicon .. 406

Lebeau, P., & P. Bossuet — Silicon-magnesium System 406

Arrivaut, G. — Alloys of Manganese 406

Benedicks, C. A. F. — New Form of Pearlite .. 407

Campion. A. — Heat-treatment of Steel 407

Bibliography 407

Rosenhain. W. — Application of the Microscope to the Study of Metals 536

Stanton, T. E., & others — Resistance of Metals to Impact .. 536

Weiss, P. — Ferromagnetism 537

Crawford. W. J. — Dimensional Changes produced in Iron and Steel Bars by

Magnetism 537

Hecsler, F., & F. Richarz — Magnetic Alloys of Manganese 5: 17

Tamuru, S. — Silicon-calcium Alloys 5o7

Jonker, W. P. A. — Sulphur-arsenic System 537

Upton, G. B. — Nature of the Cast-irons 538

Guillet, L., & A. Portevin — Thermal Treatment 538

Guillet, L. — Special Steels 538

Bevillon, L. — Industrial Applications of Metallography 538

Kingsbury, A. — Polishing Metals for Examination with the Microscope 538

Aston, J. — Polishing Machine for Metallographic WorJc 39

Bibliography 539

Giolitti, F., & E. Pannain— Structure ■ of Coinage Bronze 668

Hiorns, A. H., & S.Lamb — Arsenic and Antimony in Copper 668

Pelabon, H. — Gold-tellurium Alloys 668

Zemczuzny, S. F., & S. W. Belynskv — Cobalt-tin Alloys 668

Greenwood, H. C- — Boiling-points of Metals 668

Baykoff, A. — Structure of Steels ed High Temperedures 669

Kurbatow, W. J., & M. M. Matwejew — Structure of Hardened Steel ,; ij'.»

Maurer, E. — Hardening and Tempering of Iron and Steel 670

Muller, A. — Electrolytic Iron . . 670

Gekcke, E. — Iron-phosphorus System 670

Goerens, P., & W. Dobbelstein — Iron-carbon-phosphorus System 670

Burgess, (' F. — Alloys of Iron with Arsenic and Bismuth ( ;J'

Gontermann, W. — Some Iron-sih con-carbon Alloys 671

Guillet. L. — Special Steels 671

Fry, L. H. — Heat-treatment of Spring Steel 671

Eosenhain, W. — " Slag Enclosures" in Steel 671

Huntly, G. N.— Sulphur as ei Cause of Corrosion in Steel

Heyn, E., & O. Bauer — Nickel Steel Injured by Over-heating 672

Giolitti, F., & F. Carnevali — Cementation

Gioltiti, F., & others — Malleable Cast Iron '"-

xl CONTENTS.

PAGE

Hatfield, W. H. — Decarburisation of Iron-carbon Alloys 673

Heyn, E. — Progress in Metallography 673

Friedrich, K. — Metallographic Notes 073

Davis, W. H. — Industrial Application of the Microscope 674

Benedicks, ('. — Illumination in High-power Photomicrography 674

Nokthrup, E. F. — Autographic Registration of Cooling Curves 674

Ludwik, P., & others — Measurement of Hardness 674

Gulliver, G. H. — Internal Friction in Loaded Materials 674

Chatelier, A. Le— Influence of Time and Temperature on Impact Tests .. . . 675

Guillet, A., & H. Le Chatelier — " Damping" in the Testing of Iron 675

Gllliver, G. H. — Friction in Compression Tests 676

Bairstow, L. — Elastic Limits of Iron and Steel under Cyclical Variations of Stress 676

Bibliography 676

Fraenkel, W., & G. Tammann— Meteoric Iron 785

Guillemin, J. — Structure of " Steely " Cast Irons 785

Charpy, G. — Separation of Graphite in Cast Iron 786

Heyne, E.,& others— Soiubilit y of Steel 786

McWilliam, A., & others — Heat-treatment of Steel ... 787

Stkomeyer, C. E. — Ageing of Mild Steel 787

Longmdir, P. — High-tension Steels 787

Howe, H. M., & A. Sauveur — Uniform Nomenclature of Iron and Steel 787

Bornemann, K. — Binary Alloys 787

Laar, J. J. van — Binary Systems 788

Ktjrnakow, N. S., & S. F. Zemczdzny — Hardness of Metallic Solid Solutions and

Chemical Compounds 788

Masing, G. — Formation of Alloys by Pressure 788

Pannain, E. — Some Silver Alloys 789

Hindrich, G. — Some Chromium and Manganese Alloys 789

Stepanow, N. J.— Electrical Conductivity of Magnesium-lead Alloys 789

Konstantinow, N. — Compounds of Nickel and Phosphorus 789

Puschin, N. A., & N. P. Paschsky — Lead-palladium Alloys 789

Vogel, E. — Gold-magnesium, Alloys 790

Degens, P. N.— Tin-lead Alloys 790

Bengade — Suboxides of Caesium 790

Cohen, E. — Physico-chemical Studies in Tin 790

Schreyer — Basic Bessemer ising of Copper-matte 790

Baumann, K. — Mounting of Specimens 791

Grunhut, A., & J. Wahn — Magnetic Properties in relation, to Mechanical Tests .. 791

Charpy, G., & others— Impact Tests . 791

Leon, A.— Irregular Stresses due to Non-homogeneity 792

Rasch, E. — Theomo-electric Measurement of Elastic Limit 792

Rudeolff, M. — Influence of Increased Temperature on the Mechanical Qualities

of Metals 792

Bibliography 792

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

Meeting, December 16, 1908 .. 118

January W, 1909 129

„ February 17, „ 266

„ March 17, „ 270

April 21, „ , 4(18

„ May 19, „ 411

„ June 16, „ 540

„ October 20, „ 793

„ November 17, „ 798

General Index to Volume S01

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1909. PI. I.

JOUENAL

OF THE

ROYAL .MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

FEBRUARY. 1909.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

I. — The Mouth-parts of the Nemocera and their Relations to
the other Families in Diptera. Corrections and additions
to the paper published in 1904.

By W. YYesche, F.R.M.S.

(Bead October 21, 1908.)
Plates I. to IV.

A taper covering so wide a field as the one referred to above,
cannot be, nor had it any pretensions to be exhaustive, and the
exceedingly minute size of many of the parts examined, and the
occasional failures of preparations to give clear views, have caused
one or two mistakes in the homology, and two species have been
wrongly determined. On the other hand, many more species have

EXPLANATION OF PLATE I.

Note. — The following letters are used throughout the plates.
m Mandible. pr Paraglossa.

I Lacinia.

g Galea.

mp Maxillary palpus.

pf Palpifer.

s Stipes.

c Cardo.

Maxilla.

Ig Ligula.

72> Labial palpus. Labi

p g Palpiger.
mn Mentum.
s vi Submentuni.

I r Labrum.

/; Hypopharynx. p Pharynx.

pp> Pharyngeal pump. c I Clypeus.

Fig. 1. — The pharyngeal pump in Culex pipiens L.; dissected out fiom tbe head:
the anterior portion is connected with the base of the hypopharynx.
which is shown on the right.
2. — Section of the head, showing the muscular attachments of the pharyn-
geal pump. [Continued vn next /<"." ■

Feb. 17th, 1900 b

2 Transactions of the Society.

been examined, and a review of the tropin in the "peculiar family
of the Phoridte has shown so many fresh points, that additions are
desirable.

I propose to keep to the arrangement of groups, and will as
formerly, for the sake of ease in reference, make any remarks on
family or genus in the section devoted to that group.*

Group 1. — All parts distinguishable, except the labial palpi,
which are aborted.

Simulidse. (Type S. reptaus L.)
Culicidte, the females only.
Tabanida^, „ „ „

Asilidie.

Group 2. — The mandibles are fused into the labium, and the
labial palpi are aborted.

(«) Raptorial, or bloodsucking.

Empidie, with exceptions.

Leptidse, „ „ (Type L. scoippacea L.)

The genus Ceratopogon of the Chironomyidae.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE I.—cout.

Fig. 3. — Pharyngeal pump in Asihts crabroniformis L. The position is different
from that in Culrx, the anterior portion being to the left.
4.— Diagram showing a lateral view of fig. 3, and showing how the part is
worked in this species,

,, 5. — Pharyngeal pump in an undetermined Asilus from Pegu.

,, 6. — The same, on a small scale, showing the suhmentum and the hypo-
pharynx, to show their relative positions.

., 7. — Portion of the base of the hypopharynx of Asilus from Pegu, to show a
supposed poison-gland.

,, 8. — Pharyngeal pump in Empis livida L , to show the different mechanism.
On the right is shown the base of the hypopharynx and on the left the
pharynx.

,, 9. — Pharyngeal pump in Tachydromia cursitans F., a minute predaceous
Empid. The position is again reversed, the pharynx being on the
right, and shows a bulbous swelling.

,, 10. — Paraglossa of Hi/bos grossipes L. To show the "taste-cups."

,, 11. — Labium of Leptis conspicua Mg. Seen from the ventral side; to show
the imbedded mandibles laterally disposed, and the tracheae of the
paraglossa? springing from plates.

,, 12. — Labrum and hypopharynx of L. conspicua. Removed from the dorsal
side of the labium, and viewed laterally.

,. 13. — Lacinia and maxillary palpus of L. conspicua.

,, 14. — Mentum of ChrysopiVus auratus F., a genus of the Leptidse, nearly
related to L. conspicua. Thementum has been dissected out from the
ventral side of the labium, and shows the imbedded mandibles, which
here send out processes both at their posterior and anterior extremities.

,, 15. — Mentum of Lonclwptcra flavicauda Mg., treated in the same manner as
fig. 14.

,, 16. — Hypopharynx of L . flavicauda. Lateral view.

,, 17. — Lacinia and maxillary palpus of L. flavicauda.

„ 18. — Labrum of L. flavicauda. Dorsal view.

The Mouth-parts of th Nemocera. By W. IVcsche. 3

{I) Suctorial.

Mycetophilidae.

Psychodida*.

Culicida?, the males ouly and the genus Corethra.

Rhyphidae. (Type J,'. /< nestralis Scop.)

Tabanida?, the males only.

Lonehopteridae.

Bombylida-.

Platypezidae.

Syrphida?.

Group 3. — The mandibles are fused into the labium, the laciniaa
and galas of the maxilla; and the labial palpi are aborted.
Cceidomyidas.
Chironomyidce, except the genus Ceratopogon. (Type C.

plumosus L.)
Tipulidae.
Stratiomyida?.
Conopodre.

(''roup 4. — The mandibles are fused into the labium : all parts
of the maxilla? except the stipites and cardines are aborted, or if
remnants of the laeinire are present, the stipites and cardines are
aborted or vestigial. The palpi present are labial, and the tracheae
of the paraglossia (labella) are only moderately developed.

P>ibionida\ (Type B. hortulanus L.)

Dolichopodidce.

Phoridffi.

Group 5. — Th'e mandibles are fused into the labium ; all parts
of the maxillae except the stipites and cardines are aborted, the
palpi present are labial, the trachea} of the paraglossa? are well
developed.

(a) Willi remnants of maxillary palpi.

Some Tachinida.

Some Muscida?. (Type 31. domestica L.

Some Anthomyidae.

Some Chloropoda.
(h) With no remains of maxillary palpi.

Pipunculida, with exceptions.

Some Tachinida \ Particularly highly modified gen-
Some Muscidae / era, such as Siphona or Stomoxys.

Some Anthomyidae. (Type C. crythrocephala Rig.)

Cordyluridae.

Ortalidae.

Trypetida?.

Lonchaeidae.

Some Chloropodae.

Hippo boscida.

=; 2

4 Transactions of the Society.

Group 6. — The mandibles are fused into the labium; the car-
dines, stipites and laciniai of the maxillae are present, the latter
leaf-shaped and pubescent ; the paraglossa? are without teeth ; the
palpi are labial.

Phycodromida?. (Type Coelopa frigida Mg.)

Helomyzida3.

■Sciomyzida?.

1 'silidse.

Saprornyzidif.

Group 7. — The mandibles are fused into the labium ; the
maxillse are imbedded, the palpi being the only part exposed,
labial palpi are also present ; the trachea? of the paraglossa? are
more or less well developed.

Opomyzida?.

Sepsida:-.

Ephydrida?.

Drosophilida;.

Borborida?. (Type B. equinusYln.)

EXPLANATION OF PLATE II.

Fig.

19.-

It

20.

)J

21,
22.-

J t
it

23,

24,

J)

25.
26.-

)»

27,

28,

M
) J
1)

29.
30.
81.

>>

32.
33.

J1

34.
35,

M

36.

37.

—Maxillary palpus, stipes, and cardo of Ctdcx annulipes Mg. ? , to show
the atrophied fourth joint^whieh is absent in C. jiipicns 9 .

—End of lacinia of maxilla of an undetermined species of Culex ?
from Windsor, Nova Scotia, for comparison with the same part on
fig. 21 C. annulipes ?, a British species. This and fig. 21 have been
carefully drawn to scale to show the exact relative size.

—End of lacinia of maxilla of C. annulipes, to compare with fig. 20.

—Pharyngeal pump of Tipula oleracea L. Dorsal view.

—Pharyngeal pump of 2'. oleracea. Lateral view.

— Section through the anterior portion of the head of T. oleracea, to show
the pharyngeal pump and its muscular attachments. Drawn from a
preparation made by the late Dr. Scriven.

— Trophi of Ghloromyia formosa Scop. Dorsal view.

— Mentum of C. formosa. Removed from the ventral side of the labium,
and showing the median suture (imbedded mandibles).

—Trophi of CaUimyia speciosa Mg. A genus of the Platypezidse. Lateral
view.

—Mentum of Platypeza consobrina Ztt.

— Hypopharynx of P. consobrina.

— Labrum of P. consobrina.

— Hypopharynx, pharyngeal pump, and portion of pharynx of an unde-
termined species of the genus Dolichopus.

— Trophi of Gymnoptemus assimilis Staeg. Dorsal view.

— Dissection of the labium of Aphrosyhis raptor Hal. Dorsal view. The
muscles and the ventral plate have been removed. The mentum can
be clearly seen, and the absence of a median suture noted.

— Hypopharynx and pharyngeal pump of A. raptor. Lateral view.

— One of two plates (mandibles) imbedded in the muscles on the ventral
side of the labium of A. raptor.

— Labrum of A. raptor. Lateral view, and showing the lever which works
the part.

— Part of the labrum of A. raptor. Flattened out and seen from the
dorsal side.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1909. PI. II.

The Mouth-parts of th Nemocera. By V,'. We& 5

Group 8. — All parts atrophied.
GEstridse. (Type G. equi !•".)
The genus Oncodes of the < '\ rtidze.

Pulicidje— With regard to the inclusion of the Pulicidte in
the order Diptera, some of my preparations of P. irritans L. £
show a very characteristic "chyle stomach," and a single recep-
taculum seminis in the abdomen, which seem very close to similar
organs in Diptera. On the dorsal part of the ovipositor of Pipun-
culus campestris Ltr. is an organ which, from its situation, and
from a certain superficial likeness, appears to be homologous with
the well-known pygidium of the flea. These are three items of
evidence in favour of their being retained in the classification.

A study of the phylogeny of the Phoricke has necessitated a
review of the tropin of the large majority of the families, and this
lias led to the knowledge that in the mouth there is an additional
character which separates the two great divisions of Diptera, the
Orthorrapha and the Cyclorrapha.

All the families with complete mouth-armature are in the
Orthorrapha, but in other families, when the mandibles disappear,
they are imbedded in the ventral side of the labium, as in Bibio
hortulanus L. and Tipula oleracca, or Dolichopus griseipennis Stan.,
while in the Cyclorrapha they are imbedded on the dorsal side, as
in Ildophilus pendulus L., and Ccdliphora erjjthrocephala Mg. ; or,
To put the matter in a simpler way : In the Orthorrapha (a) when
the mentum is developed, a median suture or thickening of the
chitin is present; (b) when undeveloped, paired rods will be found
on the ventral side of the labium. In the Cyclorrapha the median
line of the mentum is not indicated by a suture.

This character is fresh evidence that the two great divisions of
Diptera are natural, and makes the task of classification easier
(plate I. figs. 14, 15, and plate IV. figs. 59, 60).

Group 1. — The presence in several families of an organ some-
what similar to the pharyngeal pump in Culex, has directed my
attention to that part. I borrow the nomenclature from Dr.
Xuttali's and Mr. Shipley's paper on Anopheles.* It consists of
three chitinous plates, situated in the head and forming a chamber
having ducts leading to the pharynx and the buccal cavity. Tin
plates are attached by muscles to the head walls, and when pulled
back by them, create a vacuum which sucks up the blood or fluid
through the hypopharynx, which is prevented from returning by a
valve in the anterior duct. It seems to be formed from the
pharynx, which at this point often consists of a chitinous tube.
Its presence in such very old families as Ptychoptera, Tipula, and
the Australian genus Gynoplistia shows it to be a very archaic

* Journ. of Hygiene, i.. No. I (1901).

G Transactions of the Soviet//.

character, though I am not prepared to formulate any homologies
with typical forms such as Pcriplaneta or Forficula (plate I. figs.
1,2.

The palpi of the females in Culex are practically three-jointed,
while in the males they are usually more developed and are four-
jointed. The process of degeneration can be seen in 0. annulipes
Mg., where an atrophied joint is found on the distal end, making a
fourth joint, the usual number in the Nemocera (plate II. fig. 19).
Similar conditions exist in C. dorsalis Mg., and also in a
mosquito from Perak, Dcsvoidia ventralis. This atrophying joint
is also found in similar situations on the palpi, both labial and
maxillary, of Forficula, and in the latter case seem to have some
particular function, as they bear minute sense-organs on the tip.

The Transatlantic stories of mosquito bites are often suspected
<>f exaggeration ; yet it is curious that the maxilla? of a species
raptured at Windsor, N.S., are far more barbed and stronger than
our C. pipiens L., or C. annulipes Mg. The labium is thicker than
that of G. pipiens, and is considerably shorter than that of C.
annulipes (plate II. figs. 20, 21).

The pharyngeal pump in Asilus is situated in the same position,
but differs from that in Culex, in consisting of only two plates, the
upper fitting into the raised sides of the lower, and connected with
it at all points by a membrane. Both plates are somewhat circular
and send out a process at the posterior end. The upper plate at
Ihis posterior end broadens out, and is held by the sides of the
lower plate, which overlaps, making a kind of articulation ; and
the other portion of the upper plate is free to move, and is raised

EXPLANATION OF PLATE III.

Fig. 38. — Tropin of Phora curvinervis Beck. 9'. Dorsal view. The wide spread-
ing of the paraglossse is as the parts appear in a preparation mounted
with pressure. I think the natural position is like that of the male in
• fig. 39.

,. 39. — Labium of ['.curvinervis $. Seen from the ventral side, and showing
the mentum.

,, 40. — Hypopharynx of P. curvinervis i.

,, 41. — Labrum of P. curvinervis 6 ■ To show how remarkably this part differs
in the sexes.

.. 4:2. — Palpus of P. curvinervis £ .

.. 43. — Labrum of Phora lutea Mg. (Aphiochseta) 9 .

.. 44 — Hypopharynx of P. lutea J .

.. 45. — Fused lacinise of the maxillae and teeth from the paraglossia? of /'.
lutea 9 .

.. 46.— Palpus of P. lutea 9 .

„ 47. — Labrum of Phora incrassata Mg. ? . Dorsal view.

„ 48. — Labrum of P. incrassata £ . Dissected out and seen from underneath,
when the complicated folds of the double plate can be seen.

,, 49. — Mentum of P. incrassata £ . The sides are bent over, indicated by the
shading in the drawing. •

,, 50. — Labrum of Conicera atra Mg. 9 . Dorsal view.

,, 51. — Palpus of C. atra 9 .

,, 52. — Labrum of Phora ruficornis Mg. J . Dorsal view.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1909. PI. Ill,

The Mouth-parts of tin Kemocera. By //'. Wcschi. 7

by muscles; the posterior end or hinge of the upper plate, when
this occurs, closes the pharynx, and so creates a vacuum : a
mechanism which differs from that of Culex. This is described
from A. crabroniformis (plate I. figs. 3, 4).

An undetermined Asilus from Pegu shows a curious bulb fitting
into the right side of the lower plate, forming a valve; also a
membranous gland which runs down to what appears to he an
opening in the hypopharynx: judging from sonic remarks of
Professor Poulton on the instantaneous death of the prey of some
Asilids, this may be a poison-gland* (plate I. figs. 5-7)/

As I pointed out in the former paper, the Asilidse have
Xematocerous characters, and the presence of an organ found in the
older families is quite in harmony with that observation ; but, as I
shall show later, homologous organs exist in two other families in
the Brachycera, and form valuable proofs of affinity.

The long labium of Chrysops ccecutiens L., which is figured in
plate iv. of the 1904 paper, is articulated by the membrane at the
base folding on itself, forming a fitting which holds the part in any
required position; a precisely similar arrangement is found in
many of the Empidse.

(/roup 2. — The Empida? are such keenly predaceous insects
that the pharyngeal pump would be of value, and retained. I find
it in some species in my collection in various stages of develop-
ment. It is, however, used in a different manner, as there is a
piston working in the cavity which seems to be drawn back into
the pharynx ; this piston varies in shape in some genera ; in
Hybos I can see muscles attached to it. It seems absent in Empis
stercorea L., but I have preparations that show it in Hybos femo-
ratus Mull., H. grossipes L., E. Uvula L., Tachydromia cursitans
F., and T. maculipes Mg. (plate I. figs. 8, 9).

I have observed that the inner tube of the hypopharynx in
If femoratus, E. stercorea, and several other species, is ciliated.

The hard chitinised labium of Hybos shows a few " taste-cups "
— these structures are new to me on the labium of Diptera. The
labium in the Asilidse, which is developed on similar lines, bears
the usual " taste-hair," with a socket standing out of the supporting
chitin (plate I. fig. 10).

In E. Ueicla, E. stercorea, and in those genera in which the
labium is long and membranous at the base, the membrane is
folded on itself and forms an articulation, precisely as in Chrysops.

All the preparations of Empida? I have examined show the
mandibles fused into the mentum on the ventral side.

'The mouth-parts of the Leptidse have several features which
were omitted in my previous description, and are of some
importance, as they show an affinity with several other families.

* Predaceous Insects and their Prey. Tran-. Ent. Soc. London, Jan. 1907.

8 Transactions of the Society.

The tracheae spring from chitinous plates on each side of
the deep cleft of the paraglossia The taste-hairs on the side
of the paraglossre are numerous. The mandibles are imbedded
on the ventral side, but are in L. conspicua Mg. separate and
laterally placed, while in Chrysopilus auratus F. they are soldered
into the mentum in the median line (plate I. figs. 11-14). The
flaps of the paraglossse (labella) curl upwards and form a case
for the maxilla?, hypopharynx and labrum, and the exposed sides
of the paraglossse are far more chitinous than the inner or dorsal ;
several of these points are indicated in the figure of the trophi of
L. Scolopacea L. (plate iv. fig. 19, 1904). I believe that, as far as
is known, the blood-sucking habit is confined to the genus Leptis.

The Mycetophilicke, Bhyphidye, and the genus Ceratopogon, call
for no further remark except that all the species examined show the
mandibles imbedded in the under-side of the labium. In JJIomyia
fidiginosa Mg. of the Psychodida?, the mandibles show on the ven-
tral side of the labium as a strong rod with a bifurcation at its
anterior end.*

* Since going to press, I have, through the kindness of Mr. H. J. Waddington,
had an opportunity of examining some preparations of Mochlonyx velutinus Hxxthb.
This Culicid has a mouth somewhat like Corethra, and I can clearly make out
the pharyngeal pump. It is therefore obvious that the long styliforrn labium of
the blood-sucking Culicidse has been directly developed from a short stout labium
like that of Mochlonyx. The larvae also approximate to the form found in Culex
more closely than do the peculiar larvae of Corethra.

EXFLANATION OF PLATE IV.

Fig. 53. — Labium of Coniccra atra Mg. 6 ■ Seen from the ventral side, to show
the mentum.

„ 54. — Trophi of Gymnophora arcuata Mg. Seen from the dorsal side. The
armature appears to be the same in both sexes in this genus.

,, 55. — Hypopharynx of G. arcuata.

„ 56. — Dissection of the mouth of Oliviera lateralis F. The paraglossia, the
rnentum, in fact all the labium, with the containing membrane sup-
porting the palpi, have been removed. To show the process at the
base of the labrurn and the connection with the submentum, also the
degeneration of the pharynx.

,, 57. — Dissection of the labrum of Myiospila meditabunda F. The stipites
bearing remnants of maxillary palpi articulate on to the sides of the
labrum, which is highly developed. Compare with fig. 61.

„ 58. — Trophi of Siphona geniculates Deg. Dorsal view ; to show the Muscid
trophi specialised for flower feeding, and the adaptation of the sub-
mentum into a sucking organ ('?). The degenerating labrum and weak
stipites may also be noted.

,, 59. — Mentum of Musca corvina F. To show the absence of the median suture.

,, 60. — Mentum of M. meditabunda. To show the same.

,, 61. — The hypopharynx and the plate on the dorsal side of the labium in
M. meditabunda. The hypopharynx is in a very weak condition com-
pared with the labrum. The lateral rods are the imbedded mandibles.

,, 62.— Trophi of Lispe tentaculata Deg. Lateral view. The dark mass in the
paraglossse are the teeth, which are very strong. The hypopharynx is
thickened at the base and pierced by the pharynx, but the labrum
is also used as a suctorial organ, and communicates with a tube lead-
ing through the submentum.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1909. PI. IV.

53 „t '

-' ,

v..

The Mouth-parts of the Nemocera. By W. WescM 9

In the bead, at the back of the submentum of some Psychodidse
and also of U. fuliginosa is an appearance suggesting the presence
of the pharyngeal pump. If this is so, it would be of the type
found in Tipula.

To this group must be transferred the Lonchopteridse, as fresh
dissections have revealed the lacinia? of atrophying maxilla? at
the bases of the palpi. These lacinia? are 85 fi or \.} )() -in. long,
and I must plead as excuse that it is as easy to overlook as it
is difficult to dissect objects of this size (plate T. fig. 17). The
paraglossa? are deeply cleft, and, like Leptis scolopacea L., liave
plates from which the trachea? spring, on the edges of the clefts.
The mandibles are imbedded in the mentum. The trophi of
L. flavicemda Mg. and L. scolopacea are "remarkably close to each
other both in detail and general plan (plate I. figs. 15, 16, 18).

The mouth-parts of the Platypezida? also resemble those of
Leptis. In Ccdlimyia speeiosa Mg. the maxillae are rather broad,
but the cardines and stipites are in an atrophying state ; the para-
glossa? are of similar type to that found in Leptis scolopacea L. and
LoneJ) opt era flavicemda ; the trachea? are 'more abundant than in
Leptis, spring from plates, and the mandibles are imbedded on the
ventral side. The paraglossa? -in P. consobrina Ztt. are also of the
same type, but the cardines and stipites are quite aborted, while in
P. fascia la Mg. they are represented by thin rods, the palpi being
very similar to those of L\ consobrina. In other respects as regards
the tracheae, the mentum, the hypopharynx, and the labrum, the two
last named species are very close to each other (plate II. figs. 27-30).

All the Bombylida?* I have examined show the mandibles on
the ventral side ; alone in this group the Syrphida? have them
imbedded on the dorsal side, whence they may easily be dissected
out in such large forms as Erystalis or Helophilus.

Group 3. — I have already alluded to the " pharyngeal pump "
in Tipula oleracea L. In this insect it is formed of two plates and
is close to the form found in Gidex. I have also found it in the
heads of Ptychoptera albimana F., P. contaminata L., P. lacustris
Mg., Gynoplistia bella West., and several undetermined species, but
it appears to be absent in the Chironomyida? (plate II. figs. 22-24).

In the Ptychopterida? mentioned above, the trachea? of the
paraglossia spring from chitinous plates, in a similar manner to
that already noticed in some Leptida? and Lonchopterida?, and the
median cleft of the labium is deep. The venation of the Ptycho-
pterida? suggests that this family is one of the oldest in Diptera, and
the deeply cleft labium is quite consistent with this hypothesis.
The plate at the base of the trachea? is more frequently found in

* Anthrax paniscus Rossi appears to lack the median structure, but appears
to have the mentum bent in or furrowed in the median lino ; but 1 have not bid
sufficient material to be quite certain.

10 Transactions • of the Society.

the families of the Braehycera, but is now seen to he a Nemato-
cerous character, and affords valuable evidence of affinity.

In all the Stratiomyidse that I have examined, the mandibles

are fused in the median line of the mentum, and often send out
lateral processes at the posterior end. Michrochrysa polita L., and
Chloromyia formosa Scop., have plates at the bases of the tracheae
similar to those referred to above (plate II. figs. 25, 26).

The tropin in the Conopodse are of a highly specialised type,
and fitted for flower feeding. They are mostly analogous in
structure to Prosena in the Muscidre ; that is to say, the mentum
lias displaced all the membranous parts of the labium, and has
developed into a long styliform plate with the sides bent upwards,
and fused with the mandibles at the upper edges. Of this type
are Conops quadrifasciata Deg., C. jiavipcs L., and Physocephala
rvjipes F.

Zodioii cinereum F. has the palpi more developed, and the
paraglossse are lengthened, and geniculated at the base ; Myopa
buccata L. has the palpi even more developed than in Z. cinereum,
and the paraglossre bearing well-marked tracheie. These last two
species have analogies in the Museidae in Siphona, and the tropin
of the Conopodse present, when compared with Prosena and
Siphona, excellent examples of parallel development. The man-
dibles in this family are very obvious on the dorsal side of the
labium, and the maxillary palpi, found in interesting stages of
degeneration, show the relationship to the Syrpkidse.

Group 4. — The presence of the pharyngeal pump in the heads
of many Dolichopodidse is one more peculiarity in this family,
already remarkable for its numerous peculiarities ; it is also a
character that helps the solution of the problem as to their
phylogeny (plate II. fig. 31).

The pump is connected with the base of the hypopharynx and
approximates to the mechanism found in the Empkke, but differs
in detail. The piston working in the cavity is a plate with the
sides bent to the shape of a bulb, connected with the pharynx at
its posterior end ; there are also openings on either the upper or
lower wall. When the bulb is drawn back by the pharynx, this
opening is closed by the roof or floor of the outer case, and the
bulb acts as a piston creating a vacuum, and when released, the
opening being no longer obstructed, permits the free flow of fluid
up the pharynx. Preparations of the following species show the
pharyngeal pump : —

Dolichopus phcmipes Scop.
D. griseipennis Stan.
Poecilobothrus nobilitatus L.
Orthochile niqroccerulca Ltr.

The Mouth-parts of the Nemocera. By W. West-he". II

Porphyrons gravipt s W.

Argyra argyria Mg.

Medetcrus truncorum Mg.

Aphrosylus raptor Hal.

Chrysotus laesus W. (?)

Psilopus vjiedemanni Fin.

Campsicnemus scambus and (.'. curvipes Fin.

MachwHum maritimce Hal.

Hydrophorus litoreus I- In.

The trophi of Aphrosylus raptor Hal. are like the limbs,
highly specialised for the attack of other insects, but they are also
of great interest from the anatomical point of view. The mosi
remarkable part is the labium, which is without the usual tracheae ;
the mentum is but little developed, and lacks the median process
that is found so constantly on this part in the Dolichopodidaa ;
nevertheless, the mandibles are imbedded, as dissection reveals
two broad blades in the muscles of the ventral side ; an interest-
ing confirmation of my theory as to the migrations of this part.
It can now be seen that Aphrosylus has halted in a stage of
development, which such genera as Dolichopus and Poecilobothrus
must necessarily have passed through. The dorsal sides of the
labium show the levers which are homologised as cardmes and
stipites in Dolichopus, but half-way up there is a thickening of the
chitin which suggests the junction of the stipites and laciniae ; if
this is the case it indicates another arrest of development. The
palpi are fiat and thinly haired, the hypopharynx is narrower than
in Dolichopus ; the labrum is formed into two large curved hooks,
and the portion between these hooks is very strongly and shortly
haired. Like the same part in D. griseipennis figured in the 1 ( .»04
paper, the back of the labrum is drawn out into a powerful lever
to which are attached muscles to work the labrum as an offensive
weapon (plate II. figs. 33-37). In Gymnoptemus assitnilis Staeg.
there is a type of trophi intermediate between Dolicliopus and
Orthochilc; the labium, while retaining most of the characters of
Dolichopus, being lengthened. This seems to indicate a change of
habit in favour of flower feeding, and this idea is confirmed by the
conteuts of the stomach, which is full of pollen (plate II. fig. 32).

Psilopus wiedemanni Fin. departs in the trachea- of the
paraglossse from the usual curious type in the family, but still
retains traces, and keeps the barbed labrum and vent rally
imbedded mandibles, nearly always found in the Dolichopodida\

I shall devote considerable attention to the Phoridse, as very
little work has been done on the trophi, and owing to many
peculiarities, the position of the family in the systematic lists is
a matter of debate, on which the character of the mouth-parts

12 Transactions of the Society.

throws light. The small size of these flies renders dissection very
difficult, and a study of a greater Dumber of species has shown
that several points in the 1904 paper are erroneous, or erroneous
in part.

The cardines are not in their usual place, hut are aborted. I
was misled by my preparation, which quite agrees with the figure
on plate vii. (1904). What are marked as cardines are in reality
the edges of the submentum. This shows when the structures are
teased apart ; mounted in the ordinary way the appearance is
deceitful. The taste-hair at the end of each trachea is found in
many of the tropin of Diptera, but, so far as my observations go, is
never so large as it is in the Phoridee and Dolichopodidae. The
part marked h (hypopharynx) is not that, but a fusion of the
laciniee, only to be found in the Phoridse, and characteristic of their
mouth-parts.

The trophi are peculiar in many respects, and present sin-
gularities not found in other families : —

1. The armature differs in the sexes in the majority of cases,
though the genus Gymnophora appears to be an exception. This
difference is not a failure of mandibles as in Gulex or Tabanus, but
the labrum is armed and the bases of the tracheae bear strong
teeth in the female, while the labrum is quite simple and the teeth
less developed in the male (plate III. figs. 47, 48).

2. In both sexes (though often smaller in the males) is found
the curious aculeation at the base of the cleft of the paraglossse.
This I homologise as the fused lacinia?, the cardines being quite
aborted or absorbed into the base of the lacinia?. In Gymnophora
arcuata Mg. and in the female of P. curvinervis Beck, the cardines
appear to be present, but. abnormally small and quite close to the
lacini;i' ; their broadened bases are quite recognisable. I know of
no similar migration of the parts in any insect, but a comparison
with what has come about in the Tipulida? and Bolichopodida?
makes me feel confident of this determination (plate III. figs. 38, and
plate IV. fig. 54)

3. The cleft between the paraglossa? is very deep, and the
edges of the paraglossa? bordering the cleft, bear chitinous plates.

4. The mandibles are fused into the mentum and send out
lateral processes as in many Stratiomyida? and Lonchopterida?.
(plate III. fig. 49, and plate IV. fig. 53).

5. The presence of teeth on the paraglossa?, only found in the
specialised Muscidse, combined with the anterior position of the
maxilla?, and the ventral position of the mandibles, makes this
trophi peculiar (plate III. figs. 38, 45, and plate IV. fig. 54).

G. The palpi are two-jointed in exceptional cases, as in Phora
concinna Mg. figured on plate ■ vii. (1904), also in P. trincrvis
Beck ? ; but in the majority of species they have annulated bases
very similar to the same part in Pipunculvs. They are labial and

The Mouth-parts of the Ncmocera. By W. Wesclie. 13

bear more or less developed sense-organs. In Trineura aterrima V.
this sense-organ is similar to that on the four-join ted palpus in
some of the Bibionidse (plate III. figs. 42, 4G, 51).

The relationship to the Dolichopodidae is shown not only by
the' toothed labrum and its greater development, but also by a
pubescence on this part, that being a character mostly confined t<>
the Dolichopoclida? ; the deep channelled hypophaiynx especially
when viewed from the side is also similar to that found in some
genera of 'the larger family. The hairs laterally placed on each
side of the median suture of the mentum in some Dolichopodida\
Lonchopteridas, and Phoridge also point to a relationship. The
deeply cleft labium, the plates, the arrangement of the tracheae
and taste-hairs on the paraglossa? also indicate an affinity to
Leptis.

The predaceous habits of the Phorida? have been alluded to as
probable, and I have now some evidence in support of that view.
I have a small Acalyptrate Muscid which I took out of the
grasp of P. concinna ; both are mounted on the same card. I
have made inquiries and it seems that the observation is rare,
as those who have studied this family, like Dr. J. H. Wood, who
has paid great attention to it, have not had a similar experience.
But the contents of the abdomen in many preparations strengthens
me in my opinion, as they present the appearance found in blood-
sucking and predatory insects, a subject to which I have of late
paid some attention. Add to this the markedly predaceous
character of the mouth-armature, and it can be seen that these
minute insects can find weaker organisms to prey on. Packard says,
probably deriving his information from "Williston, that different
species feed on both living and dead insects and sometimes decay-
ing vegetable matter* — and this is possibly an observation of the
North American species.

Group -5. — The list of species in which the remains of palpi
have been found contains two wrong determinations : Myiocera
carinifrons Fin. is Phorocera serriventrisllnd., and Anthomyia sulci-
ventris Ztt. is Phorlia ignota End. These remnants of palpi
occur so often that it is not necessary to add to the list already
published ; it may, however, be pointed out (1) that they are most
strongly marked in the Cyrtoneurinse section of the Muscidse
and the Myckeinre section of the Anthomyida: ; (2) and fail in
specialised forms such as Stomoxys, Glossina, Siphona, Prosena, or
Drymk > ; (3) and in those genera where the fourth longitudinal
vein completely closes the cell and has left the margin; (4) or the
teeth on the paraglossce are much developed and the eyes air
separated in the males (the Camosina3 section of the Anthomyi
and the Cordyluridse).

* Entomology for Beginners New York : Holt and Co., 3rd ed., 1899, p. 126.

14 Transactions of the Society.

As already stated, tbe Lonchopteridre have been transferred to
Group 2.

I am rather doubtful as to the position of the Pipunculidje in
this section. A dissection of P. campestris Ltr. $ shows the
cardines of the maxillae in contact with the bases of the palpi ;
while the preparation of P. zonatus Ztt., from which the 1904 draw-
ing was made, and also two of Chalurus spurius Flu., show the
bases of the palpi quite away from the cardines.

On the other hand, while P. campestris shows no suture on the
mentum indicative of the fusion of the mandibles on the ventral side,
it is very apparent in an undetermined female, in P.modcstus ^,
and in C. spurius $ .

The very marked sense-organ in the annulated palpi is also
another Nematocerous character which makes the position of this
family in the Cyclorrapha doubtful.

[u Echinomyia fera L. several Sarcophaga, Clistia marensMg.,
Oliviera lateralis F., Prosena sybarita F., and Siphona geniadata
Deg., there is a chitinous process at the base of the labrum. This
on a cursory examination might appear to be a remnant of the
pump in Culcx; but a more careful inspection will show that it
cannot be this, as it is not in connection with the pharynx, which
shows as a small tube leading from the hypopharynx and passes
under the process in a very degenerate state compared with the
lirachycerous forms or with such conditions as exist in Calliphora
or the Cordyluridie. The process in the genera mentioned is con-
nected with the other chitinous parts by flexible membranes and
proceeds to the submentum, which is narrowed into a funnel for
the reception of the duct, and incloses this " pseudopharynx" within
its walls, where a process analogous with the pump seems to
exist. This is fairly clear in S. geniculata, where there appears to
be a valvular process inside the submentum (plate IV. fig. 58).

In Stomoxus and Glossina a somewhat similar arrangement
exists, which clearly explains the degeneration of the hypopharynx
in these genera.

In Stomoxys there is a strongly tracheated tube leading through
the submentum, which is not modified as in Siphona.

The Anthomyid Lispc tentaculata Deg. has very large spatulate
palpi, one of the most curious forms in the Muscidse. The micro-
scopic structure, when seen with high powers, appears identical
with that found on the palpi of some DolichopodidaB, particularly
Aphrosylus raptor Hal., which also bears spatulate but not stalked
palpi. The labrum in Lispc is used as a sucking organ and is
connected with the submentum in the same manner as in Siphon",
but the hypopharynx is also used; it is thickened at its base and
pierced by the pharynx, which' is fairly well developed. The
strong teeth that are found on the paraglossre show the relationship
to the Cordylurida?, and the position of the genus in the systematic

The Mouth-parts of the Nemocem. By W. JVesche". L5

lists endorses this; but this lias come about by the consideration
of another character, the wide separation of the eves in both sexes.
As the teeth are very strongly developed in all the Caenosinaj
I have examined, there seems a correlation in the two characters
(plate IV. fig. 62).

The processes on the labium of Seoptera uibrans L. described in
1904, have also been observed in Pteropwctria nigrina M>. 2,
Acidia lychnidis F '. $ and Geroocys pictus Mg. £ $.

The very curious paraglossse of Seoptera are noteworthy; the
cleft in the median line has disappeared, and the paraglossia are
fused together. This suggests that the whole tropin are a laie
development, which does not help to any solution of the problem
as to whence these processes are derived.

The very minute Chloropid, Oscinis pusilla Mg. which is but
little over a millimetre in length, has very well marked remains of
maxillary palpi, the ends of the stipites being thickly haired. An
undetermined species of the same genus from Xew Zealand also
has the same character. Other genera such as Ghlorops, have in
0. tccniopm Mg. the stipites with a very faint pubescence or as in
Meromyza, M. nigrirenlis Mcq. and M. laeta Mg. quite bald.

As regards the Muscid family, these remnants when present
can sometimes be seen with § in. objectives, but more often a }. in.
will be required with good substage illumination, for a satisfactory
view.

Group 6. — In the Psilidse, the tropin of Loxocera cdbiseta
Schrank have been examined and dissected, and conform to the
type of this group ; the maxillse resemble those of Ccelopa frigida
figured in the 1904 paper, but have a chitinous process branching
off at right angles from the middle of the stipes; a condition
similar to that which I have found in some Ephydrida?.

L. cdbiseta has remarkably long antennae, and is a fairly common
insect, found stationary on herbage or hedges. It appears to feed
on the juices of flowers, but I have no definite record of observa-
tions on this point.

Group 7. — In a number of Hydrellia that I collected at
Geelong, Australia, I have found the complete maxilla, nearly
exactly similar to that in //. griseola Fin. of our English fauna.
These insects are very close to our form, and whether they have
been introduced or not must remain an open question; but the
observation is of interest as it implies the very possible wide
distribution, characteristic of archaic forms, and agrees with the
general character of the Australian fauna, which is often of ancient
type. Since writing the above, I have mounted and examined a
Hydrellia which I captured in New Zealand, and which also has
similar maxilla-.

16 Transactions of the Society.

Group 8. — Oncodes gibbosus L., one of a genus in the Oyrtidse,
is without any mouth-parts, the buccal aperture being completely
closed by a membrane ; an abortion of parts has taken place, more
complete than in Gastrophilus equi F., where remnants of palpi are
still to be found. The failure of the mouth-parts is not a constant
character in this family, the labium being long and much developed
in some species of the genus Cyrtus.

Summary.

1. A few remarks are made on some points of anatomy in
I'ii lex irritans L. bearing on its position in the Order.

2. An anatomical character in the mouth-parts is noticed which
appears to divide the two great divisions in Diptera, the Orthor-
rapha from the Cyclorrapha.

3. The " pharyngeal pump " in the head of Culex is figured, and
its homologues, found in the Tipulidse, Asilicke, Empidse, and
Dolichopodidse, are figured and described in several species.

4. An atrophying fourth joint on the palpi of the female of
Culex annulipcs Mg. is figured and described.

5. The trophi in the Leptidae, Lonchoptericla?, Dolichopodidse,
Phoridsp, and Conopod<e, are further discussed, and more species are
figured in all these families, except the Lonchopteridie and
Conopodse.

6. The Platypezidse are placed in Group 2, and the trophi of
several species figured and described. The Psilidre are placed in
Group 6.

7. The Lonchopterida) are transferred to Group 2.

8. Mistakes in the homologies of the trophi of the Phoridre are
pointed out, and the species figured in 1904 is determined. Some
evidence is given as to the predaceous habit in this family.

9. Two wrong determinations are pointed out in Group 5.

10. Remarks are made on the trophi of the Pipunculidse and
their doubtful position and varying armature.

11. Changes in the pharynx of some Muscidse are pointed out,
and the degeneration of the hypopharynx in some species
accounted for ; several dissections are figured.

In conclusion I have to express my many obligations to
Mr. E. E. Austen, Lt.-Colonel Bingham,* Mr. J. J. F. X. King,
Dr. J. H. Wood and Lt.-Colonel Yerbury, not only for much kind
help in determination, but also for the provision of material for
dissection.

* Since the above was written, Colonel Bingham, to the deep regret of all who
knew him, has gone to his rest.

17

II. — Note on a New Growing Cell for Critical Observations
under the Highest Powers.

By A. A. C. Eliot Merlin.

(Read November 18, 1908.)

Having at various times done a considerable amount of high -power
work on living bacteria and the smaller monad forms, it was found
that for critical observational purposes, under even oil-immersion
objectives, a well-constructed Rousselet live-box as usually made
afforded perfectly satisfactory results except that the thin water
film containing the specimens was certain to quickly evaporate, so
that in the hot summer months any individual organism could
only be studied for about half an hour. To obviate this very
serious drawback, a modified live-box was made for, ami described
by me,* in which evaporation was retarded by means of an india-
rubber band placed round the rim.

I now venture to bring to your notice an improved form of
moist and warm chamber box which has been found in practice to
work most satisfactorily, a very small and excessively thin film
having remained unaffected by evaporation during three weeks in
the hottest summer weather, the thermometer standing at well
over 80° F.

The accompanying illustration (fig. 1) will explain the design
of this little piece of apparatus more clearly than any verbal
description, the appliance consisting of a closed rectangular warm-
water circulating tank 3*5 in. long, 2 in. wide, and 0*G in. deep.
In the centre there is a circular well 1 ' 6 in. in diameter, with a
glass tablet, • 4 in. in diameter, mounted flush with the under
surface of the tank. The cover- glass carrier is as in the liousselet
model, except that it is provided with a flange, 0*3 in. broad,
which rests on another flange on the upper surface of the rect-
angular tank, so that when the | in. cover is in position close
over the tablet, f there is just space for a ring of thick blotting paper
or linen to lie in position between the flanges. The blotting paper

* Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, series 2, ix. (1905), p. 169.

t Although this contrivance is more especially designed and intended for the
observation of small monad forms under high powers, for which a very thin water
film is desirable, it will be found that, by placing two or more blotting-paper
rings between the flanges, the depth of the cell can be suffL d to

accommodate the larger organisms, such as rotifers, etc., without subjecting them
to injurious pressure.

Feb. 17th, 1909 r

18

Transactions of the Society.

or linen ring is cut with two projecting pieces, one on each side,
these passing into two little wells sunk into each end of the tank,
so that the paper or linen can he kept constantly and evenly wet,
and thus air entering the chamber can only do so by passing
through the saturated material between the flanges.

Mr. C. Lees dirties has kindly consented to exhibit and explain
a box constructed by his firm to my specification.

Fig. 1.

A. Cover-glass carrier.

D. Cover-glass.

F. Reservoirs.

H. Outlet for warm water.

B. Filter-paper, blotting-paper, or linen.

E. Glass tablet.

< i. Inlet for warm water.

I. Opening for thermometer.

To sum up, the chief points and advantages of the contrivance
are: — ■

1. A minute living monad or bacillus can be kept under
continuous observation with a } \j oil-immersion objective and
critical illumination for an indefinite period.

2. The oil may be wiped off from the cover and a dry lens sub-
stituted without disturbing the living specimens under observation.

A New Growing Cell By A. A. C. Eliot Merlin. 19

3. "When warm water from a thermostatic regulator is allowed
to circulate through the tank (to which a thermometer can be
adapted), living organisms can be kept for long periods at a given
temperature. In this case the metal under-part of the tank should
not rest on the Microscope stage, but two thin strips of ebonite or
other suitable non-conducting material should be inserted between
the box and the stage.

4. The apparatus must be so constructed as to be absolutely
air-tight except where the moist air enters at the flanges, and any
cement used should be capable of withstanding the effects of
moisture, cedar-wood oil, and the temperature of a sterilizing oven
when it may be advisable to sterilize the contrivance before use.

5. The cover-glass carrier is arranged so as to allow a very con-
siderable volume of moist air to be contained within the chamber,
this being necessary for the well-being of living organisms.

6. The tablet should be small, and must permit of an oil-
immersion or any other objective being used up to its margin. Its
thickness must allow a wide-angled aplanatic substage condenser
to be conveniently focused through it.

7. The wells are provided with covers to retard evaporation
when necessary, but they can be easily replenished with water
when the apparatus is in action on the stage of the Microscope.

In conclusion, I am greatly indebted to Mr. C. Lees Curties for
the care he has bestowed on the construction of this little con-
trivance, which is, so far as I know, the only moist chamber yet
devised which permits of the continuous and convenient observa-
tion of the smallest living organisms under critical conditions with
the highest powers.

20

Transactions of the Society.

III. — A Workshop Microscope.
By J. E. Stead, F.R.S.

(Read December 16, 1908.)

The Microscope exhibited at this Meeting has not any special
novelty beyond the illuminating device. It was designed by
myself, and made by Messrs. Swift and Son, for the use of
engineers and workers in metals, who occasionally require the use

~

Fig. 2.

A W&rkshop Microscope. Bij 3. E. Stead. 21

of a Microscope in the most simple form in their workshops. As
the metal objects are opaque, the necessity of having a substage
is avoided.

The stand, as will be seen in the illustration (fig. 2), has no
substage, and is supported on a tripod base.

The lower terminals of the legs consist of hard steel points, and
the upper ends are secured by screws into the brass disk.

The microscopic tube, 8 in. in length, is free to slide through
a second tube secured in the centre of the disk, and when in
use focus is obtained by moving the tube upwards and downwards
by the fingers. "When the focus is found, the tube can be fixed, if
desired, by a small set-screw.

Such a Microscope cannot replace the more elaborate Micro-
scopes, and is designed, as previously stated, for use in the work-
shop and office of the works foremen.

The illuminating arrangement can, however, be used in con-
junction with any Microscope.

22

Transactions of the Society.

IV. — A Simple Method of Illuminating Opaque Objects.
By J. E. Stead, F.R.S.

(Bead December 16, 1908.)

The main difficulty in illuminating opaque objects, where the
illuminant is independent of the Microscope, is in making the
adjustments so as to obtain maximum illumination. By the use of
the illuminating device described below, this objection is quite
overcome.

The illustrations (figs. 3 and 4) show with clearness the simple
system in which the illuminating source and the reflectors are
attached to the object-glasses.

In the arrangement shown in fig. 3 — suitable for 1^ objectives
— the cover-glass reflector is placed between the nose of the glass
itself and the object, and is supported in position on a right-angle
tube, one limb of which is attached to the object-glass; into the

Fig. 3.

Fig. 4.

other is fixed a small electric lamp, which can be switched on when
the Microscope is in use.

Fig. 5 is an improvement of fig. 3, and is so arranged that
either vertical or oblique rays of light can be thrown on the
sections. This is effected by a device in which the tube carrying
the lamp and reflector can be moved to the right or left, in such a
way that when in one position vertical rays fall on the object,
and when in the other position, oblique rays.

The illustrations are sufficiently clear to show this.

When applied to ordinary Microscopes there is no necessity to
keep the Microscope in any one position when the operator is at
work, and it can be tilted to any angle without the slightest dis-
advantage.

Illuminating Opaque Objects. By J. E. Stead.

23

For low-power work, it has been found by long experience that
the simple cover-glass reflector is all that is required, but more
perfect illumination can be obtained by replacing the plain cover-
glass by a silver mirror, so adjusted as to only partly cover the
object, as in the Sorby-Beck reflectors.

For higher powers the reflector is always placed in a slit in the
object-glass, and the electric lamp is attached to the object-glass
in such a position that, when the current is turned on to the
lamp, the object is invariably perfectly illuminated. Fig. 4 will
explain the arrangement.

FIRST POSITION

(reacj vzmm.

Fig. 5.

24 Transactions of the Society.

V. — On Mounting Rotifers and Protista in Canada Balsam.
By The Rev. Eustace Tozer.

{Read December 16, 1908.)

Some years ago, when experimenting with cell-life, it occurred
to me that if delicate organisms like Rotifers and Protista could
be passed through oils, mounting in Canada balsam would follow
as a matter of course. I found that they could be prepared for oil
by passing through absolute alcohol after being fixed and hardened.
1 now use various fixatives : osmic acid 1 p.c, picric acid, glacial
acetic acid, absolute alcohol, formalin 40 p.c.

In February 1908 I exhibited at the Society's Meeting some
Rotifers prepared and mounted in balsam by methods I will describe.

I have brought a series of slides to exhibit to-night, including
Brachionus (infested with Sporozoa), Hydatina, Floscularia, (Ecistes
stygis (extended from tube, and showing wreath of cilia), Pterodina,
Euglena, etc. They are double-stained and without shrinkage.

I may say that the methods are exceedingly simple, and within
easy reach of the average worker.

The Methods. — To get Rotifers in quantities I placed them in
shallow saucers covered with glass, away from direct sunlight.
Clean pond-water is best, and I put in Euglena for food. Success
depends upon a good supply of food. They breed rapidly, and may
be picked off the surface of the water with a penknife.

Extending and Fixing. — One drop of osmic let fall on the water
on the slide suffices for many. This acid is essential for Acincta
and Actinophrys to fix the rods.

Three drops of cocaine 10 p.c. added at intervals will answer for
many Rotifers. Others are amenable to picric acid added at intervals.

Picric acid or cocaine fixes pseudopodia of amoeba?..

Formalin added slowly extends the jaws of small sea-worms.
Formalin vapour, manipulated with watch-glasses, is the best
fixative for flagellate zoospores and the monads of infusions.

Glacial acetic acid differentiates the jaw-parts of Rotifers, re-
vealing the most minute structure. It is particularly useful for
the study of kinetic phenomena in Rotifer eggs. The Rotifers may
be left in it for eight hours before passing through the other pro-
cesses to be described. The only drawback is that unless carefully
applied it shrivels the cilia. (Glacial acetic acid must be first
washed out with alcohol.)

When the Rotifers are transferred to the slide — extended and

Mounting Rotifers end Protista in Balsam. By E. Tozer. 25

fixed by osuiic, cocaine, or picric— I put on the cover-glass, placing
a thread of white cotton between the cover-glass and slide, thus

Fig. G.

The cotton prevents the specimens from being crushed or washed
away in subsequent operations, and enables us to pass them through
all kinds of treatment.

I now draw off the water by placing bits of blotting-paper to
the right of the cotton-thread, and apply osmic at the left of the
cover-glass.

When the specimens are immersed in the osmic, add the stain,
picro-carmin or eosin. These two stains prevent osmic from
blackening, and the picro-carmin along with osmic differentiates
the structure. Staining and hardening are thus combined.

The slide is then put in a dark moist chamber, to prevent
evaporation. I use two saucers. In the lower one I put some
water, and over it a square piece of glass. The slide goes on the
glass, and the whole is covered with the other saucer, which is
moistened.

Time required for hardening varies with different forms.
Brachionus will be ready for further treatment in 5 hours;
Htjdatina, 12-24 hours ; CEcistes, 24 hours ; Floscularia (whose
case is so difficult to fix), 3 days ; amcebce and other allied forms,
about 10 hours (the latter with picric method).

When hardening is complete, the specimens must be washed.
Elotting-paper is applied to the right of the cotton, and drops of
water to the left side of the cover-glass. After all the osmic and
stain are washed out from under the cover-glass, leave the specimens
in the water some fifteen minutes. I often counter-stain here with
eosin, which expels acid. Now thoroughly dehydrate with absolute
alcohol, applying drops and blotting-paper. After thoroughly
Mashing with this alcohol, leave the specimens in it for at least
one hour, to clear all trace of acid. Any acid present causes
shrinkage when oil is applied.

I next apply oil of cloves, the worst possible oil for many
things, but excellent for Rotifers mb Protista prepared as described.
The oil is applied in the same way as the water and alcohol. I
leave the specimens in the oil for half-an-hour. As this oil d
not evaporate, the cover-glass may be lifted and the specimen

26 Transactions of the Society.

adjusted. Tilt the slide and allow the superfluous oil to run off.
Drop on the smallest quantity of xylol, and then add the balsam
(xylol-balsam). Leave it a few minutes and apply a warmed cover-

glass.

If the specimen will admit of it, lift it on to a clean cover-glass
with a brush. Apply the xylol and balsam. Lower a slide down
on to the balsam, and turn over. It is always better to mount on
the cover-glass for research with immersion lenses.

When cocaine is used, pass osmic through and treat as described.
Floscularia will require three days in the osmic and stain. When
picric acid is used, leave the forms in it for a while and add picro-
carmin.

Protista require about 8 hours in the moist chamber; 24 hours
are generally necessary to exhibit the cilium.

Before washing with water, when picric is used, pass under the
cover-glass a few drops of osmic. Then proceed with water, then
alcohol, and then oil as described.

For Euglena I use formalin, picric, or osmic to fix and harden,
5 to 10 hours. Osmic alone preserves the natural colour of many
EiajleiKC and Diatoms.

For the Study of Cell-division in Diatoms. — The following
method not only fixes the cell contents, but emphasizes the beau-
tiful markings. The diatoms are put into a watch-glass in sea-
water or fresh-water, according to their habitat. Place a small
piece of wet cotton near the edge, move the watch-glass round, and
the diatoms gather at the bottom. Slowly tilt the watch-glass to
pour off the liquid, helping it away with blotting-paper. The
cotton prevents the escape of specimens.

Now fix with abundance of picric acid or osmic, add picro-carmin,
cover with another watch-glass, and leave in the dark for ten
hours. Then pour off the picric as before, by tilting and blotting-
paper. Add water, and pour off again. This is repeated until no
colour is given off. Go through the same process with absolute
alcohol.

When no colour is given off, leave the specimens in the alcohol
some hours, covering with a watch-glass, which will prevent rapid
evaporation. Dip a brush now in the watch-glass, lift a few
specimens, and transfer to oil of cloves on a slide. If they clear,
the rest of the specimens are ready. When that is so, pour off the
alcohol and add oil of cloves.

Leave the specimens in the oil for a while, and lift out as
required with a brush on to a cover-glass. Drop on them the
smallest quantity of xylol, then drop on the balsam. Leave the
cover-glass thus, protected from dust, for a while, then "turn over
the cover-glass on to a slide just moistened with xylol.

This method may be adapted to preparing quantities of Rotifers,
and is very useful for the larger Protista. Minute Protista are

Mounting Rotifers and Protista in Balsam. By E. Tozer. 27

prepared on the cover-glass. The cover-glass is smeared by a
brush dipped into, let us say, a swarm of Chlamydomonas. Drop
on a little osmic acid, and add picro-carmin. Leave it thus in the
moist chamber for '24 to 48 hours. When taken out, allow the liquid
to nearly evaporate until the cover-glass is seen to be just moist.
Now turn over the cover-glass on to a slide, interposing the thread
of cotton.

It will be found that most of the forms are fixed on to the
cover-glass. Wash very gently with water, then alcohol, as
described for Rotifers. Then follows the oil, and the cover-glass
is lifted on to a drop of balsam on a clean slide. This method
shows both structure and cilia.

Many very minute Protista may be mounted by the ordinary
methods of preparing blood. The best fixative is formalin vapour.
Moisten a cover-glass, and it will fix to a flat-shaped watch-glass.
Turn this over on to a deep watch-glass containing formalin.
Leave on a warm place for 15 minutes.

The specimens are fixed. They may be dried and stained as
witli the blood method, or, better, passed through the processes
described for Chlamydomonas. For these processes they will
require longer fixing.

A word on mounting Hydra viridis may be useful. Put the
specimen on a slide in water with cover-glass and cotton. Let it
extend naturally. Apply the smallest possible quantity of abso-
lute alcohol, letting it reach the animal at its base, where it is
least sensitive.

It will stretch and die. Dehydrate at once, and let it harden
in absolute alcohol for an hour or so. Replace the alcohol with
water to stain. Stain with picro-carmin 1 hour, counter-stain
with Heidenhain's hematoxylin 15 to 30 minutes, wash, dehydrate,
apply the oils, mount in balsam.

If in any of the above methods absolute alcohol should give
any trouble, use the graded alcohols, 3<> p.c, 60 p.c., then ( .»0 p.c.,
then absolute.

The advantages of balsam mounts need scarcely to be stated ;
they allow the" best methods of staining; when stained, the
specimens exhibit structure more clearly than by any other
methods. And then, of course, the mounts are permanent.

I would advise workers to experiment first with Brachionus,
because of the firm envelope.

For extremely delicate forms I have recently tried with succ*
the following method. After extending, hardening and washing as
described above, I have put the specimens through a second pro-
cess. I lift the specimens into a few drops of osmic and leave
them 2 to 4 hours. Then I wash with water, dehydrate, add the
oil, and then balsam.

28 Transactions of the Society.

VI — The "Bed Snow" Plant (Sphccrella nivalis).
By G. S. West, M.A., D.Sc., F.L.S.

{Read February 17, 1909.)

The red coloration of extensive tracts of perpetual snow in
alpine and arctic situations is caused by a small alga known as
Sphcerella nivalis Sommerf. It belongs to the sub-family Chlamy-
domonadere of the Volvocacese, and is very closely related to
8. lacustris (Girod.) Wittr. (= Ecematococcus pluvialis Flotow),the
tiny alga which so often gives a red colour to drying-up rain-water
pools and tanks.

It is in the resting stage of the alga that the red pigment
is chiefly developed, and therefore the beautiful red coloration
of the snow, which sometimes causes the admiration and astonish-
ment of the traveller and explorer, is due to the presence of
myriads of the resting-cells of Sphcerella nivalis.

There are no authentic records of " red snow " in the British
Islands due to this alga, and, owing to the peculiar physiological
conditions necessary for the completion of its life-cycle, it is
scarcely likely that it will be found. It occurs in the Austrian,
Swiss, and Italian Alps, and in Norway, the red tinge appearing
towards the month of August. It has also been found amid the
perpetual snows of other regions, more especially in the South
American Andes, and in the arctic and antarctic snow-fields.

It possibly occurs throughout most of the arctic snow-fields,
and the present article was written on the examination of some
particularly fine resting-cells recently presented to the Society by
the Peary Arctic Club.

Each resting-cell is a small globular body (17-24 y, in diameter),
consisting of a protoplast inclosed in a fairly thick wall of cellulose.
Pyrenoids and a nucleus are present, but are hidden by a red
pigment known as " hsematochrom," which permeates the whole
protoplasm, and exists partly in solution in minute drops of oil,
and partly in a microcrystalline form. A small quantity of
chlorophyll is also present, even in the purely red cells. The
exact function of this hrematochrom is a perplexing problem. It is
certainly more stable than chlorophyll, and generally accompanies
diminished vitality, which fact accounts for its presence in the
resting-cells. The cells can thus probably exist through adverse
circumstances much better than if they were merely green, not

The " Bed Snow " Plant. By G. S. West. 29

being so easily destroyed by sudden changes in light and tempera-
ture. Both Kny and Kerner have shown that red colouring matters
are probably concerned in the conversion of light-rays into heat,
and the great value of such a function to the " red snow " plant is
at once obvious. Moreover, Hazen has pointed out that in the
closely related Sphcerella lacustris, more red pigment is habitually
developed in cultures made from material collected from places
frozen for a great part of the year, than in those made from
material collected in milder climates.

The life-history of this organism is briefly as follows. The
typical resting-cell forms four daughter-cells of a similar bright
red colour, which remain for a time within the wall of the
mother-cell. So long as unfavourable conditions supervene, these
daughter-cells remain in the resting state, although often with a
slight increase in size. Should the conditions become favourable,
however, the daughter-cells very quickly escape from the mother-
cell, develop a pair of cilia, and become motile. Each is now a
zoogonidium (or asexual motile gonidium), and in this state the
cell generally increases in size. The cell-wall is thin and dis-
tended, standing out from the main body of the protoplast ; but
much detailed observation is yet required on the motile state of
Sphcerella nivalis. After a longer or shorter active period, the
zoogonidium returns to the resting state, and the main body of the
protoplast develops around itself a thick wall within the delicate
wall it possessed in the motile state. A sexual method of repro-
duction by the conjugation of isogamous planogametes (" micro -
zoogonidia ") has been described. The resulting zygospores are
said by "Wittrock to be verrucose at maturity.

Sphcerella nivalis appears to have adapted itself to very low
temperatures, but it does not stand alone in this respect. There
are several algfe, belonging to widely separated groups, which live
habitually in the snow, and form a small assemblage of plants
known as the Cryoplankton.

Prolonged exposure to a low temperature is physiologically
necessary for the " red snow " plant, otherwise it loses its vitality.
Chodat has stated that this alga will not live for any lengthened
period at a temperature above 4° C, but experiments conducted
both in this country and the United States do not entirely support
this statement, as the resting-cells can be kept alive in water for
over twelve months at ordinary outside temperatures.

The distinctions between Sphcerella 'nivalis and S. lacustris are
not very great, and many authors have considered them to be
specifically identical. The only difference of importance appears
to be the presence in the motile vegetative cells of S. lacustris of
protoplasmic threads connecting the central mass of theprotoplnsi
with the outstanding cell-wall, whereas in S. nivalis these threads
are absent. Wollenweber states that S. lacustris has numen

30 Transactions of the Society.

contractile vacuoles which pulsate independently of one another,
and that this is one of the chief distinguishing characters between
Sphceretta (Hacmcttococcus) and Chlamydomonas. He agrees with
Wille that Sphcerella nivalis should be regarded as a species of
Chlamydomonas, C. nivalis, but before this view can be definitely
accepted the motile state of Sphmrella nivalis requires a good
deal of detailed investigation.

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES

RELATING TO

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY

(principally invkrtkbrata and cryptogamia),

MICROSCOPY, Etc.*

ZOOLOGY.

VERTEBRATA.
«• Embryology. f

Oogenesis in Cat.J — Huns von Winiwarter and G. Sainmoint find
that the definitive ova are all formed after the fa-tal period. All the
medullary formations and all the ova and follicles of the primitive
cortical layer disappear. The definitive ova arise either from non-
differentiated cells of the second proliferation (tubes of Pfliiger), or
from cells of the third proliferation or epithelial invagination. This
ueo-f ovulation is the only one that occuvs in the course of the develop-
ment of the ovary.

Origin of Primitive Germ-cells in Rana esculenta.§ — Sergius
Kuschakewitsch finds that in a normal brood the primitive germ-cells
arise from two sources. There are some of primary origin from modi-
fied yolk -cells ; there are others of secondary origin — from mesenchyme
and ccelomic epithelium. In embryos which develop from lute-
fertilised eggs there is no stage of primary germ-cells, and the pri-
mordium of the gonad cannot become an ovary. It becomes a testis,
and the spermatogonia appear directly from the geuital strands.

Entrance of Dogfish Ovum into the Oviduct.|| — V. Widakowich

discusses this question, and finds a solution in the alterations of pressure
brought about by the changes in the hepatic venous- sinus and tube-
sinus which lies around the ostium abdominale tubarum and the
beginning of the oviducts.

* The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial " we," and they
do not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers
noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of
this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually pub-
lished, and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, etc., which arc
either new or have not been previously described in this count i \ .

t This section includes not only "papers relating to Embryology properly so
called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, Reproduction, and
allied subjects. J Acad. R. Belg. Classe des Sci., 1908, No. 6, pp. 602 7.

§ SB. k. Akad. wiss. Miinchen, 1908, pp. 89-101 (11 figs.).

|| Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xci. (1908) pp. 640-58 (1 pi., 2 figs).

.rs

2 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Hyperdactylism in Houdan Fowls.* — Marie Kaufmann-Wolf gives
a precise account of a large number of cases, devoting particular atten-
tion to the development. Among the general results of the investiga-
tion the following may be noted : (1) Hyperdactylism in fowls is a new
departure not atavistic ; (2) there are indications of mirror-symmetry
in the hyperdactylous conditions : (3) the cause is endogenous, not
extrinsic, e.g. not due to amnion-threads.

Fault-bars in Feathers.f — 0. Riddle finds that fault-bars (weak
areas interrupting the fundamental barring), are due to malnutrition.
They may be produced by feeding birds on Sudan iii., by mechanical
injury of the feather germs, by bad sanitation, parasites, etc., and by
the use of amyl-nitrite to reduce blood-pressure. They are normally
laid down at night, wbeu blood-pressure is normally low. The structur-
ally weakened areas tend to be less pigmented. " The reduced
nutrition, brought about daily by the minimum blood-pressure ; the
disadvantageous position, in relation to the blood, of the pigment aud
1 larbule elements of the feather ; together with the very rapid rate at
which feathers grow, furnish the complex of conditions which bring
unfailingly into existence a fault-bar, and to a more or less appreciable
extent a light fundamental bar, at perfectly regular intervals in the
entire length of every feather formation." " The melanin pigment of
the feathers of birds shows, under favourable conditions, quantitative
variations of the pigment produced in response to changes in the
available food supply. This is an additional evidence that this pigment
is not a derivative of haemoglobin, but of the serum or cell proteids."

Hump-backed Trout.J — James Ritchie discusses a case of abnor-
mality — probably congenital — in a common trout (Salmo fario) which
showed only 40 vertebra? instead of the usual 56 to GO. The segmenta-
tion of the body was normal as regards myotomes, neural spines, and
haemal spines, but the region of the centra was reduced as indicated. It
is impossible to regard this reduction as due to pathological ankylosis'.

The possibilities of interpretation seem to range themselves round
two alternatives. 1. It may be that certain of the arcualia did not give
rise to the usual skeletogenous tissue, within which the ossification of
the centra proceeds, and that, therefore, certain of the potential centra
never actually existed. That is to say, each of the abnormal internodes
in the vertebral column of the specimen described is a true centrum to
which one or two neural arches, properly belonging to missing centra,
have become attached. The deficiency in the internodes would in tin's
case be due to the actual absence of centra. 2. The alternative is that
— the skeletogenous tissue of the future centra having been completely
formed — a compression in certain regions took place, succeeded by con-
tinuous ossification, uninterrupted by nodes. That is to say, the abnormal
internodes in the specimen contain the elements of as many centra as there
are neural spines, but those elements have not had the opportunity of
developing into separate centra.

* Morphol. Jahrb., xxxviii. (1908) pp. 471-531 (3 pis. and 42 figs.),
t Biol. Bull., xiv. (1908) pp. 328-70 (4 pis.). See also Amer. Nat., xlii. (1908)
pp. 550-2. % Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist,, 1908, pp. 223-7 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC 33

Race-crossing and Sex Ratio*-- Maud de Witt Pearl and
Raymond Pearl discuss the widespread belief that hybrids show an
excessive proportion of males, or, more generally, that the relative
proportions of the sexes may be influenced by the method of breeding
practised. Statistics of over 200,000 human births, extending over a,
period of ten years in the City of Buenos Ayres. show that the pro-
portion of males to females is significantly greater when the parents are
of different racial stocks than when they are of the same stock. The
preponderance of males in the offspring of cross-matings does nol
appear to be capable of explanation as the result of environmental or
demographic influences.

Geminate Species.f — David Starr Jordan gives instances of what he
calls geminate species, which represent one another on opposite sides of
some form of barrier. Good instances are found among the fishes on
the two sides of the isthmus of Panama. Geminate species differ in
minor regards, characters which we may safely suppose to be of later
origin than the ordinary specific characters. " While segregation or
isolation is not a force, and, perhaps, not strictly a cause in species
formation, it is a factor which apparently can never be absent, if the
species retains its independent existence."

Evolution without Isolation. £ — O. F. Cook does not think that
isolation (or selection) causes evolution, or helps it along. The separa-
tion of a species into two or more parts allows the parts to become
different, but there is every reason to believe that evolutionary changes
of the same kind would take place if the species were not divided.
Isolation is the shears that splits the species, not the loom that weaves
it. The weaving is done when the fabric is broad. The larger and
more diversified species make the truly constructive evolutionary
progress. The evolution of a species is in no way dependent upon its
being split into smaller groups, but is more likely to be hindered
by narrow subdivisions. If the groups are too small they degenerate
and become extinct, instead of continuing their evolution. Isolation,
though making more species, impedes evolution.

b. Histology.

Leucocytes in Invertebrates.§ — Max Kollmann has made an
elaborate study of the leucocytes in representative types of Inverte-
brates. He discusses the various kinds, and in particular the develop-
ment and role of granulated leucocytes. These accumulate reserve
substances, and increase or decrease in number as the state of nutrition
varies. The lymphoid organs found in various groups— molluscs,
arthropods, annelids, echinoderms— resemble similar organs in Verte-
brates, consisting essentially of stroma (usually cellular) with free
lymphoid cells in its meshes.

* Biol. Bull., xv. (1908) pp. 194-205.

t Amer. Nat., xlii. (1908) pp. 73-80. X Tom. cit., pp. 727-31.

§ Ann. Sci. Nat. (Zool.) viii. (1908) pp. 1-240 (2 pis., 25 figs.).

Feb. 17 th, 1909 D

34 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Structure of Pigment-cells.* — V. Franz has made a study of
various types of pigment-cell. The concentration of the pigment
depends on intracellular streaming movements of the pigment grannies.
The plasmic radial structure of pigment- cells has its basis in an intra-
cellular skeleton, somewhat like that of some Acantharia.

Regeneration of Intestinal Epithelium in Cobitis fossilis.|—
Helene Lupu finds that the epithelial cells degenerate by the breaking
down of the nuclei and dissolution of the chromatin. The regeneration
occurs by superficial mitosis at the expense of persisting embryonic-
basal cells. There is no evidence of any passage of connective-tissue
elements through the basal membrane.

Interstitial Tissue of Mammalian Ovary.j — Hans von Winiwarter
has studied this in man and other mammals. It probably occurs in all
mammals. It appears periodically, as if in instalments, and probably
has a trophic role. There is no warrant for speaking of an interstitial
gland.

Regeneration of Peripheral Nerves.§ — Ptoss G-. Harrison cut the
nerves of one side of the tail of larva? of Bona sylvatica just beyond
the point of emergence from between the myotomes, and observed the
prpcess of degeneration and regeneration from day to day. The de-
generative processes take place very rapidly. In less than 24 hours the
medullary sheath is completely disintegrated beyond the lesion, and for
a very shoit distance central to it. In the axis-cylinder of both the
medullated and non-medullated nerves, the signs of degeneration
are less marked, but unmistakable. The Schwann-cells become less
regularly spindle-shaped, with a somewhat humpy surface, and do not
adhere so closely to the axis-cylinder.

After one or two days the cut ends of many of the nerves have
united by a protoplasmic bridge. In such cases the degeneration of the
peripheral part of the axis-cylinder is immediately arrested, indicating
that a primary healing of nerve-fibres is possible. The medullary sheath
is not rehabilitated immediately, and the process of re-formation of this
structure resembles its initial development.

When the peripheral portion of a nerve fails to unite with a central
stump, degeneration continues till the nerve disappears. AVhen a
central stump fails to unite with a peripheral end, regeneration takes
place by a comparatively slow process in a centrifugal direction. There
is no indication whatever of any power of " auto-regeneration " in the
nerves whose connection with the central end remains severed.

c. General.

Habits of Sloths. || — A. Menegaux points out that sloths (Bradypus)
are not exclusively arboreal — that they sometimes descend to the
ground and seek out another tree. They descend backwards. They

* Biol. Centralbl., xxviii. .(1908) pp. 545-8 (13 figs.).

t Arch. Zool. Exper., ix. (1908) pp. 417-28 (1 pi.).

% Anat. Anzeig., xxxiii. (TJ08) pp. 1-9 (5 figs.).

§ Reprint from Amer. Journ. Anat., vii. (Feb. 29, 1908) 1 p.

|| Comptes Rendus, cxlvii. (1908) pp. 1079-82.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 35

bite oft* the leaves they eat, and never put their hands to their
mouths. Although they move about on the branches back downwards,
they do not sleep in this position.

Theory of Pentadactyl Limb.*— A. N. Sewertzoff has studied the
development of the limb in a number of reptiles and amphibians, such
as Ascalobotes fascicularis and Triton cristatus, and has been led to thi
conclusion that the pentadactyl limb may be traced back to a broad
horizontal fin attached by a broad base to the lateral body wall.

Relation of Size and Structure of Intestine to Diet.t— P. Reviliiod
finds that the average relation of length of intestine to length of body
in the adult rat is 6 : 1 ; this ratio is affected by age, sex, and diet ; in
25 males it was 5*77 : 1 ; in 20 females 6*2:1; in the new-born the
ratio is 4' 17 : 1 ; at one month it is 6*49 : 1 ; at three months 6:1.

The form of the villi changes in the first two months from
cylindrical to high and narrow, and then to broad and semilunar.
Vegetable food has a mechanical influence on length, resulting in slight
elongation. Animal food has a chemical influence on length, resulting
in great elongation. With a milk diet the intestine is reduced in
diameter and length, and the villi have a form similar to that seen
during lactation.

The short intestine of Carnivores is the result of a very slow
functional adaptation. The long intestine of Herbivores is due to the
permanent mechanical effect of the insoluble residue of the food.

Haemoglobins of various Vertebrates.:]: — E. T. Reichert and
A. P. Brown find that the crystals of haemoglobin, from species of Felis,
are quite different from those of C'anis. There is even specificity in the
hamioglobin-erystals of a species, e.g. difference in the angles. In sonic
species the oxyhemoglobin is dimorphic, or even trimorphic. This is
an interesting contribution to the conception of chemical specificity.

Labyrinth of the Ear.§ — Albert A. Gray continues his careful
study of the structure of the labyrinth in Vertebrates. He gives an
account of the membranous labyrinth of the monitor, the emu, the rhea,
the penguin, the echidna, and discusses the relationships of the aqueducl
of the perilymph, the perilymph recess, and the round window to one
another, and_to the cochlea, and shows how the last stage— in Primates-
may have been reached from the Reptilian condition.

Moulting in Lizards.j| — H. L. Brunner has studied the mechanism
of moulting in the head of lizards. The veins and blood sinuses of tin ■
head are concerned. Special muscles distend the sinuses and raise the
venous blood-pressure. One of these muscles (m. constrictor vena'
jugularis interna?), invests the jugular where it passes from the head
into the neck; a second (m. protrusor oculi), lies behind the orbit, in
close relation to the large orbital sinus. During the moulting the

* Bull. Soc. Imp. Moscow (1907) pp. 1-430 (C pis.).

t Rev. Suisse Zool., xvi. (19J8) pp. 241-319 (1 pi.).

t Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc, xlvii. (1903) pp. 298-301.

§ Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, lxxx., No. B 543 (1908) pp. 507-28 (2 pis).

|| Proc. Indiana Acad., 1907 (published 1908) p. 61.

I) 2

36 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

number of heart-beats increases and a larger amount of blood is sent to

the head.

In the first stage the constrictor contracts, the heart-beat is acceler-
ated, the veins and sinuses are distended, the eyes protrude. In the
second stage the protrusor contracts, along with others which press upon
the distended vessels, raising the blood-pressure still more. The dis-
tension of vessels and elevation of blood-pressure, aid in exuviation by
stretching the skin and by facilitating the processes of metabolism.
The moulting mechanism may be set in motion experimentally by
applying court plaster to the head. In snakes and turtles the protrusor
oculi is wanting.

Skeletal Sexual Character in Argentine Frog.*— J. Lesage de-
scribes the extraordinarily strong and ridged character of the humerus
in the male of Lepto dactyl us ocellatus. This is an adaptation to the
great muscular development of the forearm, one use of which is in
embracing the female — the embrace lasting 15 to 20 days.

Age and Rate of Growth of Eel.f— K. J. Genzoe has found that
the minute, deeply imbedded scales of the eel {Anguilla vulgaris), show
annual rings (as in many other fishes), from which the age may be read.
These scales appear first on the eels of 18 cm., and the fact that those
below this fall into two groups of size points to the conclusion that two
years pass before the scales appear. The males stay 4 \ to 8£ (usually
5| or 6 J) years in fresh-water; the females stay somewhat longer, for
g| to 8£ (usually 7£) years.

Brain of Lepidosiren.} — G. Elliot Smith finds that the features of
the brain in the Dipnoi, considered as a whole, are nearer to those of
Amphibians than to those of any other Vertebrata. In the cerebral
hemisphere there is a definite pallial formation, or cerebral cortex,
distinctly separated from the ependyma as a clearly defined layer of
nerve-cells. This pallial formation is homologous with the pallium of
Amniota. An outstanding feature is the relatively enormous develop-
ment and the high degree of specialisation of the tuberculum olfactorium.
Three elements may contribute, to the formation of the choroid plexus
of the lateral ventricle in different Vertebrata : (1) The roof of the fore-
brain ; (2) a band formed from the attenuation of the pallio-thalamic
junction ; and (3) the secondarily thinned caudal part of the para-
terminal body.

Vascular Filaments on Pectoral Fin of Lepidosiren paradoxal —
AV. E. Agar found some breeding males with vascular filaments on the
pectoral as well as on the pelvic fins. He asks whether it is a homceotic
variation, or is it a reminiscence of the former exclusively respiratory
function of the fin (on Graham Kerr's theory of the origin of the paired
limbs from external gills). The period of the functional activity of the

* C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxv. (1908) pp. 463-4.

t Rep. Dan. Eiol. Stat, to Board of Agric, xiv. (1908) 30 pp. (1 fig.). See also
Zool. Zentralbl., xv. (1908) p. 713.

% Anat. Anzeig., xxxiii. (1908) pp. 513-40 (18 figs.).
§ Tom. cit., pp. 27-30 (5 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND EOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 37

pelvic filaments coincides with the period during which it would be of
most use as an accessory respiratory organ— that is while the fish is
guarding its eggs and young in the underground nest.

Habits of Miller's Thumbs.*- -Theodor Gil] gives an interesting
account of Cottus ijobio and related forms, calling attention to their
habit of resting fixed to the bottom for a long time, the partial accommo-
dation of their colour to the surroundings, their respiratory movements,
which are about forty per minute, their omnivorous appetite and destruc-
tiveness to fish-eggs, the more intense colouring of the males, and so on.

Fishes of New South Wales.j— D. G. Stead gives a useful account
of the edible fishes of New South Wales, written in the main from a
practical point of view.

Fauna of the Obersee.i — Guido Schneider has made a regional
survey of this, the largest lake in Estland. He gives an account of
its physical and chemical peculiarity, its flora and plankton, and fauna.
There seem to be no Amoebae, Heliozoa, Sponges, Bryozoa. There
are few Rotifers or Annelids. Free Nematodes are abundant, e.g. two
new species — Chromadora leliberti and C. revalimsis. Apart from the
stickleback, the fishes are simply the common food-fishes, showing per-
sistent isolation for centuries.

Fish living inside Strombus.§ — L. Plate describes Apogonichthgs
stroinbi sp. n., from the Bahamas, which spends part of its time (the
day ?) in the mantle cavity of large specimens of Strombus gigas. Like
Fierasfer in Holothurians, it does not seem to do its host any good.
Plate calls attention to Amphiprion bicinclus in the large sea-anemone
Crambactis arabica, the small Carangidae which are sheltered by large
jellyfishes, and small fishes which live among the very long and hair-
like spines of the dark-coloured rock-urchin (Diudema saxatile).

Tunicata.

Phagocytosis and Auto-digestion in Diplosoma.|j — A. Pizon con-
tinues his study of Diplosoma, which has three kinds of ascidiozooids —
monothoracic, bithoracic, and bithoracic and biventric. Certain organs
of the bithoracic type (which has two branchiae, two gullets, and two
rectal tubes) have an ephemeral existence. After 12-18 hours in the
summer the older thorax (branchia, oesophagus, rectum) regresses and
disappears in three or four days. The involution is characterised by
the very active part played by the persisting digestive organs— there
is a literal auto-digestion — and by the great phagocytic activity of
amoeboid cells.

Musculature of Salpa.1T— R. Streiff gives a detailed account of the
musculature in the various species of Salpa, and shows how it may be

* Smithsonian Misc. Coll., v. (1903) pp. 101-16 (14 figs.).

+ The Edible Fishes of New South Wales: their Present Importance and their
Potentialities. Board of Fisheries, New South Wales (1908) 123 pp. (81 pis. and
1 map). X Arch - Biontolog., ii. heft i. (1908) pp. 1-190 (10 pis.).

§ Zool. Anzeig., xxxiii. (1908) pp. 393-9 (2 figs.).

| Comptes Rendus, cxlvii. (1908) pp. G40-1.

i Zcol. Jahrb., xxvii. (1903; pp. 1-32 (4 pis. and 11 figs.).

o

8 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

used for classificatory purposes. He divides the genus iuto three groups
of species : Cyclosalpa3, Polymyariae, and Oligomyariaa, the first being
the most primitive, the last the most evolved.

INVERTEBRATA.

Mollusca.
"~ Cephalopoda.

Embryos of Sepia.*— A. Distaso has studied the development of
Sepia, paying particular attention to the vascular system, the secondary
cavity of the body, the kidney, the gonad, and the nautiliform stage.

Branchial Hearts of Cephalopods.f — Cuenot, Gonet, and Bruntz
find that the acid cells of the branchial hearts, which have a selective
eliminative action on injected ammoniated carmine, normally inclose
pigment, phosphates, ammoniacal salts, and xanthic bodies. It is
probable that these waste products do not accumulate in the nephro-
cytes, but are passed into the blood, and got rid of at the kidneys.

/3. Gastropoda.

Respiratory Epithelium in Pulmonale Gastropods.^ — D. Calu-
gareanu and J. Dragoiu describe the minute structure of the mantle in
the . pulmonary chamber of snails and slugs. There is only a single
cell-layer between the blood and the intra-pulmonary air. In Limax the
wall is plaited, so that a sponge-like system of cavities is formed — an
adaptation to increase the respiratory surface.

Statocysts of Heteropods.§ — S. Tschachotin distinguishes in these
bodies a connective-tissue capsule, a nerve-fibre layer, and an epithelial
layer with its " macula " and " antimacula," both including ciliated and
non-ciliated cells. The statolymph is a fluid, not a jelly. The statolith
consists of calcite, along with some traces of magnesium and phosphorus
compounds, and a stroma concentrically zoned.

Attempts to connect the statocysts with hearing gave no results.
The organs seem to affect the tonus of the musculature, and to function
as " static " organs. When they are destroyed there are disturbances of
the orientation.

Sudanese Nudibranchs.|| — Sir Charles Eliot reports on a collection
made by Cyril Crossland and J. Gr. Logan, which includes seven new
species — Pleurohura glabra, Lomanotus vermi/ormis, Nembrotha Umaci-
formis, Kentrodoris labialis, Peronodoris denticulata, Artachcca verrucosa.
The collection is interesting geographically, and the author refers to the
possibility of some forms being carried on the bottoms of ships. The
reappearance of Ohola pacifica, Thorunna furthva, and Plocamopherus
ocellatus, is also interesting.

* Zool. Jahrb., xxvi. (1908) pp. 5G5-G50 (6 pis. and 13 figs.).

t Arch. Zool. Exper., ix. (1908) Notes et Revue, No. 3, pp. xlix.-Iiii.

% C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxv. (1908) pp. 521-3 (3 figs.).

tj Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xc. (1908) pp. 343-422 (5 pis. and 15 figs.).

I 1 Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.), xxxi. (1908) pp. 8G-122.

ZQOLOGY AND BOTANY, .MICROSCOPY, ] 39

Subradular Nervous System of Solenogastres.* — Harold Heath
calls attention to the interest of the nervous system of Chcctoclerma and
related forms. It is very conservative, retaining many ancestral
features, indicating relationships otherwise most obscure. One of the
enigmatical points is the so-called buccal or stomatogastric system,
consisting of a connective arising from the brain on each side, and
passing backward to a ganglion imbedded in the pharyngeal musculature.
The ganglia in turn are united by a commissure passing beneath the gut
in the neighbourhood of the radula or the outlets of the ventral Balivary
glands. Heath shows that in the genus Ghmtodennu what are usually
termed the buccal ganglia and their connectives are in reality labio-
buccal, giving rise, as in the Neomeniidre, to subradular connectives and
ganglia.' The small ganglia inserted between the larger labio-buccal
masses apparently originate no nerves, and are accordingly not to be
definitely homologised.

Antarctic Solenogaster.f — H. F. Nierstrasz describes the single
Solenogaster in the ' Discovery : collection, giving it the name Proneo-
menia discoveryi, and pointing out the distinctiveness of the species of
this genus. He also takes a survey of the family Proneomeniida\

Bathysciadium, Lepetella, and Addisonia. —J. Thiele gives some
account of these imperfectly known forms, which he refers to the
Cocculinoidea, the first two genera being included in a family Lepetel-
lidse, while Addisonia, which is much further from the Gocculina type,
requires a special family for itself.

8. Lamellibranchiata.

Classification of Lamellibranchs.§— Mario Stenta discusses this
problem. He first considers the relative values of the various organs
for taxonomic purposes. He then states and criticises the arrangements
proposed by Neumayr, Fischer, Pelseneer, Menegaux, Dall, Jackson,
I : robben, Bernard, Ptlce, Ridewood, Lankester, and others. The classifi-
cation which seems to the author to be most real is that of Grobben :.
Protobranchiata (Nuculidae, Solenomyidae) ; Eutaxodonta (Arcidae) ;
Heterodonta (a large sub-order); and Anisomyaria (Avicuhdse, Myti-
lidoB, Pectinidse, and Ostreidse).

Arthropoda.
c Insecta.

Regeneration of Wing in Lepidoptera.||— J. Meisenheimer has
succeeded in removing a wing-prhnordium from caterpillars of Ocneria
dispar, and has found that the imago has the corresponding wing
developed on a reduced scale. Werber and Kammerer have observed
the replacement of a wing in the sexually mature imagines of lenebrw
and Musca, but there is nothing of this s« »rt in Lepidoptera. 1 he author

* Anat. Anzcig., xxxiii. (1008) pp. 365-7 (1 fig.)

+ Nat. Antarctic Exped. (Zool.) iv. (1903) 13 pp. (2 pis.).

t Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, lii. (1908) pp. 81-9 (2 i

§ Boll. Soc. Adr. Sci. Nat. Trieste, xxv. (1908) pp. 1

' Zool. Anzeig., xxxiii. (1908) pp. 689 98 (1 pi. and 2 fig*.).

49 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

points out that his results do not support the view that the regenerative
capacity is always adaptive. The regenerating organ is internal and
could hardly be injured without destroying the whole animal, though
this was not the result in the author's hands. Removal of the gonads,
or their exchange with those of another sex, does not affect the secondary
sexual characters in the regenerated wing.

Polar Body Formation in Ant.* — W. Schleip has studied Formica
sanguinm. There are about forty-eight chromosomes in the first seg-
mentation-spindle ; in the equatorial plate of the first directive spindle
of the fertilised and of the parthenogenetic ovum there are about twenty-
four ; there is probably a pseudo-reduction (syndesis) in the prophase of
the first directive division, the twenty-four chromosomes of the first
directive spindle being interpreted as double-chromosomes. The polar
bodies come to nothing in the parthenogenetic as in the fertilised egg.
There is no " Richtungscopulationskern " as Petrunkewitsch believed.

In the development of a parthenogenetic ovum there are various
possibilities as to the number of chromosomes. 1. There may be a
reduction, and the normal number may be restored by the second polar
nucleus uniting with the pronucleus (Artemia salina, observed by Brauer).
2. There may be reduction, and then the chromosomes may double
(Lasius niger and Rhodites rosce, observed by Henking). 3. There may
l>e reduction, and a Richtungscopulationskern with the normal number
is formed, from which the germ-cells are derived, while the chromosomes
double spontaneously in the pronucleus (Drone-eggs, observed by Petrun-
kewitsch). 4. There may be no reduction and no doubling (probably in
various saw-flies, Doncaster).

In Formica sanguinea the egg develops, at least to the stage of the
germinal streak, with a reduced number of chromosomes.

Leg Tendons of Insects.f — C. W. Woodworth has studied the
tendons, which are cuticular invaginations and subject to replacement
at each moult. They belong to the same set of internal processes as the
internal skeleton of the head and thorax, the tendons of the jaws, the
great internal disk-like tendons for the attachment of the elevator muscles
of the wings in Odonata, and the skeletal and tendinous process of the
ovipositor.

Palaearctic TortricidEe.J — J. Kennel gives a monographic account
of this family of moths, describing their general structure and life-
history, sex-characters, variability, ethology, and systematic relationships.
The phylogeny is discussed and summed up in a very striking diagram-
matic plate.

Philippine Cassididae. — J. Weise § describes some new Cassididas,
and W. Schultze || discusses some life-histories. After a careful inquiry
into the significance of the peculiar excremental coverings, filaments, or

* Zool. Jahrb., xxvi. (1908) pp. 651-82 (2 pis.).
t Amer. Nat., xlii. (1908) pp. 452-6 (2 figs.).

t Zoologica, xxi., heft 54 (1908) pp. 1-100 (6 pis.. 1 genealogical tree, and text-
figs.). § Philippine Journ. Sci., iii. (1908) pp. 259-60.
|| Op. cit., pp. 261-71 (6 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 41

armatures of the different stages of Cassididae, Scliultze come-; to the
conclusion that Candeze was right in regarding them principally as a
protection against parasitic enemies such as Chalcidse.

Lucilia as a Parasite.* — Erich Hesse notes several cases where
newly dead toads were found to have larvae of Lucilia developing in the
head region, and several cases in which the infected toads were alive.
He also saw Lucilia laying eggs in a living nestling of the mistle-thrush
which had fallen from the nest.

s

Mosquito Breeding in Salt- and Fresh-Water .f— Charles 8. Bank
finds that Myxomyia ludlowii Theob. in the Philippines breeds in
both salt- and fresh-water. The evidence is strong that this mosquito
acts as a transmitter of aestivo-autumnal malaria. Altitude (up to 1500
metres), has no appreciable influence on its development. There is
little hope of ridding a community like Cervantes of this insect,
owing to the topographical features which are practically irremediable
because of their extent.

Regeneration of Wing in Flies. i — P. Kammerer has found that in
Musca domestica and Galliphora vomitoria amputation of a wing has no
result, but tearing of a wing from a newly pupated fly is sometimes
followed by regeneration. The new wing is at first homogeneous and
transparent, it subsequently gets veins, apparently after the normal
pattern. An injury to one wing, or removal of one wing, may be
followed by a proportionate reduction of the other wing.

Chironomid Larvse living in Leaves. — Victor WillemS reports
finding in the leaves of Spar g an i urn ramoswn the larvae of Chironomus
sparganii sp. n., and of another species, and in the leaves of St rat tote*
aloides the larvae of Psectrocladius stratiotis sp. n., and in the leaves of
the water-lily the larvae of Chironomus nymphecce sp. n. The first two
species are described and named by J. J. Kieffer. ||

Phytoptid Galls of North America. IF— Gr. H. Chadwick has made a
descriptive catalogue of 170 North American phytoptocecidia, distin-
guishing the following types : the erineum, or shallow dimple (formerly
described as fungi), the dimple, the capsule, the pocket, and the poach.

Abdominal Appendages of Male Dragonfiies.**— 0. S. Thompson
discusses the appendages on or adjacent to the sternum of the second
abdominal segment. Thev are used for copulation, and are quite
different from those at the end of the abdomen that are used for
capturing the female and leading her about. The sperm-ducts open on

* Biol. Centralbl., xxviii. (1908) pp. 753-8.

t Philippine Journ. Sci., iii. (1908) pp 335-9 (2 pis. and 3 maps).
X Arch. Entwickel ,xxv. (1907) pp. 319-60. See also Zool. Zentralbl.,xv. (1908)
pp. 631-2.

§ Acad. R. Belg. Bull. Classe des Sci., No 8 (1908) pp. 697-704 (I pi.).
|| Tom. cit., pp. 705-7.

«[ Education Dept. Bull., State of New York, No. 433 (1903) pp. 118-55.
** Tom cit., pp. 249-63 (12 figs.).

42 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the ventral side of the 9th abdominal segment; the copulatory ap-.
paratus is on the ventral side of the 2nd and 3rd segments ; previous
to copulation the abdomen is bent so that the vesicle at the front of the
3rd abdominal sternum is charged ; the female is swung round so that
her genital orifice is brought into contact with the accessory apparatus
on the 2nd abdominal segment. A very careful account of the complex
parts in their various stages of differentiation is given.

Arborescent Glands of Female Cockroach.*— L. Bordas describes
these organs, first noted by Siebold and Dufour, which surround the
rectum and the terminal portion of the hind-gut, and extend even to the
oviducts and ovarioles. There are two of them, the left much larger
than the right, and they have two apertures on the dorsal wall of the
vaginal cavity. The left arborescent gland secretes crystals of carbonate
of lime, very abundant at the time of oviposition, which serves to build
up the ootheca or ovigerous shell.

Kidneys of Thysanura.f — L. Bruntz finds two kidneys in Thysanura,
consisting of a labyrinth and a saccule, with excretory canals opening
together at the base of the lower lip. The saccules eliminate ammo-
niacal carmine, and the labyrinths carminate of indigo.

Machilida? and Lepismida3 have two pairs of cephalic glands, an
anterior pair opening at the base of the masticatory cavity, and a
posterior pair annexed to the excretory canals of the kidneys. Both
pairs are mucous glands, the anterior pair may be called masticatory
glands, the posterior pair may secrete a fluid which bears away the
excretory products.

Antarctic Aptera.| — G. H. Carpenter describes a new Podurid
from South Victoria Land, Gompluocephalus hodgsoni g. et sp. n. It
seems to be a Podurid with affinities to the Entomobryida?, just as
the AnurophorinEe— which include that remarkable antarctic genus
C'rytopygus (Willem, 1902)— are Entomobryids, with affinities to the
Podurida?. The presence of such ancient connecting links on the
antarctic continent and islands might reasonably have been expected .

fi, Myriopoda.

Dimorphic Spermatogenesis in ScutigeraJ— P. Ancel and P. Bouin
note that two kinds of spermatozoa have been observed in Paludina,
Mure®, Scolopendra, Pygmra, etc., but they have observed in Scuiigera cole-
opt rata two distinct spermatogenetic lineages, distinct from start to finish,
resulting in giant spermatozoa rich in chromatin, and dwarf spermatozoa
poor in chromatin.

5. Araclinida.

Stridulating Organs in Mygalomorph Spiders. || — A. S. Hirst
describes some new types of apparatus, which are situated on the inner

* C.R Soc. Biol. Paris, lxv. (1908) pp. 533-5.

t Arch. Zool. Expe'r., ix. (1908) pp. 195-238 (3 pis).

X Nat. Antarctic Exped. (Zool.) iv. (1908) 5 pp. (1 pi.).

§ C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxv (1908) pp. 287-9.

|| Ann. Nat. Hist., ii. (1908) pp. 401-5 (5 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 4J

(anterior) surfaces of the mandibles, and are similar on the two sides.
In Selenogyra the apparatus consists of a number of rows of bacilla-.
arranged in a somewhat crescentic manner, the bacillse of the outer
rows being the largest. In Euphrictus spinosus g. etsp.n, (which the
author describes) the organ is practically reduced to an oblique row of
live strong spines.

Activities of Araneads. ; - -T. H. Montgomery has made a study
of the age-differences in the snares of two Argiopids, with regard to
the problem as to whether the snare becomes more complex as the
spider grows older. The forms studied were Epeira sclopetaria and
E. marmorea, both of which construct large, vertical, orbicular webs,
which are easily measured. Webs made by immature and by adult
spiders were compared in regard to (1) number of radii, (2) number of
spiral loops, and (3) greatest diameter of the viscid spiral (orb proper).
The age-changes in both species are greatest with regard to the
diameter of the viscid spiral, less with regard to the number of its
loops, and least with regard to the number of radii. The first snare of
the spiderling has all the parts of that of the adult ; but with increasing
age the thread becomes thicker, the web larger, and there are a few more
radii and loops. The differences are due to the increased weight of the
spider and the increased size of the spinning-organs, and the consequent
greater amount of silk. There is nothing either in the making of the
snare or of the cocoon to indicate that the spider learns by experience.

Notes on the senses of touch and sight in snare-making spiders, and
on the cocooning of Loxosceles ri/fescens, are appended.

Development of Spiders.| — P. Wallstabe describes the development
of the form of the body in AgeUna labyrinthka, paying particular
attention to the appendages, the segmentation of the ccelom, the cavity
of the head, and the like.

Hydrachnids from Tiree.}— Wm. Williamson reports Thyas longi-
rostris Piersig and Tiphys Uliaceus Midler, which have not, been recorded
before for Scotland. He also got Hydryphantes ruber De Gecr, which
has been already recorded.

Malleoli of Solpugidse.§— IT. Riihlemann gives an account of the
minute structure of the so-called malleoli or " coxal raquettes " on the
fourth appendage of Solpugidae. He describes the innervation, blood
supply, tracheae, and so on, and then goes into the details of the sens
cells and nerve fibres. The. function of the organs— probably smell
taste— remains undetermined. Their resemblance to the pectines of
scorpions is emphasized.

Podosomata of Temperate Atlantic and Arctic Oceans. j |— A. M.
Norman revives Leach's title Podosomata for the Pycnogonids or

* Amer. Nat., xlii. (1908) pp. 697-709.

t Zool. Jahrb., xxvi. (1908) pp. 683-712 (2 pis. and G figs.).

% Ann. Scot. Nat. Hist. (1908) pp. 161-2.

8 Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xci. (1908) pp. 599-639 (2 pis. and

]| Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxx. (1908) pp. 198-238 (2 pis I.

44 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING 'JO

Pantopoda, and gives an annotated list of those known from the
Temperate Atlantic and Arctic Oceans. He describes Nymplion
stenocJmr sp. n.

«• Crustacea.

Variation of Green Gland of Crayfish.* — E. Hindle describes a
specimen of Astacus fluviatilis that had on eacli side an accessory opening
behind the ordinary one. A duct was found in the posterior papilla, as
well as in the normal position. The variation supports the view that
the green glands constitute a pair of nephridia.

Abnormality in Copulatory Appendage of Crayfish.t — A. Briot
describes an interesting anomaly in a male specimen of Astacus fluviatilis,
which showed a jointed copulatory appendage on the right side. The
outer side of the appendage shows six joints, the inner side only four.
In other words, the jointing was not quite complete, but there was
evidently an attempt at a thoracic limb.

Daily Life of Cambarus bartonius.J — F. E. Chichester has made
a study of the daily life and activities of the crayfish Cambarus bartoniu*.
Two tanks were used, one containing running water with a sloping bank
of sand, the other still water with a raised bank of mud covered with
moss and kept damp. Constant observations were also made in the
open, a strong acetylene light being used at night, and these showed
that the behaviour of the crayfish in the tanks was normal. The
observer finds that crayfish are most active at night, and that there is
marked activity at nightfall and at daybreak. Feeding usually takes
place at night, but may also occur through the day. In spring the
crayfish eats much more often than in winter ; there is apparently --a
consuming hunger after the spring moult. The species in question
prefers fresh animal food to anything else. Feeding is followed by rest,
prolonged periods of feeding being followed by equally prolonged
periods of rest. There is apparently no spontaneous play or exercise,
movements being purely utilitarian.

Tne female aerates her eggs both on land and in water. One female
was observed to climb the mud bank, aerate her eggs for a few
moments, and return to deep water, 84 times in 12 hours. The males
do not distinguish between other males and females, but frequently
grasp other males and attempt to copulate with them.

The crayfish frequently comes into the shallows and raises its
carapace above water. Combing or cleaning movements are executed
by means of the first and second ambulatory appendages, with which
the crayfish scrapes the carapace.

Breeding-periods of Portuguese Crustaceans.§ — Luiz Gonzaga
Do Nascimento discusses the periods of growth and reproduction in
Palinurus vulgaris, Homarus vulgaris, Cancer jnu/urus, Carcinus mamas,
Maja squiii ado, and other well-known Crustaceans.

* Zool. Anzeig., xxxiii. (1908) pp. 584-5 (2 figs.),
t C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxiv. (1908) pp. 1182-3.
% Arner. Nat., xlii. (1908) pp. 710-16.
§ Boll. R. Soc. Espail. Hist. Nat , 1908. pp. 1-S.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 45

New Mediterranean Isopod.*— Emile G. Racovitza describes Ischy-
romme lacazei g.etsp. n., a new Isopod from Banyuls. It belongs to
the family Sphaeroruidae, and is nearly related to Dynamenella Hansen.

Cavernicolous Trichoniscinse.t — E. G. Racovitza continues his
elaborate account of cavernicolous Isopods. He divides the sub-family
Trichoniscinie into two sections: Haplophthalmus, the type of the one,
and Trichoniscus, the type of the other. In the first section he in-
cludes : Haplophthalmus School., Buddelundiella Silvestri, Gyplwniscellus
Verhoeff, with Ghavesia Dollfus incertae sedis. In the second section
he includes : Trichoniscus Brandt (with many sub-genera), and Schiodtia
Budde-Lnnd, with Oligoniscus Dollfus incertas sedis.

Regeneration and Moulting in Gammarus.J — Mary T. Harman
has tried to discover whether there is any relation between degree of
injury and rate of regeneration. In one set of Gammarids the right-
hind leg was removed ; in another set the two pairs of hind legs were
removed. She found that the degree of injury has no effect on the rate
of regeneration or on the length of the moulting period.

Two New Northern AmphipodsJ— T. R. R. Stebbing describes two
blind forms collected by the 'Goldseeker' from considerable depths —
Lepechinella chrysotheras g. et sp. n., ranked in the family Paramphi-
thoidae, although the integument is not indurated, and Rachotropis
palporum sp. n. in the family Eusiridse.

Anaspidida3.|| — G. W. Smith gives a short account of Parariaspides
lacustris g. et sp. n. from the Great Lake of Tasmania, and discusses
the position of the Anaspididtc. He has been aide to study the habits
of Anaspides tasmanice (Thomson) which creeps about at the bottom of
the pools, keeping the body quite flat or unflexed, as in the related
Carboniferous fossils. It seems to be omnivorous, but its chief food is
algal slime. It will probably be exterminated by the introduced English
trout. The exopodites of the thoracic limbs are entirely respiratory.
The male and female openings are in the normal Malacostracan position,
and the large median opening on the ventral surface of the last thoracic
segment in the female is not, as Thomson supposed, the aperture of the
oviducts, but opens into a blind pouch, the spermatheca, where the male
deposits the spermatozoa.

The heart, which is tubular and elongated, stretches through the
whole of the thorax, and passes without a very definite constriction into
the abdomen. There is apparently a single pair of ostia in the third
thoracic segment. The whole structure of the alimentary canal is
peculiar, and not quite like that of any other group of the Crustacea: it
has a simple gastric mill, about thirty glandular caeca, and two unpaired
dorsal casca in the abdominal region.

The nerve-cord consists of eight free thoracic ganglia and six

* Arch. Zool. Exper., ix. (1908) Notes et Revue, No. 3, pp. Ix-lxiv. (2 figs.).

t Tom cit. pp. 239-415 (20 pis.).

X Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci., 1907 pp. 62-75.

§ Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxx (1903) pp. 191-7 (2 pis.).

|l Proc. Rov. Soc, Series B, lxxx. (1908) No. B 543, pp. 465-73 (1 pi. and 6 figs.)

46 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

abdominal ganglia. No antennary glands are present, but there are
maxillary glands — a primitive character. The ovaries and testes
are paired tubes stretching the whole length of the body ; their ducts are
simple tubes not provided with accessory glands. The adult spermatozoa
are filiform, with globular heads and an elongated flagellum.

The pale purple ova, about 1 mm. in diameter, are probably fertilised
as they pass out by spermatozoa which migrate from the spermatheca.
The female deposits and hides her eggs singly, and not agglutinated
together, under stones and among the roots of water-plants, being the
only crustacean (with the possible exception of the peculiar parasitic
Argulidse) that does this.

The new type Paranaspides lives among the rocks and water-weeds
in the littoral zone of the lake ; it has a marked dorsal flexure and a
swimming habit. The mandible bears a four-jointed and distinctly
biramose palp, a characteristic only found elsewhere among Copepods ;
the first thoracic appendage bears on the inner face of the antepenulti-
mate joint a setose lobe used in mastication.

The author agrees with Caiman that the Schizopods should be done
away with as a natural group, and that the Anaspidida? (Anaspides and
Paranaspides) and Koonungidre (Koonuaga) should be placed in a sepa-
rate division, Anaspidacea, apart from Pcracarida and Eucarida.

Antarctic Schizopods.* — W. M. Tattersall reports on thirteen
species collected by the ' Discovery,' ten from strictly antarctic waters,
more than doubling the list of south polar Schizopods. There are no
species common to the fauna of both polar regions, but all the genera,
save one, Antarctomysis, are represented in northern waters, by species
which are quite distinct from their southern allies. It is probable that
what are now known to be bipolar genera and species, will be found to
be cosmopolitan, as has been shown in regard to Lophogt/stcr typicus,
a stock instance of a bipolar form.

Species of Oithona.f— G. P. Farran describes from the west and
south-west of Ireland two new species of Oiihona — 0. dtlanika and
0. pelagka — which he distinguishes from 0. plumifera and 0. setigera.
The distinction between 0. setigera and 0. pelagica lies only in the
presence of clavate or tapered setse on the basals of the swimming feet. '
Possibly this distinction may be regarded by some as insignificant ; but
until it is shown that the two varieties of seta? can occur in specimens
from all localities, it ought not to be disregarded.

Loricula darwini.J — Henry Woodward describes this fine new
species of Cirripede from the Middle Chalk (Turonian), near Rochester,
Kent, which differs from L. pulchella in its much greater size and more
remarkable capitulum, and in certain distinctive features in the form of
the scutum and the latera.

Antarctic Copepods.§ — P. Norris Wolfenden describes a new genus,
Paralabidocera, and seven new species. He finds that the Antarctic

* Nat. Antarctic Exped. (Zool.) iv. (1908) 42 pp. (8 pis.).

t Ann. Nat. Hist., ii. (1908) pp. 498-503.

% Geol. Mag., v. (1908) pp. 491-9 (2 figs.).

§ Nat. Antarctic Exped. (Zooi.) iv. (1908) 44 pp. (7 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, I 47

Copepod fauna is distinct from that of the Arctic seas, and that the
species which are typical of this region, and most numerous, do no!
extend far into the southern Atlantic.

New Parasitic Copepod.* — V. Dogiel describes Entobius loimice
g.etsp.n., an cndoparasitic Copepod in the intestine of a Terebellid
{Loimia medusa ?). The female, 3-5-4 mm. in length, shows a head-
region (with reduced appendages, two pairs of antenna, mandibles, a
pair of maxilla?, and a pair of maxillipedes) ; a thoracic region of four
segments bearing biramose appendages of great simplicity ; and a pos-
terior region without appendages. The male is cpiite like the female,
but smaller. The first larval stage is a metanauplius. As to the
systematic position of this interesting form, it may be referred to the
vicinity of Mytilicola intestinalis.

Nerves of Entomostraca.f — Alfred Fischel has been able to dis-
cover, by intra-vitam staining with alizarin, some new details regarding
the nervous system in Daphnia hngispina (e.g. a network on the posterior
and ventral wall of the brood-capsule) and Bosmiva Irmijicornis (e.g. a
ganglion at the root of the caudal setae).

Optic Organs of Eucalanus.J — C. 0. Esterley has studied the
light-recipient organs of the Copepod, Eucalanus elongatus. The median
eye is of the tripartite type ; each lateral ocellus consists of two basal
plates and of nine retinal cells ; the ventral ocellus contains ten cells,
and is provided with a single basal plate similar to those of the lateral
portions of the eye. The basal plates are products of the retinal cells,
and probably do not contain the pigment of the eye, which is believed
to be in a central cell, upon or in which the three divisions of the
eye rest. The tapetum lies upon the peripheral margins of the central cell.

The retinal cells are provided, in their cytoplasm, with " interior
bodies " or phaosomes, generally of a flattened rod-like form, arranged
in such a way that w T hen sectioned the long axis of their section
corresponds with the long axis of the section of the cell. The axis
cylinders of the optic nerves leave the retinal cells at the basal or deep
ends (those adjoining the pigment-cell), and pass through, or to one
side of the basal plates to enter the central cell. The individual fibres
traverse the central cell toward the brain. There are twenty-eight fi 1 in is in
the optic nerves, the same number as the sum of retinal cells. Probably
one fibre comes from each cell.

The terminations of the nerves in the sensory cells are not in the
form of a " Stiftchensaum." The neurofibrils are rather irregular,
somewhat beaded and branched ; each ends in a club-shaped enlarge-
ment. Consequently the character of the nerve-ending cannot be
regarded as similar to that in the visual cells of worms, as Eesse has
maintained.

The cells of the median eye are not of the inverted type commonly
found among flat worms and Polychtets. Therefore the median ey<
not to be regarded on this character as a structure inherited from worm-

* Zool. Anzeig., xxxiii. (1903) pp. 561-7 (5 figs.).

t Tom. cit., pp. 698-701.

X Bull. Mus. Oomp. Zool. Harvard, liii. (1903) pp. 1-55 (6 pis.),

48 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

like ancestors. The "interior bodies" and neurofibrils seem to be
structurally continuous. Their functional inter-relationship is therefore
probable. The ventral division of the median eye is simply a thickening
of the hypodermis of the body, and has retained, in the adult, its
original position. The lateral divisions of the eye lose all except a very
slight connection with, the hypodermis. The ventral division is in
position epithelial ; the lateral divisions are, in effect, sub-epithelial.
These relations suggest that the lateral ocelli of Eucalanus are homo-
logous with the lens eyes of the Pontellidas. The ventral ocellus in
Eucalanus corresponds with the ventral eye of Pontella.

The organ of Claus is regarded as a bicellular, inverted eye. These
organs are located symmetrically in the brain. Each cell of an organ of
Claus has a basal plate and interior bodies, as in the median eye. The
nerves from the organs of Claus do not pass through the basal plates,
but leave the periphery of the cell at a point which is opposite to the
basal plate. In comparison with the retinal cells, these are consequently
inverted. In position the organs of Claus are sub-epithelial, and since
they lie in the brain as well, they are strictly comparable to the inverted
pigmented ocelli of certain worms. Through the organs of Clans, and
not through the " median eye," relationship with worms may be sought.
Heretofore the median eye has generally been regarded as inverted, and
on this character likened to the eyes of flat worms, which present that
condition. Esterly has shown that the median eye of Eucalanus gives
no support to that view.

Annulata.

Luminescence of Acholoe astericola.* — F. Falger has investigated
this luminous Polynoid that lives on starfishes. The luminous area is
in the elytra, on a crescent-shaped marginal dark border which blackens
with osmic acid. The elytra may shine for 1G hours after their
removal from the worm. An essential condition of the luminescence
is free oxygen ; an oxidation certainly occurs ; and some stimulus
(mechanical, chemical, thermal, or electrical) is always necessary.

Tubes of Chsetopterus.t — Howard E. Enders has made some in-
teresting observations on the formation and enlargement of the tubes of
Cluvtopterus variopedatus. The tubes are formed from mucus which,
hardens into a parchment-like material, moulded by the ventral lip of
the buccal funnel. They are at first tunnels, but afterwards have the
form of a U. They can be enlarged both in length and diameter.

Larva of Lanice conchilega.J — G. A. Elrington gives some account
of the larva of this Polychret, which Giard regarded as an adult and
named Wartelia gonotheca. The so-called brain-cells which Claparede
observed, which were regarded as ova by Giard and Nordenskiold, are
in reality glandular cells. They form a dorsal gland, the secretion of
which is used in forming the transparent tube which the larva inhabits.

* Biol. Centralbl., xxviii. (1908) pp. G41-9.

t Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci., 1907 (1908) pp. 128-33 (2 pis.).

X La Cellule, xxv. (1908) pp. 103-12 (1 pi.)

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 4'. I

The dorsal gland is temporary, and disappears when the larva abandons
its pelagic habits and begins to construct its sandy tube. The larvae
were found to possess three separate pairs of nephridial ducts withoui
nephrostomes, but the relation of these larval nephridia to those of tin-
adult was not determined.

Protandry in Grubea.*^<;. Du Plessis has studied Grubea protan-
ilrka sp. n., one of the Syllids, which is neuter in summer, male in
-autumn and winter, and female in spring. In April, after the b
have disappeared, there is a short period during which there are ripe
spermatozoa in the testicular segments, while ova are being formed in
all the posterior segments.

Polyspermy in Protula meilhaci.t — A. Soulier finds that poly-
spermy is not infrequent in this Annelid ; several spermatozoa unite with
the female pronucleus, acting as kinetic centres and giving rise to
multipolar figures. The chromatin of the ovum is distributed in frag-
ments in the cytoplasm. Eggs that exhibit this degenerate. Inartificial
fertilisation all the eggs may fall victims to polyspermy. Lack of oxygen
seems to favour it.

Giant Nerve-cells of Halla.t — J. H. Ashworth describes the giant
cells which occur in segmental couples in each of the anterior ganglia
of Holla parthmopeia. Each giant fibre, after leaving the giant cell
from which it arises, crosses the cord to the opposite side, turns gradually
towards the middle line of the cord, and runs posteriorly. The neuro-
fibrillar network in the giant cell is divisible into a perinuclear, situated
at the margin of the perinuclear zone, and a more extensive, wider
meshed, and generally more slender-stranded network in the general
protoplasm. In Aglaurides fulgida similar giant cells and fibres are
found.

Regeneration in Saccocirrus.§— Aug. Michel describes the growth
of an anterior bud from the injured head-end of the primitive Annelid,
Saccocirrus papillocercus. The bud showed eyes and antenna?, and hints
of six segments. After two weeks there was a regulative reduction of
antennae and segments, and a ganglionic rudiment appeared.

Regeneration in Spirographs spallanzani.|| — P. Ivanov found
that pieces of the abdominal region, or of the abdominal and thoracic
regions together, regenerated the missing ends. At the posterior end a
pvgidium grows which gives rise to a large number of new abdominal
segments. At the anterior end a primordium is formed which differ-
entiates into four segments : the mouth-segment, the collar-segment, and
the two first setiferous segments (making the prothoracic region in all i.
By a partial change in the six most anterior of the old segments, the
posterior thoracic region is formed.

The results go to show that the prothoracic segments of the sedentary

* Rev. Suisse Zool., xvi. (1908) pp. 321-8 (1 pi.).

t Arch. Zool. Exper., ix. (1908) Notes et Revue, No. 3, pp. lm.-lv.

% Proc. Roy. Soc., Series B, lxx. (1903) No. B 543, pp. 463-4.

§ Comptes Rendus, cxlvii. (1908) pp. 1005-6.

|1 Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xci. (1903) pp. 511-58 (3 pis. and 2 figs.).

Feb. 17th, 1909 E

50 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Polychsets correspond to the head-segments of other Polychtets. The
post-thoracic segments represent differentiated abdominal segments or
ordinary trunk segments.

Antarctic Species of Phascolosoma.* — W. F. Lanchester describes
P. socium sp. n., a Sipunculid presenting in the main the chief features
of the P. margaritaceum group.

New Deep-sea Echiurid.f — Iwaji Ikeda describes Protobonellia
mitsulcurii g. et sp. n., from Sagami Bay. The proboscis is long and
tubular, not bifid. The body has two distinct ventral hooks, without
anal spine. There is a single genital duct with a long-stalked and
fimbriated funnel. The anal glands are once branched before ending
in ciliated funnels. The eggs have a nutritive cell-mass, appearing, as
in Bonellia, like a cone at one pole. The alimentary canal and blood-
vessels are well developed. The new genus is nearly related to Bonellia,
but more primitive.

Penis of Criodrilini.l — Luigi Cognetti de Martiis gives a detailed
account of the so-called "penis" in Alma and Criodrilus, devoting
particular attention to the vascular supply and the glandular differentia-
tion. He does not think that the penis has anything special to do with
respiration (as has been suggested), but that is specialised in connection
with copulation, and, perhaps, with the formation of the envelope of the
spermatophores.

New Leech. § — Ernest E. Hemingway describes Placobdella pediculata
sp. n . from the isthmus or shoulder of the sheepshead (Aplorfiaotus
grunniens) in Lake Pepin, Minnesota. , As the attachment continues,
the inflamed tissues of the host grow up like a collar, and close in
around the body of the leech in front of the collar. The most striking
external peculiarity is the attenuation of the posterior somites to form a
narrow pedicel just in front of the posterior sucker, which consequently
stands out freely in a most characteristic manner.

New Myzo3toinum.|] — Rudolf Ritter von Stummer-Traunfels
describes a new species of Myzostomum (M. antarcticum) on Antedon
adriani, a new Crinoid found by the ' Discovery ' in the Antarctic. He
also reports from the same host another species, M. cysticolum, which
has been previously obtained in Ross's Sea in the Antarctic, off the east
coast of Japan, and in the Tropical West Atlantic — a fine instance of
wide distribution, which finds explanation in the antiquity of the group
and in the uniformity of deep-water conditions. The southern range of
the Myzostomidas has been extended by these discoveries.

Nematohelminthes.

Notes 021 Nematodes. IF — Fayet and Moreau Q-ive an account of
Filaria initials (discovered in 1868 by Rivolta), which occurs in the

Nat. Antarctic Exped. (Zool.) iv. (1908) 6 pp.

Armot. Zcol. Japon, vi. (1908) pp. 259-65 (4 figs.).

Atti R. Accad. Sci. Torino, xliii. (1908) pp. 1122-37(1 pi. and 1 fig.).
§ Amer. iNat., xlii. (1908) pp. 527-32 (3 figs.).
II Nat. Antarctic Exped. (Zool.), iv. (1908) 26 pp. (1 pi.).
i C.R. Foe. Biol. Paris, lxiv. (1908) pp. 10-11.

+

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 51

summer sores of horses. It is a minute (2 • 5-3 ■ 5 mm. ) Nematode, of a
silvery white colour, very refractive, and finely striated Itoth longi-
tudinally and transversely.

Nervous System of Ascaris.*— R. Goldschmidt has studied this in
detail in Ascaris lumbricoides and A. megaloc&phaXa. The ganglia in-
clude various types of cells— central cells, commissural cells, sensory cells.
The following ganglia are distinguishable : cephalic ventral, cephalic
dorsal, cephalic subdorsals, cephalic internal laterals, cephalic internal
posterior laterals, cephalic external anterior laterals, cephalic external
median laterals, cephalic external posterior laterals, commissurals, those
of the subdorsal and subventral papillary nerves, and of the lateral
papillary nerves. The author goes on to the nerves and their chief
commissure the complex nerve ring. His analysis is so detailed that
he can literally follow out every nerve fibre in the anterior end of the
Ascarid.

Cystidicola farionis.j — A. E. Shipley has some notes on this thread-
worm which lives in the swim-bladder of the trout, and R. T. LeiperJ
describes its structure. The eggs have thick shells with a curious tuft
of exceedingly delicate filaments, two or three in number, attached to
a small cuticular knob at each pole.

Platyh.elminth.es.

Crystalloids in Epithelial Cells of PlanariansJ — H. Sabussow
describes peculiar crystalloids in the external epithelium of the penis in
Sorocelis pardalina Grube and in Planaria armata Sab. In the former
they are 4- or G-sided plates and prismatic forms ; in the latter they arc
tetrahedral. They are probably albuminoid. Perhaps they serve the
same purpose as the chitinous terminal pieces in some Turbellarians.

History of Nuclei of Yolk-cells in Rhabdoco3lids.||— Paul Hallez
studied this in Paravortex. He finds that after the formation of the
cocoon the lecithogenous cells, which number about a hundred, become
fluid, and the ectolecithin consists of a protoplasmic mass with the nuclei
and ergastoplasmic granules of the lecithogenous cells. The ergasto-
plasm disappears gradually as the embryos develop and some of the nuclei
degenerate. Most of them, however, re-awaken after a period of in-
activity and multiply by direct division. The nuclei along with pari of
the ectolecithin form the greater part of the epidermis and the intestinal
syncytium.

Cestode Cysts in Flesh of Butterfish.1i— Edwin Linton has ade
a study of the cysts of Otobothrium crenacolle, frequent in the flesh of
the butterfish (Poronotus triacanthm). He found the adult some . - ars

* Zeitschr. wiss. Zool., xc. (1908) pp. 73-136 (3 pis. and 22 figs.).

* Parasitology, i. No. 2 (1908) pp. 190-2. % Tom. cit,, pp. 193-4.
§ Zool. Anzeig., xxxiii. (1908) pp. 537-47 (6 figs.).

ij Comptes Rendus, cxlvii. (1908) pp. 390-1.
\ Bull. Bureau of Fisheries, Washington, xxvi. (1907); p. 111-32 (2 pis.).

E 2

52 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

ago in the spiral valve of the hammerhead shark (Sphyrna sygcena)
which eats the Teleosts. Practical considerations are discussed at
some length.

Egg-making in a Trematode.* — Edwin Linton gives a vivid de-
scription of the process of egg-making in Epibdella bumpusii, an
ectoparasite of the sting-ray (Basi/atis centrura). A mass of yolk leaves
the yolk-reservoir ; as it passes the germ-duct a germ is drawn out by
the suction ; yolk-mass and germ together pass along the common duct
to the ootype : an egg is moulded into a tetrahedral shape by a kind of
hammering action of the walls of the ootype, and a shell is formed from
substance secreted by the shell-forming gland ; a slowing-up of the
action of the ootype is followed by the appearance of a minute cluster of
sperms in the common duct ; this cluster of sperms comes from the
seminal duct, and passes along the common duct to the ootype ; a
momentary pause marks the arrival of the sperm at the ootype ; powerful
contractions of the walls of the ootype eject the egg from the uterus
into the water.

Incertae Sedis.

Nutritive Process in Tornaria.f — A. T. Masterman finds that
ingestion is effected by ciliary currents, the extra-stomial ingestion
being due to the circum-oral band and the ciliated walls of the vestibule,
the intra-stomial ingestion being effected by the cilia lining the pharynx.
The water of the ciliary currents is probably returned along the lateral
grooves of the pharynx, and then by the corners of the mouth to the
exterior. Digestion is intra-cellular in the stomach (digestive area), but
may also be inter-cellular — in the stomach, and in the intestine also.
Currents in the stomach and intestine are ciliary. The pylorus and
anus are worked by the rhythmic contractility of the surrounding walls.

Swimming Habit of Japanese Enteropneust. J — Iwaji Ikeda

observed in the Inland Sea, 50 miles east of Hiroshima, a sheet of
swarming Enteropneusts (Glandiccps haclcsii Marion), about a hundred
in a cubic foot, on an average about 8 cm. in length. The swarming on
the surface is said by the fishermen to occur on calm nights from
August to the beginning of September, but not every year. The post-
hepatic region is flattened, and the gut contained miicro-organisms
without sand. This species is probably a swimmer and a creeper, but
not a burrower. Perhaps it comes to the surface after micro-plankton,
for the swarming does not seem to have to do with sexual maturity.

New. Genus of Fresh-water Bryozoa from Japan. § — Asajiro Oka
describes Stephanella Tiina g. et sp. n, which seems to be referable to the
Plumatellidae. There is a thin, branched, creeping stolon ; the zocecia
are cylindrical and upright ; the ectocyst is gelatinous and transparent ;
there is an epistome ; the lophophore has very short arms ; there are

* Biol. Bull., xiv. (1908) .pp. 19-2G (5 figs.).

t Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., lii. (1908) pp. 481-93 (1 p\).

% Armot. Zool. Japon., vi. (1908) pp. 255-7.

§ Tom. cit., pp. 277-85 (1 pi.).

s

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 53

36-40 tentacles, the crown is almost funnel-shaped, with an inturning ai
the anal side ; the statoblasts are flat, circular, with an annular float, and
no marginal spines.

Rotifera.

Philodina macrostyla and its Allies.* — James Murray gives a
summary of all that is known of this interesting but difficult group,
notable for the extreme variability of some of the species. Seven for
and their varieties are figured.

Notommata (Copeus) pseudocerberus sp. n.f — P. de Beauchamp,
having previously described as X. cerierus, a species which lie now finds
to be really new, gives a detailed account of the differences betwe* a
these two closely allied forms.

Gelatinous Envelops in Plankton Rotifers.:]: -- R. Lauterborn
calls attention to the fact that Rattulus cylindricus Imhof (Masti-
gocerca set if ere Lauterborn), is surrounded by a large gelatinous
envelope, which is so transparent as to be invisible until brought out by
mixing Indian ink with the water. Of other free-swimming Rotifers
the author has found only Hudsondla pigmcea to have a similar, but
very thin gelatinous envelope, which swells up very greatly when the
animal dies or is killed and stained. We may add that Notops hyptopus
has a like envelope.

Desiccation of Rotifers. § — I). D. Whitney finds that out of forty-
five different species belonging to seventeen families of free-swimming
Rotifers, only two, Philodina roseola and P. citrina could successfully
withstand desiccation and resume normal activities when again placed
in water. The author concludes that it seems probable that desiccation
of the adult Rotifers, followed by revival, is not of widespread occur-
rence in the group, and is not the means resorted to by most species for
tiding over unfavourable periods. Survival is due in most cases to the
winter eo-o- s which can withstand both desiccation and low temperature.

Formation of New Colonies of Megalotrocha alboflavicans.[|—
Frank M. Surface gives a very interesting account of the formation of
new colonies of this Rotifer, showing quite complex instincts and
reactions to stimuli. The main features are as follows. When first
hatched from the eggs the young have a ciliated foot and two eyes and
are free-swimming^ but do not leave the colony singly. These indi-
viduals come together into a swimming ball, which reacts positively to
lisjht. Later, under certain conditions, particularly absence of light
stimulus, the ball breaks up into free individuals again. These then
aggregate themselves into a permanent fixed colony in winch -
animals spend the remainder of their lives, having lost the two eyi s and
the circlet of cilia at the foot. In this colony formation the mucus-
like secretion of the foot-gland plays an essential part.

* Journ. Quekett Micr. Club., ser. 2, x. (190S) pp. 207-26 (3 pis.).

t Zool. Anzeig., xxxiii. ( 1908) pp. 399-403.

J Tom. cit., pp. 580-4. ' § Amer. Nat., xlii. (1908) pp. 665-- 1.

II Biol. Bull. Univ. Pennsylvania, xi. (1906) pp. 182-92.

54 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Monograph of the Melicertidse.* — Stanislav Hlava, whilst de-
scribing and figuring more fully the various species of this family
that have been found in Bohemia, gives an account of all the known
species. No new species are described, but some ancient names have
been revived which appear to have the merit of priority according to
modern rules.

Rotifera of the Exeter District.! — John Stevens gives a list of
171 species of Rotifera observed by him in the neighbourhood of
Exeter, including some rare species such as Dinops longipes, Micrtcodon
clavus, and Copeus spicatus. The author also records observations,
showing that Proales decipiens enters the tubes of Stephanoceros eich-
Jiorni, devours the occupant, including the eggs, and then lays its own
eggs in the empty case, all of which occupies about sixty hours, and
then departs, leaving its brood to take care of itself.

Echinoderaia.

Antarctic Echinoderms.J— F. Jeffrey Bell reports on the ' Discovery '
collection, and describes a number of new species — Pseudopsolus ferrari,
Antedon adriani, Asterias longstaffi, Heuresaster hodgsoni g. n., Pmta-
gonaster incertus, Ophiura lioehleri. He calls attention to the wide
range of variation in Ophiozona incrmis and in Cycethra verrucosa. The
' Discovery,' like the ' Gauss,' was fortunate in re-discovering the interest-
ing Crinoid Promachocrinus, which was one of the prizes of the voyage
of the ' Challenger.'

Echinoderm. Larvse from the Antarctic^ — E. W. MacBride and
J. C. Simpson report on two Plutei (of a sea-urchin and an Ophiuroid)
— which are probably the first free-SAvimming Echinoderm larvae found
within the Antarctic circle, on the brood-pouch and embryos of Cum-
maria crocea, and on the early stages of Asterias orandti.

Effect of Alkaloids on Early Development of Sea-urchin. |j
S. Morgulis finds that alkaloids, such as atropine, pilocarpine, morphine,
digitaline, strychnine, or quinine, when present in very small quantities
in the sea-water, have no influence on the developing eggs of To.ro-
pneustes variegatus, but begin to act when they approach a certain con-
centration. Pilocarpine does not hasten the development, and larvae
developing in pilocarpine solutions are either of the normal size or a little
smaller. Pilocarpine and atropine mixed in various proportions do not
neutralise each other's action, but the depressing effect predominates.

Specie3 of Holothuria Studied Biometrically.lf — C. L. Edwards

expounds the use of biometrical methods in taxonomy, and gives the
following illustration. A common Florida-Caribbean Holothurian was
described in 1851 by Pourtales as Holothuria floridana. In 1868

* Arch. Natur. Land. Bohmen, xiii. (1908) pp. 1-83.
t Proc. College Field Club, Exeter, 1907, pp. 30-52.
% Nat. Antarctic Exped.' (Zool.) iv. (1908) 16 pp. (5 pis.).
§ Tom. cit., 9 pp. (1 pi.).

|| Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., xliv. (1908) pp. 133-46.
i Amer. Nat., xlii. (1908) pp. 537-40.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 55

Semper considered this identical with //. atra .lager (1833) from the
Celebes. All authors followed Semper till 1905. In the meantime,
Ludwig, in 188:3, recognised a species in the West Indies different from
the Indo-Pacific form, and failing to identify it with H. floridana
Pourtales, created a new species, //. mexkana. The same error was
repeated by Theel, in 1886, in making his H. africana.

Edwards obtained 138 specimens, and submitted every important
character to statistical study. The result is that H. floridana Pourtales
is re-established as a valid species, with H. mexicana Ludwig and
H. africana Theel as synonyms.

Sudanese Crinoids.* — H. C. Chadwick reports on six species of
Antedon collected by Cyril Crossland in the Sudanese Red Sea.
None is new, but only two of them have been previously recorded from
the Red Sea.

Ecology of Recent Crinoids.j — A. H. Clark takes a survey of the
recorded data in regard to recent Crinoids, with a view to suggesting
lines of work which may throw light on the problem of the inter-relation
of the Crinoids and the other classes of marine Invertebrates, and on
the relation of the Crinoids to marine conditions in general. An
analysis of the conditions of the localities in which the large forms
occur, shows that the only factor common to them all is a very abundant
food supply. In regard to colour the data seem to show that the
smaller staiked forms are invariably and unchangeably yellow, and this
colour may be, as in the case of parrots among birds, equivalent to a
lack of colour. Black is added to the basic colour of Comatulids at all
depths, and appears to denote age. Blue is added apparently only
within 200 fathoms of the surface. The mosaic forms are all littoral.
or shallow-water types. The same species may show different colours
according to the bottom on which it occurs, and according to the depth
of the water. There is, apparently, a close connection between colour
and amount of illumination, the blue increasing with the light. Crinoids
are too calcareous to be desirable as food, and it is possible that their
brilliant colouring is of advantage in attracting small organisms.

Ccelentera.

Antarctic Sea- Anemones.}— Joseph A. Clubb reports on eight
species collected by the ' Discovery.' Two are new—Paractis polaris
and Ci/stiactis antarctica. In Or i brum octoradiata (Carlgren) there are
sixteen brood-pouches, which arise as invaginations of the three layers
of the body-wall. Each has an external pore, and usually contains two
embryos.

Stinging by Jellynsh.§— E. H. H. Old reports on several case -
the Philippines of unusual symptoms caused by contact with some
unknown kind of jellyfish. The unknown irritant or poison brings

* Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxxi. (190S) pp. 44-7.

f Amer. Nat., xlii. (1908) pp. 710-26.

- Nat. Antarctic Exped. (Zool.) iv. (1908) 12 pp. (3 pis.).

§ Philippine Journ. Sci., iii. (1908) pp. 329-33.

5G SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

about hysterical conditions, with incessant cough, restlessness, pr in„
nausea, etc. Alkaline solution was used locally, and morphine sulphate
hypodermically.

New Chrysogorgids.* — W. Kukenthal describes five new species
and a new variety of Chrysogorgia, collected by the German Deep Sea
Expedition and by Dr. Doflein. The genus has an abyssal distribution
in the warmer parts of the Pacific, Indian, and Atlantic Oceans.

Sudanese Alcyonarians.f — J. Arthur Thomson and James M.
McQueen report on a collection of Alcyonarians made by Cyril
Grassland in the Sudanese Bed Sea. There are twenty-six species, of
which the following are new : Lithophgtani crosslandi, L. macrospicu-
latum, Spongodes sues/ana, S. pharonis, and Melitodes splendens. The
most interesting species, however, arc Clathraria rubrinodis Gray, and
C. acuta, striking forms which do not seem to have been noticed since
Gray described them in general terms many years ago. A provisional
list is given of the known Red Sea Alcyonarians.

Revision of the Family Melitodidse.J — W. Kukenthal arranges
the genera of this Alcyonarian family in the following scheme : —

I. Polyps with projecting calyces.

A. Branching from the nodes, terminal twigs sometimes from

the internodes.
i. Cortical spicules — spindles or spinose clubs.

a. Nodes and internodes penetrated by endodermal

longitudinal canals. Polyps predominantly on
one surface of the branches.

1. Genus Melitodes Verrill.

b. No endodermal canals in the internodes. Polyps

distant and biserial.

2. Genus Acabaria Gray.
ii. Cortical spicules — also foliate clubs.

3. Genus Mopsella Gray.

iii. The foliate clubs modified into rounded bodies.

4. Genus Wrightella Gray.

B. Branching from the internodes.

5. Genus Parisis Verrill.
II. Polyps without projecting calyces.

G. Genus Clathraria Gray.

Kukenthal describes new species of Melitodes (4), Acabaria (7),
Mopsella (?>), Wrightella (1), and Clathraria (2). His diagnosis of
Clathraria does not seem to us to apply very satisfactorily to the two
species on which Gray established the genus.

Variation in Plumularia.§ — S. Motz-Kossowska finds that Plumu-
laria lichtenstemi Mark. Turn, may give rise to forms which have been
referred to the genera A ntenella and Polypi umaria, and to species like

* Zool. Anzeig., xxxiii. (1908) pp. 704-8.

t Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxxi. (1908) pp. 48-75 (4 pis. and 4 figs.).

1 Zool. Anzeig., xxxiii. (190S) pp. 189-201.

§ Arch. Zool. Exper., ix. (1908) Notes et Revue, No. 3, -np. lv.-lix. (3 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 57

P. secundaria. It gives rise to varieties which seem to be due to
spontaneous variations, but which in certain conditions may become
fixed and form " good species."

Sudanese Hydroids.* — Laura Roscoe Thornely reports on a colled ion
of eighteen species made by Cyril Crossland, including the following
new forms: Perigonimus vagans, Lovenella comtgata, and Ceratdla
crosslandi (?). The last is an interesting form, 9 in. high by 12 in.
wide, much branched, here and there anastomosing, with the hydrophore
reduced to two wing-like pointed processes, one on either side of the
aperture.

Distribution of Diphyes arctica.f — Hjalmar Broch lias some notes
on the North Sea Siphonophora — Muggicea atlantica Cunningham,
Galeolaria Inhibit M. Sars, Diphyes truncala M. Sars, and I), arctica Chun.
The last mentioned is an arctic species which occurs in the deep parts of
the North Sea, sporadically off the west coast of Norway, frequently in
the deep waters of the Skagerrak.

Transverse Division in Hydra. % — W. Koelitz has observed on many
occasions the transverse division of normal and healthy specimens of
Hydra viridis, H.fnsca, and H. (/risen, and regards it as an ordinary
mode of multiplication. In a few days the two halves grow into intact
polyps.

Porifera.

Antarctic Calcarea.§— C. F. Jenkin reports on the 'Discovery'
collection of Calcareous Sponges, which contains much that is new.
He establishes a new family Chiphoridre with two new genera Streptoconus
and Hypodktyon, and another new family Staurorrhaphidse with two
new genera Achramorpha and Megapogon, and the sub-genus Grantiopsis.
Two other new genera are established — Teuihrenodes among the
Sycettidre, and Dermatreton among the Grantiidse.

Antarctic Sponges. || — R. Kirkpatrick reports on the ' Discovery '
collection of Tetractinellids (four species of Graniella and Ginachyra),
and Monaxonellids (twenty-two new species and four new genera). He
describes some new and interesting forms of spicules, e.g. the shuttle-
shaped chelte of the new Mycaline genus Gercidochela. Some of the
records of antarctic distribution are striking, e.g. Sphcerotylus capitatus
( Vosmaer), an arctic form which has not been obtained from any
intermediate station; Stylocordyla boreal is (Loven), recorded from the
North Sea, which has been, found in several intermediate localities;
Esperiopsis villosa Carter, a northern form, not recorded from any
intermediate station except deep-water off the Azores.

New Genera of Pharetronid Sponges.1T — R. Kirkpatrick describes
Hinchinella lamellosa g. etsp.n. and Merlin normani g. etsp.n. The

* Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxxi. (1908) pp. 80-5 (1 pi.).
t Arkiv Zool., iv. (1908) No. 20, 6 pp.
: Zool. Anzeig., xxxiii. (1908) pp. 529-36 (5 figs.).
§ Nat. Antarctic Exped. (Zool.) iv. (1908) 49 pp. (12 pis.).
II Tom. cit., 5G pp. (19 pis.),
f Ann. Nat. Hist., ii. (1908) pp. 503-1* (3 pis.).

58 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

former is a millepore-like form, obtained by the ' Challenger' off Api,
New Hebrides ; the other formed thin crusts on debris collected near
Madeira.

The genus Minchinella is thus defined : lamellar Lithoninse, with
pore-chimneys on one side and oscular chimneys on the other, each with
a skeleton of monaxons, triradiates, and quadriradiates ; main skeletal
framework formed of large quadriradiates cemented together. Canal
system leuconoid.

For Merlia a new sub-family (Merlinse) is proposed : — Pharetronidse,
in which the solid skeletal framework is constructed of vertical main
beams of fibrillar cement, from each of which there radiate three vertical
flanges to meet similar flanges from other columns, so as to form
cylindrical tubes ; the latter are partitioned off by horizontal floors, a
honeycomb-like structure resulting. Solid framework without axial core
of spicules. In Lithoninae the framework is constructed on the " beton
arrne " principle ; in Merlinse the " beton " is not " arine," the axial
stiffening of spicules being dispensed with. In Merlia the dermal
membrane is supported by tufts of slender tyles and with raphides, and
tuning-fork spicules are present.

Fresh-water Sponges in Scotland." — X. Annandale gives descrip-
tive notes on Spongilla lacustris and TaMla pennsglvanka, the only two
species that he is sure of as occurring in Scotland.

Protozoa.

New Rhizopods. f— E. Penard describes three new species from
Swiss lakes — Difflvgia histrio, Cyphoderia myosurus, Heliopera sabavda,
Difflugia truncata % from a marsh near Geneva, which, when it encysts,
forms a diaphragm pierced in the middle and raised on a collaret.

Foraminifera from Coast of Delos.§ — H. Sidebottom reports on
recent Foraminifera from Delos, and describes two new species of
SpirilUna and two of Discorbina.

Peridinians of the Bay of Hougue.||— E. Faure-Fremiet gives a
descriptive account of this part of the plankton, establishing "several
new species— Glenodinium (1), Peridinium (5), a genus which he divides
up into groups of species, and Gonyaulax (1). He also deals with some
of the Ciliata, including Amphorellajorgenscni sp. n.

New Flagellate in Congo Flies. IF— E. Roubaud found in the gut
of Pycnoxoma putorium a Flagellate which he regards as a new species
of Leptomonas (L. miraUlis). It occurs in three forms : (1) giant forms
(often over 200 //,), drawn out posteriorly into a long filament ; (2) minute
young forms ; and (3) trypanosome-like forms.

* Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxx. (1908) pp. 2-14-50.
t Rev. Suisse Zool., xvi. (1908) pp. 441-71 (1 pi.).
I Tom. cit., pp. 472-82 (1 pi.).

§ Mem. and Proc. Manchester Lit. and Phil. Soc. lii. (1908) pp. 1-28 (5 pis.).
!| Ann. Sci. Nat. (Zool.) vii. (1908) pp. 209-40 (2 pis. and 22 figs.).
t C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxiv. (1908) pp. 1106-8 (11 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 59

Life-history of Glaucoma scintillans.* — S. Prowazek describes the
complex process of division, the occurrence of conjugation, the formal ion
of three reduction-nuclei, and other events. After conjugation there is
at first very slow multiplication, and many die. Conjugation does not
increase the activity of the process of division, but regulates the internal
economy of the cell.

Trypanosoma congolense.t — A. Laveran gives an account of this
species, found by Broden in the Congo Free State-in ass. sheep, cattle
and dromedaries. It is marked by its minute size and by the absence of
a free portion of the flagelluin. It comes nearest T. dimorphon, from
which Laveran distinguishes it.

Alleged Autogamy of Bodo lacertae.J — C. C. Dobell has studied
organisms in the frog which are closely similar to stages in the life-cycle
of Bodo lacertCB, as described by Prowazek. But they are really yeasts,
which have been mistakenly included in accounts of the life-cycle of
Bodo, and have given basis to the conclusion that autogamy and
chromidia occur in this organism. This, according to the author, is still
imp ro ven.

New Schizogregarine from an Ascidian.§ — Annie Porter describes
M&rogregarina amaroucii g. et sp. n., parasitic in the alimentary tract of
a compound Ascidian, belonging to the genus Amaroucium. The tro-
phozoite is non-septate, ovoid, possessing a small definite epimerite
which is shaped like the head of a lance. Myonemes are present
anteriorly. Schizogony is intra-epithelial, the schizonts being numer-
ous, but" the number of merozoites produced by each are relative!}
small. Sporogony occurs in the lumen of the gut, the spores being
octozoic.

* Zool. Anzeig., xxxiii. (1908) pp. 277-9 (8 figs.).

t Ami. lust. Pasteur, xxii. (1908) pp. 833-5 (3 figs.).

X Biol. Centralbl., xxviii. (1908) pp. 548-55 (7 figs.).

§ Arch. Zool. Exper. ix. (1908) Notes et Revue, No. 2, pp. xliv.-vm.

60 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

BOTANY.

GENERAL,

Including the Anatomy and Physiology of Seed Plants.

Cytology,
including- Cell-Contents.

Aleurone Grains.* — J. Beauverie has studied aleurone grains with
special reference to the nitrogenous substratum of the mineral salts of
the globoids. The author has proved that the substance of the globoids
can exist apart from aleurone grains in the integuments and other
tissues of maturating seeds, and in some cases he has found granules of
the same substance in the cytoplasm and between the cells. The experi-
ments seem to show that these granules are of the same nature as the
metachromatic corpuscles found in the lower animals, and belong to the
class of substances known as volutins, which are akin to fats, hydro-
carbons, etc., but contain nitrogen and phosphorus in addition to carbon,
hydrogen, and oxygen. Thus it would appear that the present work
confirms the hypothesis which regards the nitrogenous substance of
globoids as reserve food-materials.

Structure and Development.
Vegetative.

Seedling- of Ceratozamia.t — H. A. Dorety has studied the seedling
anatomy of Ceratozamia, and her conclusions are as. follows. Ceratozamia
has two cotyledons, one of which aborts. The persisting cotyledon has
many bundles, and is often lobed at the apex. Mesarch wood is found in
the lower portion, and exarch wood in the upper part. Mucilage-ducts
are often found between the bundles. The wood of the leaf-traces is
endarch in the central cylinder, but is mesarch from the leaf-base out-
wards. The primary portion of the vascular cylinder may be a protostele.
Several layers of extrafascicular cambium are present, but in two years
there is only a very slight trace of anomalous thickening. The root,
which is of late development, has a complete ring of cambium around
its xylem.

Secretory System of Ginkgo.:!: — A. Sprecher has examined the root,
stem, petiole, leaves, bracts and floral axes of Ginkgo in order to investi-
gate the origin of the secretory system. The root has no secretory cells,
but the author finds secretory sacs in the pith and primary cortex of the
stem and petioles, and also in the leaves and older female floral axes.
The largest sacs are developed in the bases of the young ovules and
stamens. There are no secretory canals such as occur in other Conifers,
but the whole system appears to resemble that of the MarattiaceaB in its

* Ann. Sci. Nat., ser. 9, viii. (190S) pp. 147-75 (2 pis.),
t Bot. Gaz., xlvi. (1908) pp. 203-20 (5 pis. and 2 figs.).
% Beih. Bot. Centralbl., xxiv. (1908) pp. 63-82 (2 pis. and 19 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC Gl

mode of formation. The author still maintains his opinion that the
■secretory cells of Ginkgo are mainly, if not entirely, lysigenous in origin.

Anatomy of Embryo of Cannaceae and Musaceae.* — C. L. Gatin
lias studied the embryology and germination of the Cannaceae and
Musacese, and finds that in both cases the embryos are remarkable for
their advanced state of differentiation. Their radicle is less endogenous
than that of the palms, being least so in Strelitzia, where the piliferous
layer is continuous with the subepidermal layer of the embryo. Heli-
conia, however, has a very poorly differentiated embryo, and the central
cylinder is differentiated before other parts of the radicle, thus approach-
ing the palms more nearly than the other Musaceos. The cotyledon is
much larger than in the palms owing to the greater size of the individual
cells. There are two phases in germination : (1) the elongation of the
cotyledon ; (2) germination proper. The arrangement of the cotyle-
donary bundles does not favour the views of those writers who regard
the single cotyledon as derived from the fusion of two ancestral
cotyledons.

Adventitious Roots of Dicotyledons. f — Dr. Noll contributes a
short note upon the adventitious root-system of Dicotyledons. Tin:
theory which regards the acropetal succession of rootlets as the rule
among Dicotyledons, appears to be untenable in the light of the present
work. The presence of an adventitious root-system has been proved
to exist in Helianthus, Ricinus, Cucurbita, and the female plant of
Cannabis, and the author is of the opinion that an adventitious root-
system may be as readily developed among Dicotyledons as among
Monocotyledons when the disproportion between the aerial portions of
the plant and its root-system renders such development necessary, but
that while in Monocotyledons the adventitious root-system will be in
connection with the growing stem, in Dicotyledons it will be connected
•with the root.

Leaf-structure of Sand-dune Plants of Bermuda.^— J. W. Harsh-
berger describes the sand-dune plants of Bermuda, with special reference
to the modification of leaf -structure. The most important ecological
factor appears to be the bright illumination from above, and the reflec-
tion of light from the white sand below, and the light stimuli have
produced changes in both the form and the structure of the leaves. The
most important modifications include thick cuticle in Nerium Oleander,
Conocarpus, etc.; thick epidermis in Ganavalia, Dodoncea, Ipomoca pes-
caprce, etc. ; two or three epidermal layers in Conocarpus, ' 'roton, etc ;
several rows of palisade-cells in Passijtora, Conocarpus, etc.; depressed
stomata in Sisyrinchium, Sesuvium, etc. ; stomata in pits in Lantana
and Nerium ; succulent leaf in Sesuvium i Conocarpus, etc ; hairy leal
in Borrichia, Toumefortia, etc.; varnished leaf in Dodoncea-, erect
position of leaf in Stenotaphrum, etc. ; overlapping leaves in Euphorbia,
•etc.; latex-tissue in Euphorbia >,; gum-resin in Conocarpus; crystals in
Croton, etc. ; modification of mesophyll in many genera, including
Ipomoca, Passiflora, Conocarpus, etc.

* Ann. Sci. Nat., ser. 9, viii. (1908) pp. 113-46 (2 pis. and 34 figs.).

t S.B. Natur. Ver. Rheinl.. ii. (1907) pp. 54-7.

t Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. xlvii. (1908) pp. 97-110 (3 pis.).

G2 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Anatomy of the Geraniacese.* — A. Legault has studied the anatomy
of the vegetative organs of the Geraniaceae, and finds that they exhibit
certain peculiarities which confirm the classification based upon the
morphology of the fruit and flower, and even in some cases are sufficient
of themselves for identification of a given plant. Moreover, in certain
instances, affinities are discovered which are not indicated by the
external morphology — e.g. the anatomy of Monsonia indicates a closer
relationship between that genus and Pelargonium than between it and
Erodium. The present paper gives strong support to the opinion that
classification should be based not merely upon external morphology, but
also upon the characters of the internal structure.

Reproductive.

Embryology of Gnetum.f — J. M. Coulter has studied the embryo-
sac and embryo of Gnetum gnemon with the following results. The
" antipodal tissue " proves to be nutritive tissue formed from the
nucellus below the embryo-sac. Embryo-formation starts with the
elongation of the fertilised egg, accompanied by free nuclear divisions
and wall-formation, which continues until a multicellular embryo is
formed. The endosperm encroaches irregularly upon the nuclear beak.
There are 12-24 chromosomes. The inner integument of the ovule
corresponds to the " inner fleshy layer " found among those Gymno-
sperms having only a single integument. There are two sets of vascular
strands, a condition which appears to be more primitive than that found
in the Coniferales and Ginkgoales.

Male Gone and Gametophyte of Podocarpus.|— L. L. Burlingame
has examined the male cone and gametophyte of Podocarpus, and con-
firms the observations made by Coker, Jeffrey, and Chrysler, at the
same time showing that the phenomena observed by them are common
to other species. The two species examined — viz. P. totarra var. Hallii
and P. nivalis have two prothallial cells which may or may not divide.
The primary cells may give rise to as many as eight prothallial cells.
The prothallial cells show mitosis, and do not degenerate. Both stalk
and body-cells are found, but it is uncertain whether they produce male-
cells. There are 12 and 24 chromosomes. At the time of shedding, the
pollen-grain contains a variable number of cells, or free nuclei. The
author regards Pinus and Podocarpus as derived from a common
ancestral stock, assuming that in one case the prothallial complex has
been retained, while in the other case it has been lost.

Structure of the Pistil, Ovule, Fruit, and Seed of Acanthaceae.§
Ph. van Tieghem records the results of his investigation on this family.
In the species of Thunbergia examined, a vascular bundle ascends the
septum between the cells comprising the ovary, and these trifurcate, the
middle branch running up the style, while the lateral ones curve out-
wards and penetrate slightly into the ovule, where they stop without
branching. The single coat of the ovule is very thick, and the micro-

* Comptes Eendus, cxlvii. (1908) pp. 382-4.

f Bot. Gaz., xlvi. (1908) pp. 43-9 (1 pi.).

j Tom. cit., pp. 161-75 (2 pis. and 9 figs.).

§ Ann. Sci. Nat. ser. 9, vii. (1908) pp. 1-24.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 63

pyle, long and very straight, is directed obliquely downwards and opens
over against the septum. The narrow transitory micellus is entirely
absorbed before the flower opens, to be replaced by a slender female
prothallus, having its summit at the bottom of the micropyle, and Lta
base near the end of the vascular bundle, from which it is separated by
a " hypostase " in the form of a thick cup composed of Ann-walled
lignified cells. The ovule, having no trace of a raphe, is neither ana-
tropous nor amphitropous, but belongs to the campylotropous group.
The fruit is a globose bilocular capsule, with four seeds, and a beaked
upper portion. This capsule opens from above downwards loculicidally,
and since the septum also splits, its dehiscence is also septifragal. The
seeds are set free by the formation of a ring of thick, lignified epidermal
cells at the rim of the large sunk hilum, which ring presses against the
septum, and effects separation. The cotyledons are incumbent, and
contain aleurone and oil, without starch. Nelsonia has approximately
the same structure, as also llendoncia, except that in the latter, the fruit
being a drupe, no separating ring is formed by the seed. These genera
the author unites into a group, which he provisionally calls the
Thunbergiea?. The ovary of species of Acanthus (mollis, longifolius,
spin os us) has a very thick septum, each half of which differentiates in
its interior two lamina?, perpendicular to the surface, formed of very
long, straight, thin-walled cells containing mucilage, but none of the
starch which abounds in the rest of the septum. This is certainly not
conducting tissue for the pollen-tubes, and its function is at present
doubtful ; in the capsule stage this tissue is seen to be lignified. The
two ovules of each cell are borne by a short, thick, oblkjuely ascending
funicle, and are flattened in a plane parallel to that of the septum.
Each receives avascular bundle from the septum, which bundle traverses
the funicle and ends at once in the ovule in the shape of a horse-shoe,
due to the phloem of the bundle reaching higher on each side than the
xylem. The integument of these ovules is very thick and wholly
cellular, and invests before the flower opens a straight nucellns, soon
replaced by a female prothallus of the same form. Here also there is a
" hypostase." The prothallus grows out and curves until it reaches the
bottom of the micropyle, and continuing its curvature thence it buries
itself in the integument on the opposite side of the ovule, in contact
with a rounded mass of small cells with thickened collenchymatous walls
and starchy contents destined to serve as nutritive tissue to the em-
bryo, since they gradually become dissociated and absorbed, much as
happens with the nutritive nodules produced by the placenta of the
Utricularias. These ovules are strictly campylotropous, as also are the
ovules, showing the same essential structure, of species of Whitjieldia,
Justicia, Ruettia, Aphelandra, and other genera. These genera are
ranged in a second group called Acantheas. The author regards the
retinaculum as simply a dorsal emergence from the funicle, and thus
comparable to a partial aril, differing from the normal aril in that it is
not detached with the seed. The rest of the memoir is of systematic
interest. Unfortunately there are no illustrations, an omission de-
tracting seriously from the value of the contribution. The author
suggests the division of the family into two distinct families, Thun-
bergiacea? and Acanthacea?.

(54 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Physiology.
Nutrition and Growth.

Transpiration in Plants.* — G. F. Freeman has experienced some
difficulty in physiological and ecological work connected with plant-
breeding in rinding an accurate and practical method of measuring
transpiration. The potometer does not record the normal rate of plant-
transpiration, neither can it be made to show the comparative transpira-
tion of different plants. By modification and adaptation of the methods
of Lamarliere and E. and J. Verschaffelt, the author has been aide to
measure accurately the transpiration of plants under known and con-
stant conditions. Moreover, individual differences in the transpiration
rates of different plants can be measured, and the apparatus may be
used with advantage in plant selection and breeding. The most
important differences between the new and the old form of apparatus
are the use of a different absorbent, the modification permitting of the
measurement of transpiration of plants still attached to their own roots
and the supply of normal air.

Irritability.

Gravitation-sensitiveness of Root.f — F. C. Newcombe has experi-
mented upon Zea Mays, Lupinus alius, Pisum sativum, Pl/aseolas
jiut.lt iff oras, Virtu Faba, Ricinus communis, and Cucurbita pepo, and is of
the opinion that there is no proof that gravitation-sensitiveness is
limited to the apical 2 mm. of the root. Centrifugal experiments show
that sensitiveness extends backwards as far as 2*5 mm., and in some
species more than 4 mm. The geotropic curve described by an ortho-
tropic root displaced from its normal position is dependent upon the
relation between its geotropism and autotropism. Frecpiently the
autotropism of such displaced roots prevents the seedling from sending
roots vertically downwards. The length of the elongating zone does
not appear to be related to the extent of the sensitive zone.

Influence of Aluminium Salts on Protoplasm. £ — M. Fluid has
experimented upon Spirogyra, Elodea, Lemna, etc., in order to test the
influence exerted by salts of aluminium upon protoplasm. The experi-
ments show that the process of assimilation is retarded, but not
inhibited, by the presence of sulphate, nitrate, chlorate, and bichromate
of aluminium. Also, the cells become permeable to substances which
do not usually pass through the cell-walls, lint the amount of tin'
substances which thus enters the protoplasm is too small to be detected
by usual chemical tests. Streaming of the protoplasm continues, but is
less rapid than under normal conditions. The effects produced by the
aluminium salts are neutralised by glucose, glycerin, and isodulcit, but
are unaffected by salt or nitre.

Martel, E. — Contribuzione all' anatomia de fiore dell' Hedera Helix, dell' Aralia
Sieboldii e del Cornus sanguinea.

[An anatomical study of the flowers of these three species, with special
reference to vascular tissue relations.]

Alcm. Beale Accad. Sci. Torino, lviii. (1908) pp. 561-76 (1 pi.)

* Bot. Gaz., xlvi. (1908) pp. 118-29 (1 fig.).

t Beih. Bot. Centralb, xxiv. (1908) pp. 96-110 (1 pi. and 3 figs ).

X Flora, xcix. (1908) pp. 81-126.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, EIC. 65

CRYPTOGAMS.

Pteridophyta.

(By A. Gepp, M.A., F.L.S.)

Phylogeny and Inter-relationships of Pteridophyta.*— I. Browne
has begun a series of articles intended to place before the student a
brief critical account of the principal views now held as to the phylogeny
and affinities of the Vascular Cryptogams. The inter-relationship of
the various types composing each phylum will be successively con-
sidered, and later on the affinities of the phyla to one another.' The
members of the fossil Sphenophyllales form the subject of discussion in
the first article, the Equisetales in the second, the Lycopodiales (Lepido-
dendraceas, Isoetaceaa, Selaginellacese, and Lycopodiaoeas) in the third
and fourth. At the end of each article is a bibliography of the papers
cited.

Absence of Foliar Gaps in the Lycopsida.f — E. C. Jeffrey pub-
lished six years ago an account of his studies on the stem of the
Pteridophytes and Gymnosperms, and expressed the view that there are
two types of tubular central cylinder, namely, that in which only
ramular gaps are present, and that in whicli both ramular and foliar
gaps occur. Further, he stated that the Yasculares are divided into two
great primitive stocks : (1) the Lycopsida, which are cladosiphonic and
palingenetically microphyllous ; and (2) the Pteropsida, which are
phyllosiphonic and palingenetically megaphyllous. The Lycopsida in-
clude the Lycopodiales and Equisetales. The Pteropsida include the
Filicales, Gynmospermge, and Angiospermae. These two great stocks
appear to have been separate back to the beginning of the period when
the pala?ontological record begins. To this hypothesis various objec-
tions have been raised during the interval that has elapsed, but they
give the author no reason for modifying his standpoint in any essential
feature. In the present paper he shows that some of the objections to
the Lycopsida arose from misapprehension, etc. After replying to his
critics, he sums up as follows : — (1) True foliar gaps occur immediately
above their corresponding leaf-traces, and are not lateral to the leaf-
traces ; (2) true foliar gaps are absent in Phyttoglossum ; (3) they are
likewise absent in Tmesipteris ; (4) they are absent in the Lepido-
dendrere and the Sigillarige ; (5) they are unquestionably absent in the
cone axis of Equisetum, and on the basis of comparative anatomy are
absent also in the vegetative stem : similar statements apply to the
reproductive and vegetative axes of Catamites ; Archeocalamites has no
foliar naps in its vegetative stem ; (6) the Lycopsida, as defined by the
author, are clearly marked off from other plants by a palingenetically
niicrophvllous habit, the absence of foliar gaps in the tubular stele, and
by the possession of sporophylls with adaxial sporangia. They con-
stitute a great natural phylum. It should be added that in Phytto-
glossum and Tmesipteris perforations in the tubular stele sometimes

* New Phytolog., vii. (1908) pp. 93-113, rO-66, 181-97.
t Bot. Gaz, xlvi. (1908) pp. 241-£8 (2 p'a ).

Feb. 17th, 1909 F

66 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

occur laterally situated with respect to the outgoing leaf-traces, and
these have been misinterpreted as foliar lacunae. The same applies
to the more modern species of Sigillariae.

Nature of the Tracheae in Ferns.* — D. T. Gwynne-Vaughan,
having examined the xylem of some of the recent ferus, has come to the
conclusion that the xylem elements of the Pteridophyta are, for the most
part, vessels with true perforations in their longitudinal as well as in
their terminal walls ; that in the Osmundacefe, NephroiMum filix-mas,
and probably others, a special type of vessel occurs which is characterised
by the complete disappearance of the primary tracheal wall at certain
points, so that the cavities of the pits are vertically continuous in the
middle of the wall. It is probable that more or less rounded pits pre-
ceded the transversely elongated pits of the scalariform type in the
Filicales.

Vascular System of the Filicinese.j — A. G. Tansley brings to an
end the publication of his lectures on the evolution of the filicinean
vascular system. In Lecture ix. he makes a general survey of the
leaf-trace in the Filicineas, the comparative treatment of which subject
we owe to Bertrand and Cornaille and to Gwynne-Vaughan. The rest
of the lecture is concerned with the ontogeny of the filicinean vascular
system. In Lecture x., Tansley makes a comparison of the vascular
system of the ferns with that of other phyla of vascular plants, compares
the morphological construction of Selaginella with that of other ferns,
and finally gives a brief comparison of the ferns with the Cycadofilices
which lead up to the Cycadophyta and the flowering plants. A glossary
is appended to define the principal terms employed in these lectures,
relating to the construction of the stelar system. Titles of 37 works are
given in the bibliography.

Sporangiophore in the Pteridophyta.:}: — M. Benson passes under
review the different types of sporangiophore found among the Pterido-
phytes, fossil and living. She discusses the morphological value of the
sporangiophore, and concludes as follows : — On the whole, a review of
the great central phylum, Pteridophyta, as a group of plants derived
from a common ancestor, whose sporophyte generation bore a special
type of asexual spore-producing organ called a sporangiophore, seems
illuminating and possibly useful as tending to concentrate attention on
the probable origin of the structure in question.

Cavity Parenchyma and Tyloses in Ferns. § — M. McNicol gives a
resume of what has been written about cavity parenchyma and tyloses
found in contact with the protoxylem groups in the petioles of some
ferns, and describes what she has herself observed of this tissue in a
number .of ferns, for example, in Mkrolepia, Pteris, Alsophila, Dickson ia,
Cibotium, Marsilia, and others. In discussing its function, she says that
cavity parenchyma is to be regarded as a special tissue formed by the

* Ann. of Bot., xxii. (1908) pp. 517-23 (1 pi.).

f New Phytolog., vii. (1908) pp. 1-16, 29-40 (figs.).

% Tom. cit., pp. 143-9 (figs.).

§ Ann. of Bot., xxii. (1908) pp. 401-13 (1 pi.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 67

conjunctive parenchyma cells of the vascular bundles of the petiole,
which replaces the first-formed elements of the wood, sometimes by
simply crushing the spiral vessels, bat generally bv means of tvlose-like
swellings within the cavity of the vessels. True tyloses are unknown in
recent Vascular Cryptogams, save in two rare cases. As regards the
pseudo-parenchyma in the tracheids of fossil ferns, for example, in the
petiole of Rachiopteris insignis (Zygopteris corrugata), the evidence that
it is composed of fungal hypha?, is at least as strong as that it is a true
process of tylosis.

Abnormality in Psilotum triquetrum.*— M. G. Sykes describes
and figures an abnormal sporangiophore structure noticed on a dried
specimen of Psilotum triqmtrum from New South Wales. Some
distance below the apex there occurred, among the ordinary synangia, a
cluster of four synangia borne together on a common stalk. * Three of
these synangia were bilocular, while the apical or terminal one was
unilocular. The two lower synangia were subtended each by a double
bract, the third synangium by a single bract, and the apical by no bract.
She is inclined to regard it rather as derived from a single proliferated
synangium-bearing appendage than as equivalent to a normal aerial
branch abortive in development.

Structure of a Branch Cone in Equisetum.t— W. Stiles describes
the structure of an abnormal cone of Equisetum maximum in which
branching of the strobilus had occurred. The most interesting feature
was the presence of vascular bundles in the pith of the main axis, quite
unconnected with the normal ring of vascular tissue, and having a
structure different from that of the normal bundle. It is possible that
these medullary vascular strands may be the remnants of the solid
central stele of the ancestors of the living species of Equisetum.

Origin of the Sphenophylleae.J — 0. Lignier in 1903 attributed to
the Equisetales and Sphenophyllales a Filicinean origin. In reply to
objections urged by Scott and Sykes against this view, Lignier now
reaffirms his position with additional argument. The " fertile leaves "
of Sphenophyllum cannot be homologised with the sporangiferous
structures of Tmesipteris ; but their " sterile pinnules " are comparable
with those of Arclmopteris. The "fertile pinnules" are of the same
type as those of the Primofilices. Hence Lignier concludes that the
Sphenophyllete should be attached to the Primofilices, and not to the
Lycopodiales.

Fossil Ferns. — F. Weiss § publishes an abstract of a paper on tl e
morphology of Stigmaria and of its appendages in comparison with
recent Lycopodiales.

R. Kidston and D. T. Gwynne-Yaughan|| publish a second article
on the fossil Osmundaceas, describing the anatomy of a new genus
ZaJesskga with two species.

*

Ann. of Bot.. xxii. (1908) pp. 525-6 (figs.).
t XewPhvtolog., vii. (1908) pp. 113-16 (figs.).

X Bull. Soc. Bot. France, iv. (1908) pp. 278-88. See also Pet. Gaz., xlvi.
(190S) p. 319. § Proc. Linn. Soc., 1907-8, pp. 74-5.

|| Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, xlvia, (1908) pp. 213-32 {i pis.).

F 2

68 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Use of Collodion Casts of Fossil Ferns.*- — A. G. Nathorst de-
scribes a method of making collodion impressions of the surface of
fossil plants for examination under the Microscope. He illustrates his
article with photographs of such casts, showing the structure of the
sporangia of fossil ferns, the epidermis of fern-fronds, etc.

Prothallium of Lycopodium complanatum.f — -H. Bruchmann gives
a detailed account of the prothallium of Lycopodium complanatum,
illustrated by 47 figures. He describes the structure of the prothalliuin,
its occasional multiplication by means of vegetative offshoots, the sexual
organs, and the development of the embryo.

Prothallium of Kaulfussia and Gleichenia.J — D. H. Campbell,
during his recent visit to Java, obtained material the study of which
has enabled him to give a detailed account of the prothallia, reproductive
organs, and embryo of Kaulfussia and Gleichenia. The prothallium of
Kaulfussia is large, and always contains an endophytic fungus. The
antheridia and archegonia are large, and are borne on the ventral
surface. All the organs of the embryo except the foot are of epibasal
origin. The shoot pierces through the prothallium and emerges on the
dorsal side.

The prothallium of Gleichenia is of the "massive-midrib" type,
lobed, and containing an endophytic fungus. The antheridia are
restricted to the ventral surface, except in G. laevigata. They are in
the Javan species larger and more complex than described by Rauwenhof .
The archegonia are borne chiefly on the sides of the "midrib," and
are long-necked. The embryo apparently resembles that of the Poly-
podiacese. In sporelings the characteristic protostelic condition was
observed.

Effect of Different Light-rays on Prothallia. § — A. Burgerstein
describes the effect of light-rays of different refrangibility upon the
formation of fern-prothallia. He gives a resume of the determinations
of previous authors, and states that as the result of his own experiments
he finds that under the influence of the blue rays the prothallia
generally form themselves in from a few days to weeks later (never
earlier) than under the influence of rays of lower refrangibility ; and he
appends a table of differences.

British Ferns. || — E. Step has prepared a pocket guide to the British
ferns and fern-allies — an addition to his series of Nature handbooks.
After a general introduction, the species are treated separately. Each
species is represented by coloured figures, and several photographs
showing the plants in their natural habitats are reproduced. A classified
index to the families, genera, and species is added.

Pteridophyta of the French Mediterranean Basin. IT — W. Herter
gives an account of the Pteridophyta of the French basin of the

* Arkiv Bot., vii. No. 4 (1908). v

t Bot. Zeit., lxvi. (1908) pp. 169-81 fags.).

% Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg, ii. (1908) pp. 69-102 (8 pis.). See also Bot. Gaz.,
xlvi. (1908) pp. 313-14.

§ Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., sxvia. (1908) pp. 449 51.

Wayside and Woodland Ferns. F. Warne and Co., 1908. 143 pis.
f Bull. Herb. Boiss., viii. (1908) pp. 794-820.

ZOOLOGY AXD BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 69

Mediterranean, comprising- 49 ferns and 24 fern-allies. He treats them
analytically, first arranging them in systematic order and stating their
general distribution. Then by means of lists lie shows their distrilmt ion
(1) in the different zones of altitudes; (2) according to the physical
nature of the soil ; (3) according to the chemical nature of the soil ;
(4) according to the humidity of the surrounding air ; (5) according to
the intensity of solar illumination ; (G) according to the temperature of
the surrounding air. And further, he shows in a table the comparative
frequency of each species in the five zones of altitude.

Ferns of Styria.*— A_. von Hayek issues the first part of his flora of
Styria, a work which will comprise about 18 parts, more than 1400
pages, and will treat of the vascular plants of the province and the
geographical relations of the flora. The present part consists almost
entirely of an account of the ferns and fern-allies. A series of well-
defined keys to the various groups, genera, and species is supplied. The
descriptions (in German) are concise. Synonymy and the citation of
literature are sufficiently fully treated, while the habitat and distribution
of the species have been prepared with much care. Some of the groups
are illustrated with text-figures.

Ferns of Mount Ruwenzori.f — R. Pirotta publishes diagnoses of
four new ferns collected on Mount Ruwenzori at an altitude of about
12,000 ft. during the expedition of the Duke of the Abruzzi. Their
names are Cyathea Sellm, Woodsia nivalis, Asplenium Duck- Apr utii,
Elaphoglosswn Rmvenzorii.

Ferns of the Malay Peninsula-! — H. N. Ridley publishes a list of
more than 380 species of ferns recorded as occurring in the Malay
Peninsula, a region particularly rich in ferns owing to its wet tropical
forests. The richest localities are usually situated at altitudes of
1000-5000 ft. Most of the species occur also in the Malay Islands,
many also in the Mascarene Islands, as well as in India, Polynesia, and
South America. Six even are found in the British Isles. About 40
of the species are endemic in the Malay Peninsula. Notes on the
habitats and uses of the ferns are added. The local distribution,
collector's name, number, and native name are given under each species.

Ferns of Argentina.§ — C. Hicken publishes some notes on Argentine
ferns. He gives a list of twenty-three ; among these are two species
and two varieties described for the first time.

Bornmuller, J.— Flora der Elbursgebirge Nord-Persiens. (Flora of Mount
Elburz, in North Persia.)

[Contains a list of thirteen ferns and three fern-allies.]

Bull. Herb. Boiss., viii. (1908) pp. 830-2.

Kirk, G. L.— New Stations for Ferns in Vermont.

[Describes the nature of a bog in which were found Wood in ml in virginica
and Osmunda cinnamomea var. incisa.'] Khodora, x. (1 ( J08) p. 196.

* Flora von Stiermark. Berlin : Borntraeger, I. i.(1908) pp. 1-80 (figs.).

t Annali di Bot., vii. (1908) pp. 173-4.

X Journ. Roy. Asiat. Soc, Straits Branch, No. 50 (1908) 59 pp.

§ Trab. Museo Farmacol. Facult. Cienc. Med. Buenos Aire?, No. 19 (1907) 1 2 pp.

70 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Bryophyta.
(By A. Gepp.)

Phylogeny of the Archegoniatae and of the Characeae.* — H.
Schenck treats of the unsolved problem of the origin of the Arche-
goniatae. He discusses the commonly held view that in the green alga?,
and especially in Coleochcete, the ancestry of the Archegoniatae may be
sought, and the objections that weigh against this theory. Setting aside
the red algaB, as affording no clue, he passes on to a consideration of the
brown alga?, which have been already suggested by Potanie, Hallier, and
others. He points out that in Dictyota we find, for the first time
among the Thallophytes, the same form of regular alternation of genera-
tions which prevails in the Archegoniatae And by a comparison of the
reproductive organs, the author shows that the antheridia and archegonia
of the mosses and ferns are homologous with the plurilocular gametangia
of the brown alga3, and that the spore-mother-cells of the mosses and
ferns find their homologue in the tetrasporangia of Dictyota. In the
vegetative organs, also, are many indications of relationship between
the brown alga? and the Archegoniatae. Similar hints of a relationship
between the Characea? and the brown alga? are discernible.

■.-'

Reduction and Fertilisation in Polytrichum.f — J. and W. Docters
van Leeuwen-Reijnvaan describe the development of the sexual organs
in four common species of Polytrkhum, the double reduction that occurs
in the process, and the fertilisation of the egg by two antherozoids. In
the antherozoidal cell a small portion cut off from the nucleus passes out
into the cytoplasm and forms two centrosomes, and after the mitosis
becomes taken up again. A small piece of chromatin is cutoff, wanders
to the periphery of the cell, and becomes a blepharoplast. At the
same time a large piece of chromatin is cut off, extruded into the
cytoplasm, and gradually degenerates. In the sporogenous cells are seen
12 chromosomes : 4 long, 4 short, 4 medium. In the gametophyte are
found 6 chromosomes : 2 long, 2 short, 2 medium. Owing to a longi-
tudinal fusion in pairs, the chromosomes in the antherozoids are reduced
to 3 : 1 long, 1 short, 1 medium. The central cell and the ventral
canal cell of the archegonium each contain 3 chromosomes : 1 long,
1 short, 1 medium. These two cells fuse together, and the resulting
egg is fertilised by two sperms. It thereupon contains 12 chromo-
somes. The authors consider that the individuality of the chromosomes
is especially clearly indicated in Polytrkhum.

The same authors % publish another paper, which treats of the sperma-
togenesis of mosses, with special reference to questions of centrosomes
and reductions in nuclear division. The material investigated for
centrosomes was Pellia, while the reduction of chromosomes was studied
in Polytrkhum and Mnium.

Sexual Differentiation in the Spores of Fegatella.§ — A. F. Blakeslee
gives an account of some experiments, which demonstrate that the
sporogonium of the dioicous hepatic Fegatella produces both male and

* Engler's Bot. Jahrb., xlii. (1908) pp. 1-37.
t Rev. Trav. Bot. Neerland, iv. (1908) pp. 177-220 (2 pis.).
t Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxvia. (1908) pp. 301-9.
§ Bot. Gaz., xlvi. (1908) pp. 384-5.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 71

female spores, just as has been previously shown to be the case in some
other dioicous plants, namely, in Mure ban tin (by Blakeslee), and in
Barbula unguieulata, Brgum argentium and Ceratodon purpureus (by

El. and Em". Marchal).

Structure of Mosses in Relation to Habitat.* — A. J. Grout pub-
lishes notes upon some relations between the habitats of mosses and
their structure. Species that grow upon tree-trunks have erect capsules,
so, too, those that grow on the faces of cliffs ; and these erect capsules
very rarely have complete double peristomes. The double peristome is
a device, for preventing the too rapid escape of spores from pendent
capsules. There seems to be some relation between the annual cleisto-
carpous mosses and their habitat, moist bare soil. Again, mosses of
xerophytic habit have small cells and very thick walls, a further protec-
tion against desiccation being sometimes added in the form of large
papillae on the surface of the cells. Pleurocarpous mosses that grew
on the bark of trees and in similar xerophytic habitats are remark-
able for the large number of quadrate thick-walled alar cells in their
leaves. On the other hand, the alar cells of aquatic or subaquatic
pleurocarpous species tend to become enlarged and inflated, the other
leaf-cells being exceedingly long and narrow. The meaning of this
modification is obscure.

Mosses and Environment.! — A. Geheeb publishes a posthumous
manuscript by K. Schimper upon the habitats of mosses and the effect
of environment upon them. The author considers the manifold in-
fluences that affect mosses and lichens, together with the correspond-
ing differences effected in their morphology.

Resting Periods in Riccia.J — E. Zacharias publishes some notes on
the periodicity of hepatics. He kept under observation in a greenhouse
two species of Eiccia, the common R. nutans and the Algerian R. Gou-
getiana. The former he observed to die down in the autumn, only a
small portion of the apical margin retaining life and resuming growth
in the following spring. R. Gougetiana on the other hand has its
resting period in the summer : having formed an apical bud in the spring
it died off, and the bud resumed growth in the autumn.

Abnormal Sporogonia in Mosses. §— I. Gyorffy describes instances
of twin or triplet sporogonia. Such abnormalities have previously been
recorded for twenty-three mosses. Gyorffy adds Dissodon Froelichianus
and Plagiobryum demission to the list, giving figures and descriptions
of the freaks.

Artificial Production of Propagula inBarbula.j]— J.Maheu descri
a method for obtaining experimentally the production of propagula with-
out failure in several' species of Barbula, in which normally they are
entirely absent. Broadly speaking, a specially arranged moist chamber
was employed, so as to insure a saturated atmosphere. Some of the
experiments were made in the light, others in the dark.

* Bryologist, xi. (1908) pp. 97-100.

t Beih. Bot. Centralbl., xxiv. 2te Abt. (1908) pp. 53-66.

t Verh. Nat. Wiss. Verein, Hamburg, xv. (1908) pp. lxxv-lxxvi.

§ Magyar Bot Lapok, vii. (1908) pp. 61-74 (pi.).

|| Bull.' Soc. Bot. France, 1908, pp. 445-53 (2 pis.).

72 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING 10

Introduction to British Mosses.* — Sir Edward Fry issues a second
edition of his little book on British Mosses, which grew out of a lecture
delivered by him in 1891 at the Royal Institution, and which forms an
introduction to a study of the classification, life-history, modes of
reproduction, and structure of mosses, and of the important services
they render in nature. In this latter respect, emphasis is laid upon the
role played by the Sphagnaceae and their relation with the formation of
peat and with the ancient forest-beds. The figures in the present
edition have been re-drawn and added to.

Muscinese of Invernessshire.f — A. Wilson and J. A. Wheldon
give a list of seventy-seven species of mosses and twenty-one of hepatics,
with numerous varieties collected by them during a brief visit to East
Invernessshire during July 1908. The weather being bad prevented
them from exploring the summits of the Cairngorm range as they
intended ; hence their collections were principally made in the Forest of
Rothiemurchus. The authors give a sketch of the vegetation as they
found it.

Muscinese of North Devon.:}:— C. E. Larter publishes a note upon
the interesting species of Cryptogams found on the north coast of
Devonshire in the past year. Among them are eleven mosses and six
sphagna and a hepatic new to the county, and four hepatics which have
not been found there for more than thirty years.

Distribution of Lunularia in Britain. § — S. M. Macvicar calls for
an investigation of the distribution of Lunularia in the British Islands.
Although this plant, like some other Mediterranean species, may be
truly native on our south coast, it has certainly often been introduced
with garden plants. Its present distribution ought to be mapped out,
its method of extension ascertained, and its effect upon other species
(for example, upon Marchantia) noted. In the south of Scotland it is
widely distributed in gardens, and is abundant in ravines near gardens.
It is more rare in the highlands. It grows in profusion in ravines near
Edinburgh ; but it was apparently non-existent there in Greville's time,
and hence is not mentioned by that observant botanist.

Means of Distribution of Hepaticae.|| — H. R. Yeates publishes
some notes upon the distribution of some thalloid Hepatica? mostly in
the south of England, especially upon Metzgeria furcata, Dumortiera
irrigua, Lunularia cr aetata, Marchantia polymorpha, and Fegatella conica.
His contention is that these species never, or rarely, succeed in forming
spores, and that their rapid propagation is effected by means of detached
gemmaa, thallidia, or fragments, normally conveyed by water and rarely
by animal agencies. The habitat of such plants is where moisture is
abundant.

Rare Scandinavian species of Cephalozia.1T — H. W. Arnell and
C. Jensen describe and illustrate some rare Scandinavian species of

* London : Witherby and Co., 1908, 2nd ed., viii.and 72 pp. (40 figs.),
f Journ. Bot., xlvi. (1908) pp. 347-356. '

X Tom. cit., p. 393. § Tom. cit., pp. 382-4.

|| New Pbytologist, vii. (1908) pp. 167-71.
i Bot, Not. Lund, 1908, pp. 1-16 (8 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 73

Gephalosia, including- the types of the following- species invented by
S. 0. Lindberg : G. boreal is, C. subsimplex, C.spinigera ; also C. lac inn -
lata (Jack) Spruce, and C. (Prionolobu.s) Perssonii Jens.

French Mosses. — A. Friren * publishes a fifth account of topological

excursions in Lorraine, with indications of stations for rare mosses.

He also publishes f a fourth supplement to the Catalogue of the
Muscineae of Lorraine, including five mosses and four hepatics new for
the province.

J. Maheu and A. Gillet J record the finding of fruiting specimens of
ThvMium abietinum near Fontainebleau, in a new railway cutting through
the limestone. They figure the capsule as erect and straight.

A. Gillet § publishes a contribution to the moss-flora of the moun-
tains of the Tarentaise, giving lists of species for the principal localities.

Philonotis in France. |] — G. Dismier publishes a monograph of the
French species of Philonotis, based upon the papers of L. Loeske, upon
a searching examination of the material preserved in several French
herbaria, and upon observations in the field in numerous localities of
great diversity in France. He gives a resume of the principal works
published since 1876 which treat of the genus, a bibliography, an
explanation of the special descriptive words employed in the mono-
graph, and a key to the species. The species recognised are eight in
number, namely, P. rigida, P. marchiea, P. capillaris, P. ccespitosa,
P. calcarea, P. seriata, P.fontana, P. tomentella. Each of these is care-
fully described, with its varieties, and critical notes are added.

French Hepatics. If — C. Douin gives a list of twenty-four hepatics
and twenty mosses collected by him in the very rich district round
Sancy, in Auvergne. Among them is a species new to science, Br yum
arvernense, two species and several varieties new to the French flora, and
six or seven new for Auvergne. Some critical notes are included in the
paper, and the differences between the following pairs of species are
drawn up in parallel columns — Nardia obovata and N. subelliptica ;
Alicularia minor and A. insecta ; Marsupella Sprucei and M. ustulata.
Some further interesting gatherings at La Bastide (Cantal) and at
Gavarnie are mentioned at the end of the paper. L. Hillier ** records
the discovery of Lejeunea Rosettiana in the Jura near Besancon, and the
station and environment in which he found it. Three times previously
it had been gathered in France.

Death of C. Lacouture.ft— A. Friren and T. Husnot announce the
death of this old bryologist, who in 1905 published some illustrated
synoptical tables of the Hepaticse of France, and in 1908 an analytical
and synoptical key (with figures) to the forty odd genera into which the
old Lejeunea has been broken up. Further he had prepared for publica-

* Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Metz (1908) pp. 47- 78.
t Tom. cit., pp. 83-90.

t Bull. Soc. Bot. France, lv. 1908, pp. 133-8 (figs.).
§ C.R. Congres Soc. Savantes, 1900, pp. 345-51.
|| Mem. Soc. Sci. Nat. Cherbourg, xxxvi. (1907) pp. 367-428.
f Rev. Bryolog., xxxv. (1908) pp. 131-7.
** Tom. cit., pp. 140-1. tt Rev. Bryolog., xxxv. (1903) p. 145.

74 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

tion a larger work on the same plan, namely synoptical tables diagnosing
all known genera of hepatics.

Mosses of Bavaria. — A. P. Haininerschmid * publishes a second
contribution to the moss-flora of Upper Bavaria, from the neighbourhood
of Schliersee, Tegernsee, Tolz, Walchensee and Kochelsee, 11)05-7.
V. Schiffnerf gives an account of the distribution of the Bryophyta in
the Iser-Gebirge, with indications of the rarity or abundance of the
various species in the different conditions presented by the mountains.
Critical remarks upon some of the species are added.

Moss-flora of the Hohe Tauern.J — F. Kern gives an enumeration
(with localities and altitudes) of the moss-flora of the Hohe Tauern,
consisting of 11)5 mosses and thirty hepatics. This rich moss district
was first searched by Hornschuch and a few others a hundred years ago ;
but now that the German-Austrian Alpine Club have exploited the
district and built many Alpine huts on the mountain-groups of the
Grossglockner and Grossvenediger, the facilities for the bryologist are
enormously increased. Secure of his night's lodging in the vicinity he
is able to devote long hours of search to the gullies, rock-walls, water-
falls, etc., of this interesting range.

North American Hepaticse. — A. W. Evans § continues his notes on
New England Hepatic*. In his sixth article he writes more especially
of additions to the local floras of Maine, New Hampshire, and Con-
necticut. The species treated of are Metzgeria pubescens, Marsupella
robusta, Nardia cremdiformis, Boplwzia attenuata, L. Baueriana,
L. longiflora, Gephalozklla SulUvantii, Bazzania tricrenata, Leucolejeunea
chjpeata, B. unciloba, Frullania Sehcyniana, Anthoceros Macounii.
Critical notes on these species are given, and some supplementary
lists are added at the end of the paper.

C. C. Plitt || publishes a preliminary list of hepatics found in the
vicinity of Baltimore, consisting of thirty-eight species with annotations
and distribution-tables.

A. Lorenzlf publishes a report on the hepatics of Franconia Mountains
in New Hampshire, containing a list of seventy-seven species with
annotations and distributional notes.

Hepaticse of Samoa.** — F. Stephani gives an account of the Hepaticae
collected by K. Rechiuger in Upolu and S'avaii. He enumerates 79
species in all, namely, 73 for Upolu and 17 for Savaii. There are
21 new species, some of which are not described.

New Mosses from Mount Ruwenzori.ft — G. Negri publishes
diagnoses of twenty-two new mosses collected on Mount Ruwenzori,
mostly at an altitude of 12,600 feet, during the expedition of the Duke
of the Abruzzi. Their names are : Sphagnum Alogm-Sabaudkv,

* Mitteil. Bavrisch. Bot.Gesell., ii. (1908) pp. 103-9 (figs.),
t Lotos, Prag, 1907, n.s. i. pp. 145-52, 168-72, 186-90, 201-11.
% Fiinfundacktzigster Jahr. Schles. Ges. Breslau, 2te Abt. b. zool. bot. sektion
(1908^ pp. 1-12. § Rhodora, x. (1908) pp. 185-93.

|| Bryologist, xi. (1908) pp. 100-4. 1| Tom. cit., pp. 112-14.

** Denkschr. Math. Nat. Akad. Wiss. Wien, lxxxi. (1907) pp 288-99.
tt Aunali di Bot , vii. (1908) pp. 161-9.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 75

S. ruwmzorense, Dkranum petropkylum, Gampylopus sericeus, C. Gagnii,
Fissidens mobukensis, Leptodontium Gambaragam, Tortula Gavallii,
AruBctangium Sella, A. fuscum, A. flexuosum, Amphidium Aloysii-
Sabaudice, Zygodon Roccatii, Z. hirsvtum, Macromitrium fragile,
Brae Inj men lam Gagnii, Pohlia Aloysii-.Sabaudw, Bryum Sella, Brevtelia
auronitens, Gatharineea Cavallii, Polytrichutn cupreum, Brachythecium
Roccatii.

Antarctic Messes.* — J. Cardot publishes bis complete monograph
of the bryological flora of the Magellan region, South Georgia and the
Antarctic region, it being one of the reports of the Swedish South Polar
Expedition (1901-3). The subjects treated are the history of the
subject from the time of Commerson (1767) up to our own days ; the
geography of the Magellan region ; a list of 243 endemic species ; the
relationship and origin of this flora : distributional comparisons. The
author infers that there has been a common origin for the Magellan
region and New Zealand. He then gives systematic lists of all the
mosses, and describes and figures several new ones, including among
them two new genera Verrucidens and Exodokidium.

Life of Richard Spruce.f — A. R. Wallace has edited for publication
the manuscript journals, letters, and notes of the late Richard Spruce
(born 1817, died 1893), giving an account of the long travels ou the
Amazon and Andes (1849-G4),"during which Spruce reaped, inter alii/,
his rich harvest of mosses and hepatics, and began to make the brilliant
observations of the latter group which many years later (1885) he gave
to the public in his monumental work, Hepaticas Arnazomcaj et Andime.
Wallace has compiled a biography of Spruce's life before his departure for
South America and after his return.

Bornmuller, J.— Flora der Elbursgebirge Nord-Persiens. (Flora of Mount
Elburz, in North Persia.)

[Contains a list of seven hepatics and sixty-four mosses.]

Bull. Herb. Boiss., viii. (1908) pp. 832-6, 915-17.

Kindberg, N. C— Bryogeografiska uppgifter. (Notes on the geographical dis-
tribution of mosses.)

[Treats of Scandinavian species.] Bot. Notiser Lund. 1908, pp. 09-70.

Steinbrinck, C. — Ueber den Kohasionsmechanismus der Roll- und Faltblatter
von Polytrichum commune und einigen Diinengrasern. (On the cohesion theory
in relation to the mechanism which controls the rolling up and folding of the
leaves of Polytrichum commune and some grasses of the dunes.)

Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxvia. (1908) pp. 399-412.

Stephani, F. — Species hepaticarum.

[Continuation of monograph of Mastigobryum, containing descriptions ot
178 species, several of which are new to science.] „„,..„„

Bull. Herb. Boiss., viii. (1908) pp. 837-66, 941-72.

* Flore bryologique des terres Magellan. Stockholm (1908) 298 pp. (11 pis. and
figs.). See also Rev. Bryol., xxxv. (1908) p. 142.

t Notes of a Botanist on the Amazon and Andes. Macmillan, 190«, & ^ois.

(illustrated).

76 SUMMAKY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Thallophyta.

Algae.
(By Mrs. E. S. Gepp.)

Aberrant Forms of Marine Algae produced artificially.*— C. Tecbet
publishes some observations upon some aberrant forms of marine algae
obtained by artificial cultivation. The experiments were not carried out
systematically enough to allow general conclusions to be drawn. They
show that the plants responded to stimuli in various ways ; and the only
general deduction is that in water of less salinity the plants assume a
more quick-grown and less branched form than in more strongly saline
solutions. The nutritive solution employed consisted of the following
ingredients : — calcium nitrate 2 p.c. ; potassium phosphate • 2 p.c. :
magnesium sulphate • 2 p.c, with a trace of ferric chloride ; sea-water
97*6 p.c. Every five months four or five drops of the above were added
to the cultures and slowly and carefully stirred in with a glass rod. The
jars used for the cultures were of glass and cylindrical, about 10 in. high
and 8 in. diameter. The plants experimented with were Halimeda Tuna,
Udotea Desfontainii, Valonia macrophysa, Acetabularm mediterranean
Dasycladus clavceformis, Antith amnion Phimula, Callithamnion sp., PoUj-
siphonia, Ectocarpus. The results obtained are shown in a series of
figures.

Light-perception in Algae. J— R. H. France publishes a paper on
the light-sensitive organs of algae, in which he expresses his views as
to the presence of an inner psychical faculty in plants ; tells of his own
experiments with Euglma viridis and Polyioma uvella ; treats of the
pigment-spot or eye-spot in these algae ; and constructs his theories as
to the physiology of stimulation in plants.

Biology of Crater-lakes in South Italy. J — A. Forti and A. Trotter
publish an account of the flora and fauna of the two crater-lakes of
Mt. Vulture, situated in southern Italy, between the province of
Basilicata and the Principato Ulteriore. These Laghi di Monticchio
are situated at an altitude of 2160 ft. above sea-level, and are about
100 ft. deep. The physical geography and the general aspects of the
biology of the lakes are discussed by A. Trotter. The analysis of the
microscopic material, and the preparation of the principal deductions
therefrom, are the work of A. Forti. The latter detected forty-one algae
and twenty-five animals in the plankton gatherings, and has arranged
these in a series of tables to illustrate his arguments. Further, he dis-
cusses each of the species in a separate paragraph by itself. In the
deposit from the bottom of the lakes he found seventy-nine species of
diatoms.

Algae of Lampedusa and Linosa.§ — S. Sommier publishes a
modernised flora of the Pelagian Islands, Lampedusa, Linosa, and

* Nuov. Notar., xix. (1908) pp. 171-84 (figs.),

t Stuttgart: Kosmos, 1908,80 pp. (1 pi. and figs.).

X Annalidi Bot., vii. (1908) Suppl. Ill pp. (3 pis.).

§ Firenze : Stabilimento Pellas, 1908, 345 pp.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 77

Lampione, and of Pantelleria, including a list of sixty algge recorded for
Lampedusa and thirty-seven for Linosa. Two of them are new to
science.

German Fresh-water Algae.*— AY. Beering publishes the second part
(Chlorophyceaj) of his account of the fresh-water algae of Schleswig-
Holstein and the neighbouring regions of Hamburg and Lubeck.
F. Quelle f publishes an algal flora of Nordhausen. This district was
originally worked up by F. T. Kiitzing, whose narrowed notion of species
led him to establish them often on what are now held to be but develop-
mental forms. Quelle has submitted Kutzing's results to revision in the
light of modern botany.

Fresh-water Algae at Reval. J— G. Schneider and others, in giving
a complete biological account of the Obersee at Reval, devote a chapter
to its vegetation, which includes a considerable number of fresh-water
algae — 17 Schizophyces, 41 Chlorophyceae, 29 Diatomacea? — some of
which {Anabama, Clathroajstis, etc.) by the formation of " Wasserblute "
(algal scum) give trouble in connection with the Reval water-supply,
derived from this lake. In another chapter is given a list of eighteen
species which have been found living in the Reval water-supply. In
Chapter vi. K. M. Levander treats of the biological conditions which
affect the plankton, and indicates the date when each species was noticed :
and further, he shows in a synoptical table the comparative degrees of
frequency or rarity of each of the species found in the middle part of the
lake during the summer months.

British Desmidiaceae.§ — W. and G. S. West publish the third volume
of their monograph of the British Desmidiaceas, including in it full
descriptions with figures of 174 species of Cosmarium, with varieties,
synonymy, literature, distribution, and critical notes.. Keys to the species
are provided, and an additional list of bibliography is appended.

Rhizoclonium and Cladophora.|| — F. Brand discusses the morphology
and biology of the borderland species between the genera Rhizoclonium
and Gladophora. Some of these species are stable, and some are transitory
morphological phenomena. He describes in great detail Gladophora
fracta var. lacustris, which is so variable as to have given rise to the
theory that Rhizogonium merges ontogenetically into Gladophora. He
then treats of the following in succession : — Rhizoclonium profundum :
R. sulfuratum sp. n. ; differential morphology of Rhizoclonium and
Gladophora, including an amended diagnosis of the genus Rhizoclonium ;
and, in conclusion, the five species of Gladophora which are grouped in the
section Affiues, and more or less resemble permanently Rhizoclonium.

Morphology and Development of Pithophora.l — A. Ernst publishes
a contribution to the morphology and physiology of Pithophora, hased

* Jahrb. Hamburg, wiss. Anstalt., xxv. (1907) beih. 3, 119 pp. \

t Mitteil. Thiiring. Bot. Ver., 1908, pp. 33-61. »

X Arcbiv Biontolog. Berlin, ii. (1908) 192 pp.

§ London : Ray Society (1908) xv. and 274 pp. (pis. 65-95, partly coloured).
|| Hedwigia, xlviii. (1908) pp. 45-73 (figs.).
U Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg, vii. (1908) pp. 18-55 (4 pis.).

78 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

•

upon a study of living material of P. sumatrana collected at Buitenzorg,
in Java. He gives an emended description of the structure and de-
velopment of the plant, of the spores and their germination. He treats
of the ecology of the plant, and of the conditions of its life. In a third
chapter he describes the experiments made to ascertain the conditions of
reproduction of the plant in different liquids.

Rhodochytrium a Parasitic Alga.* — G. F. Atkinson describes a
remarkable parasitic alga, Rhodochytrium spiJanthidis Lagerh., found in
North Carolina on the leaves and stem of the common Composite plant,
Ambrosia artemismfolia. The zoosporangia were discovered after much
search. The plant had been previously found by Lagerheim near Quito,
Ecuador, in 1889, upon SpiJanthes, another member of the Composite.
The two localities are therefore separated by a tropical zone, and the
question arises, whether this distribution is natural, or has been brought
about by importation. The structure and development of the alga, its
sporangia, and zoospores, are described. According to Lagerheim it is
related most nearly to the Phyllobiurn of Klebs.

Green Coloration of Oysters caused by a Diatom.t— C. Sauvageau,
in a rejoinder to D. Corazzi, summarises the arguments in favour of the
contention that the green coloration of oysters at some stations is due to
the blue diatom, Navicida ostrearia, citing especially the direct experi-
ments which have been made with the diatom to demonstrate the
rapidity with which the oyster acquires the green colour.

Adriatic Diatoms. J — B. Schroder describes some new and rare
diatoms found in plankton taken from the Adriatic. They are Lepto-
cylindrkus adriaticus sp. n. ; Striatella interrupta (Ehrb.) Heiberg ;
Biddulphia peUucida Castracane, forma ; B. pelagica sp. n. They were
collected at various dates, and are preserved at the zoological station
at Rovigno.

Fishing Spoiled by AlgaB. — G. Besana announced in 1898 an
invasion of Ulothrix Umaetka Lemmerm. into Lake Como ; and now he
describes an extraordinary development of diatoms in the same lake in
December 1907 and January 1908, so bad in fact as to render fishing
impossible. The diatoms concerned are Tabellaria fenestrate Kuetz".
and Lysigonium varians De Toni.

Italian Diatoms. — A. Forti || describes and figures Aulacodiscus
miocenicus, a new fossil species of diatom from Bergonzano, near Reggio
d' Emilia, in Italy. He also describes^ and figures Pyxilla Sqivinaboli,
a new fossil species of diatom from Piedmont and from Reggio. D. G.
Antonelli ** publishes a list of seventy diatoms found in the torrent and
mineral waters of Aspio, near Ancona, A chemical analysis of the
waters is given.

* Bot. Gaz., xlvi. (1908) pp. 299-301.
t Bordeaux : Destout, 1908, 23 pp.

j Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxvia (1908) pp. 615-20 (figs.).
§ Rivist. Mens, di Pesca, x. (1908) u. 1, 2.'

|| Padova : Serninario, 190S, 2 pp. (pi.). See also Nuov. Notar., xx. (1909) (ine^.
f Atti Soc. Nat. Mat. Modena, ser. iv. x. (1908) 2 pp. (fig.).
** Atti Poutif. Accad. Rornana d. Nuov. Lincei, lxi. (1908) pp. 79-93 (fig.K

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, 1 T< . 7'.'

Diatoms of Pas-de-Calais.— C. Cepede* furnishes a contribution to
the study of the marine diatoms of Pas-de-Calais,, not only giving an
enumeration of the species with synonymy and habitats, but also
treating the subject from the point of view of oceanography and
pisciculture, owing to the well known fact that the diatoms serve as food
to many marine creatures, and directly or indirectly to such importanl
fishes as the sardine. He gives a list of twenty-two diatoms found in
the intestine of the sardine. He also describes and figures a new
plankton-net in which the closure is effected by means of a lever-
stopper, t

Diatoms of Connecticut.!— W. A. Terry publishes some lists of
Connecticut diatoms representing material supplied by him to Tempere
for inclusion in his " Diatomees du Monde entier," issued in the form of
microscope-slides. The lists represent the floras of Ice Pond, New
Britain ; Fall Mountain, Bristol : Bunnel's Pond, Bristol ; and the
corresponding slides have already been issued by Tempere.

Mongolian DiatomsJ — E. Oestrup makes a contribution to a know-
ledge of the diatom-flora of the Kossogol Lake in North-west Mongolia,
based upon thirteen plankton-samples and twenty-four bottom-samples
obtained by C. H. Ostenfeld. The author enumerates 168 species,
eight of which are new to science. In a distribution-table he compares
this list with the diatom-floras of Lake Baikal, middle Asia, and Lake
Balaton.

Danish Peridinieae.il — 0. Paulsen gives an account of the Peri-
diniales of the Danish waters, prefacing the enumeration with an
analytical scheme of the genera. Among the species are nine proposed
as new.

Siamese Plankton.^" — E. Lemmermann gives an account of the
phytoplankton collected at the mouth of the Menam, near Paknam, in
Siain, by H. Schauinsland in 1006. The list contains 94 forms, com-
prising Bacillariacege (61), Peridiniere (5), Silicoflagellataj (2), Flag-
ellate (12), Conjugatas (3), Chlorophyceai (9), Schizophycese (2). The
author discusses the influence of the brackish water ; makes critical
remarks on some of the forms ; draws up some general conclusion < ;
and compares the plankton with that of the Yang-tze-kiang.

Studies on Ceratium. — C. A. Kofoid ** describes the exuviation,
autotomy and regeneration in Ceratium, from observations made at the
Marine Biological station at San Diego in California.

The same author ft publishes notes on some obscure species of
Ceratium.

Marine Biology.:^ — J. Johnstone publishes a volume on "Conditions
of Life in the Sea : a short account of Quantitative Marine Biological

* C.R. Ass. Fran?. Avanc. Sci. Reims (Paris, 1908) pp. 536-63.

+ Tom. cit., pp. 770-3. J Rhodora, x. (1908) pp. 179-81.

§ Hedwigia, xlviii. (1908) pp. 74-100 (2 pis.).

|| Meddel. fra Komm. f. Hafunders, i. No. 5 (Kobenhavn, 1907) 33 figs.

1 Hedwigia, xlviii. (1908) pp. 126-39 (pi.).

** Univ. California Publications (Zool.) iv. (1908) pp. 345-86 (figs.).
tf Tom. cit., pp. 387-93. JJ Cambridge University Press, 190

«S0 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Research," wherein is given a summary of the main results of modern
marine biological investigation. Part I. treats of the exploration of the
sea, and contains a description of oceanographical apparatus, the con-
stitution of the sea-bottom in northern waters, the living organisms —
the plankton, benthos and nekton. Part II. is concerned with quanti-
tative investigations, the estimation of the number of species, the distri-
bution of the forms, their economic importance in relation to the fisheries.
Part III. tells of the metabolism of the sea, the physiology of the
organisms, the mystery of migration, the action of bacteria, the circula-
tion of nitrogen. A bibliography is appended.

Regeneration in Myrionema.* — F. Tobler describes and figures the
method of regeneration in Myrionema. M. vulgare, one of the commonest
Ectocarpacege of the North Sea, forms remarkable brown spots on the
upper parts of the stem of Laminaria where there is an absence of other
algas. In August 1907, in Trondhjem Fjord, in a strong sea-current,
where only Laminaria digitata abounded at about 1-2 metres below
low water-mark, the Laminaria stems were found to be free from all
epiphytes except M. vulgare ; and this showed signs of the action of the
strong current. The tufts lacked the normal character of assimilators,
hair-threads and (plurilocular) sporangia juxtaposed. The sporangia
were absent, the hair-filaments rare. And the author describes in detail
the anomalous appearance of the assimilators and the process of regenera-
tion which was going on in some of them.

Biology of Polysiphonia fastigiata.f — Gr. Tobler- Wolff discusses
the biology of Folysiphonia fastigiata, and states that in the North Sea
it is only known to occur on Ascophyllum nodosum. She describes and
figures its method of penetrating the cortex of the latter plant, and
endeavours to explain how it is that it does not occur on Fucus also.
[According to British authors it is epiphytic upon both Ascophyllum and
Fucus, but chiefly upon the former.]

Developmental History of the Delesseriaceae.l — "W. Nienburg gives
a detailed account of the germination and development of the Delesseri-
aceas, paying special attention to the subsequent history of the segments
successively cut off from the apical cell in Nitophyllum, Delesseria, etc.,
and illustrating the same by figures in the text.

Notes on Lithothamnia.§ — M. Foslie publishes some remarks on
Lithotlt amnion murmanicum Elenkin, and the question of its affinity
with L. nodulosum and L. vardoense Fosl. He thinks L. murmanicum
to be probably identical with L. breviaxe Fosl., and adds critical notes
on various species, giving photographs of L. breviaxe and L. vardoense
and a figure of L. tophiforme Ung.

The same author || treats of species in the following genera : Litho-
thamnion (9), Lithophyllum (5), Mastophora (2), Fhymatolithon (1),
Clathromorphum (1), and Melobesia (1), giving descriptions and critical
notes.

* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxvia (1908) pp. 476-9 (figs.).

t Beih. Bot. Centralbl., xxiv. 2te Abt. (1908) pp. 112-16 (figs.).

% Bot. Zeit., lxvi. (1908) pp. 183-209 (1 pi. and 47 figs.).

§ K. Norske Vidensk. Selsk. Skrift, 1908, No. 2, 8 pp. (2 pis. and fig.).

|| Tom. cit., No. 7, 20 pp.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 81

Corallinaceae of the Pacific.*— M. Poslie gives an account of the
Corallinaceae collected by K. Recbinger during an expedition in 1905 to
the Samoa Isles, New Guinea Archipelago and Solomon Isles, including
two new species from the Sandwich Isles, one (Archaeo-lithothamnion
zonatosporum) from Los Angeles in California, and seven from Samoa.

Studies in Marine Algae.t,— A. Mazza continues his studies of
oceanic algology and describes and discusses some species of the following
genera: Grinnellia, Caloglossa, Sarcomenia, Sonderella, Claudea, Van-
voorstia, Delisea, Bonnemaisonia, Asparagopsis.

European Algae.J — W. Mignla continues the cryptogamic part of
Thome's Flora von Deutschland, Oesterreich und der Schweiz. Parts
57-65 treat of the Phasophyceas and Characeae, and complete the account
of the algaa. The descriptions are in German. Keys to the genera and
species are supplied.

Antarctic Algse.§ — T. Reinbold gives an account of the marine
algae of the German South Polar Expedition (1901-8). He sketches
the work previously published on collections made in various parts of the
antarctic region, shows that our knowledge is still limited to a small part
only of that region, and that there is a well-marked sub-antarctic circum-
polar algal flora (characterised by Macrocystis and DurvilUm) distinct
from the proper antarctic flora (characterised by Desmarestia, Lesson ia
and Scytothalia). The stations from which specimens were obtained
were as follows : Kerguelen, Crozet Island, New Amsterdam Island,
Cape of Good Hope, St. Vincent (Cape Verde).

• Marine Algse of San Thome. || — P. Hariot gives a list of thirty-eight
marine alga? from the Portuguese island of San Thome, off the coast of
West Africa, gathered by Quintas, Moller, Praenca, and Gravier. The
list contains twenty-one species which are additional to the flora of the
island, and raise its total to fifty-seven species or varieties. Gracilaria
Henriquesiana is a new species, and is figured.

Red Sea Algae. 1 — R. J. Harvey-Gibson gives an enumeration of
the alga? collected in the Red Sea by C. Crossland, near Suakim, during
an investigation of the biology of the Sudanese marine fauna during
1904-5. Thirty-five species are recorded, being almost equally divided
between green, brown, and red algae.

Brandt, F.— Ueber das Cb.romatopb.or und die systematiscbe Stellungder Blutalgs

(Porphyridium omentum). (Concerning the chroinatophore of

Porphyridium omentum, and the systematic position of the plant.)

Ber. Deutscti. Bot. Gesell., xxvia. (1908) pp. 413-19 (fig.).

„ ,, "Weitere Bemerkungen iiber Porphyridium cruentum (Ag.) Naeg.
(Further observations upon Porphyridium cruentum; its mor-
phology and biology.) Tom. tit., pp. 540 6.

* Denkschr. Math. Nat. Akad. Wiss. Wien, lxxx. (1907) pp. 209-10.
t Nuov. Notar., xix. (1908) pp. 153-70.
$ Gera : Zezschwitz, 1908, vi. pp. 225-384 (65 pis.).
§ Deutsch Sudpolar. Exped., viii. (1908) pp. 179-202.
I| Journ. de Bot., xxi. (1908) pp. 161-4 (fig.).
^ Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.) xxxi. (1938) pp. 76-80.

Feb. 17th. 1900 '■

82 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

C l a r k, H. W. — The Holophytic Plankton of Lakes Atitlan and Amititlan, Guatemala.

[Includes three new species — Clathrocystis robusta, Staurastrum Evcrmanni,
Conferva gyrans.] Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington, xxi. (1908) pp. 91-105.

Drabble, E. & H.— Hydrodictyon reticulatum Lagerh.

[Abundant, in August 1908, in the River Idle, North Nottinghamshire.]

Joum. of Bot., xlvi. (1908) p. 365.
Edwards, A. M.— Bacillaria : what are they ?
[A remarkable short essay upon Diatoms.]

Mim. Soc. Sci. Nat. Cherbourg, xxxvi. (1907) pp. 429-32.

Hall, as, E. — Om (Edogoniuni inclusum Hirn.

Bot. Tidsskr., xxviii. (1907) pp. 211-13 (figs.).

Hattori, H. — Vorlaufige Mitteilung iiber das Phytoplankton vom Suwa-see.
(Preliminary account of the phytoplankton of the Suwa lake.)

Tokyo Bot. Mag., xxii. (1908) pp. 121-6 (figs.).

L art br, C. E. — North Devon Cryptogams: Algse.

[Records Ceramium circinatum Ag., as an addition to the local flora ; and
adds notes on the occurrence of the recently described Callymenia
Larteria, Holmes.] Joum. of Bot., xlvi. (1908) p. 393.

Svedelius, N. — Frans Reinhold Kjellman.

[Obituary notice of Prof. Kjellman of Upsala, algologist, with portrait and
list of seventy-one published works. Born, 1846 ; died, 1907.]

K. Svensk. Vet. Akad. Aorsbok, 1908, pp. 279-300 (pi.).
See also Obituary Notice in Proc. Linn. Soc, 1907-8, pp. 50-3.

Fungi.

(By A. Lorrain Smith, F.L.S.)

Swiss Mucorini.* — Alf. Lendner has edited the section of Swiss
Cryptogamic Flora dealing with the Mucorini. He gives great attention
to the conditions and circumstances of habitat and development of these
plants, and recounts how he was able to obtain cultivations of a large
number of the species dealt with. He compares genera and species one
with another in their vegetative and reproductive organs, citing the work
of others as well as his own observations on morphology and histology.
The second part of the book is devoted to classification, the Mucorini
being divided into families : Mucoraceae, Thamnidiacese, Pilobolacese,
Chaetocladiaceae, aud Cephalidacea?. The two latter include the conidia-
bearing genera, such as Chmtocladium, Piptocephalis, etc. A copious
bibliography and index complete the volume. The genera and species
are illustrated by figures in the text, and three plates give enlarged
drawings of the zygospores of Sporodinia grandis, to illustrate the
details of nuclear and protoplasmic structure. A number of new species
are described in the course of the work.

Genus Pythium and some Chytridiaceae.t — This memoir by Butler
includes a monograph of the genus Pythium, which he divides into two
subgenera : — 1. Aphragmium, in which the species produce neither
conidia nor sporangia, the zoospores arising in undifferentiated cells of the
mycelium ; they are all water forms. 2. Sphwrosporangium, which in-

* Flore Crvptogamique Suisse. Berne : K. J. Wyss, 1908, iii. fasc. 1, 180 pp.
(3 pis. and 59 figs.).

f Mem. Dep. Agric. India, February 1907. See also Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr.
xviii. (1908) pp. 243-4.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 83

eludes the land forms, and in which the zoospores arc developed in
sporangia, or, if conditions are unfavourable for sporangia, conidia are
developed ; in some species only the latter are formed. ' All the species
can be cultivated as saprophytes ; the most destructive parasite of the
genus is P. de Baryanum, which attacks seedlings. The author has
also described a number of new species of Chytridiaceaa.

Witches' Brooms on Prunus padus.* — C. v. Tubeuf discovered
near Munich a witches' broom on the bird-cherry. In the immediate
neighbourhood there were three old cherry trees with large " brooms "
caused by Taphrina Gerasi, and Tubeuf is of opinion that infection spread
from these trees to the bird-cherry. It is very unusual to find " brooms"
on the latter tree, for this reason, that the two kinds of cherry do not
form their leaves at the same time, and those of the bird-cherry are very
seldom in the stage of development at a time when inoculation is possible
from the spores of Taphrina Gerasi.

Monograph of the Laboulbeniacese.t— R. Thaxter presents this
memoir as a contribution to the subject, which he has not yet exhausted,
as much material still remains for examination. Nearly 350 forms are
illustrated, increasing to about 500 the total number of species and
varieties thus far described, Avhich are included in more than 50 genera.
They all find their habitat on insects, but their growth is not associated
with any appreciable injury to the host. A general survey is given of
the various forms, with comparative descriptions of the vegetative and
reproductive organs, and a key to the genera is provided. Thaxter
states that although these plants resemble the Floridea?. in some respects
more clearly than they do any other plants, they are more surely Asco-
mycetes than many forms included in that group, and he sees no sufficient
reason why they should not be placed in the Pyrenomycetes as a group
co-ordinate with the Perisporiales, Hypocreales, etc. The bulk of the
work is occupied by diagnoses of new genera and species, and by plates
to illustrate the new forms.

Culture of Truffles. $ — Zacharewicz discusses the conditions that
affect the growth of these underground fungi in Vaucluse in connection
with different kinds of oak. For purposes of propagation " glands "
must be chosen from a fertile tree. The growth of cereals, leguminous
plants, and especially of vines, help to prepare the soil for the truffles.
The author recommends cutting the roots of the trees so as to encourage
horizontal growth. Certain chemical manures, lime, and methodical
watering are recommended.

Hyphomycetes.§ — G. Lindau includes a large number of genera in
the present fascicle, including Tilachlidium, Isaria, Stilbiim, Graph mm.
etc ; in the latter he has figured some of the more curious forms. Core-
mi am is retained as a genus with several species.

* Naturw. Zeitschr. Land. Forstw., vi. (1908) pp. 372-4. See also Bot. Centralbl.
cviii. (1908) p. 530.

t Mem. Amer. Acad. Arts Sci., xiii. No. 6 (1908) pp. 219-469 (44 pis.).

% Res. Vitic, xxix. (1908) pp. 300-3 and 322-5. See also Bot. Centralbl., cviii.
(1908) p. 553.

§ Rabenborst's Kryptogamen Flora, i. 9te Abt , lief. 110 (Leipzig, 1908) pp.
305-68.

G 2

84 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Parasitic Fungus on Rubus dumetorum.*— A fungus causing
deformation of the buds and flowers of this plant was detected by
H. Diedicke, and determined by H. and P. Sydovv to be a member of
the Hyphomycetes, Pc&palopsis deformans. Further observation and
examination have led to the discovery of pycnidia, and the fungus is
now placed among the Sphasropsidise as HapalospJwria deformans
g. et sp. n. The pycnidia are clear brown in colour with a thickish
wall that soon falls away and with globose hyaline spores. The myce-
lium had attacked the flowers and penetrated the anthers.

Studies in the Genus Gymnosporangium.t — Along with the
diagnoses of new species, Frank D. Kern gives a key for the determina-
tion of the teleutospore stage of the fungus. The study of the relation-
ship between host and parasite is rendered more complicated owing to
the fact that a number of different species are now known to exist on
the same host. The teleutospore stage in almost every species grows on
only one host — one of the Juniperacete, represented by four genera,
Sabina, Jwiiperus, Chemcecgparis, and Libocedrus. All the species are
hetercecious, and in none is there any uredo-form. In most of them
the development is accompanied by distortion of the leaves or branches.
Three new species are described from Alabama, Wisconsin, and Texas.

Smuts of Sorghum. £ — The grain and kernel smut Splwrotlma Sorghi,
and the head-smuts S. reiliana have been described by E. M. Freeman
and B. J. C. Umberger. S. Sorghi is the most widely distributed,
occurring almost universally wherever Sorghum is grown. Directions
are given for dealing with these pests ; hot-water treatment of the seed
being especially recommended as being both effective and inexpensive.

Higher Fungi. — M. E. Hard § has published a volume intended as a
guide to distinguish between poisonous and edible forms in the United
States. The author discusses the general classification with the structure
and life-history of fungi. Attention is given to individual species, and
a chapter follows on cooking and on cultivation of mushrooms. Good
photographs of the species accompany the text.

F. Kauffman || describes the methods of examining and preparing
specimens of the Higher Fungi, and then gives a list of the species
observed by him in West Prussia ; the form, locality, etc., of each species
is given ; the whole forming a valuable contribution to the knowledge
of German fungi. Only Hymenomycetes are included in the list and
the larger fleshy Discomycetes, especially the Helvellacese.

The same author ^ gives a further list of Boletinese from the same
territory. He divides this family into five genera : Suillus, Strobile-

* Ann. Mycol., vi. (1908) pp. 301-5 (12 figs.).

t Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxv. (1908) pp. 499-511.

j Bur. Plant Ind. U.S. Dept. Agric, Circ. No. 8 (1908). See also Bot. Centralbl.,
cviii. (1908) p. 577.

§ Ohio Library Co., 1908, 609 pp. (504 figs.). See also Bot. Centralbl., cviii.
(1908) p. 526.

|| Stadt. Oberrealschule Elbing Jahresb., 1906-7. See also Bot. Centralbl. cviii.
(1908) pp. 528-9.

^f Ber. Westpr. Bot. Zool. Ver. Danzig, 1907. See also Bot. Centralbl., cviii.
(1908) p. 529,

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 85

myces, Tylopilus, Cricunopus and Boletus. The latter genus he divides
according to the colour and form of stalk, pores and pore openings.
Kauffman has found thirty-four species of Boletus and a number of

varieties in West Prussia.

Mushrooms propagated from Spores.*-- An edible mushroom,
Agaricus (Psalliota) elvensis, was collected by M. C. Cooke and H. T.
Wharton in 1881, and broken parts of the plants were thrown out by
them into their respective gardens. Cooke writes an account of the
growth of this fungus a few years later on the place where he had thrown
the specimens, under the drip of a pear tree, and states that they grow
there year after year. Wharton has recently submitted specimens to
him grown in his garden under the same conditions. Cooke considers
that in both cases these mushrooms have been developed from fragments,
if not from spores. A. elvensis is a large and finely flavoured species,
and worthy of the attention of the mushroom cultivator.

Researches in Mycology. t — 0. Brefeld has issued a volume dealing
with the culture of fungi and with results obtained by him. He describes
the different methods of culture he has found useful for different types
of fungi, and then he restates his views as to the evolution and relation-
ships of the different groups. He derives the ascus from the sporangium,
the basidium from the conidial form ; he does not admit the existence
of sexuality in the higher fungi, and states that Stahl's work on Collema
remains unconfirmed.

Atlas of Edible and Poisonous Fungi. J — -A small Italian guide to
fungi has been published by Giovanni Negri. It contains sixty-three
coloured plates, representing all the common edible or poisonous forms,
and is intended to educate the general public in the selection or rejection
of fungi for food. In the preface he tells of the large numbers of people
that are poisoned every year by eating the wrong kinds ; he insists that
exact knowledge is necessary. 0. Mattirolo has written a preface ex-
plaining the aims of the book.

Classification of the BasidiomycetesJ — Much work has been done
ou this subject in recent years, and Leon Dufour has published a sketch
of the varying methods of classification of this group of plants adopted
by different authors, Fries, Brefeld, Juel, and Patouillard. The two
great groups of Protobasidiomycetes and Autobasidiomycetes recognised
by Brefeld form the basis of the modern ideas on the subject, though
further cytological work opens up new views of the relationships of the
many different forms. Dufour considers that systematists understand
now more fully the characters that are of importance, and they recognise
the lines on which any future scheme must be arranged.

Mycological Notes: N03. 30 and 31.|| — The first of these by
C. G. Lloyd, deals with certain genera and species of Phalloids, and

* Journ. Hort. Soc, xxxiv. (1908) pp. 218-21(1 fig.).

1 Untersuch. aus dem Gesanit. der Mykologie, xiv. Minister (Westf.), 1908
256 pp. See also Bot. Centralbl., cviii. (1908) pp. 416-18.

t Torino: Corso Raffaello, 1908, xxxv. and 106 pp. (63 col. pis.).

§ Rev. Gen. Bot., xx. (1908) pp. 417-28.

Ii Cincinnati 0., Feb. and Aug., 1908, pp. 331-411 (33 pis.).

86 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

photographs and descriptions are given of a number of little known
forms such as CJathrus Treubii and Simblum yrucile, both from Java.
Lloyd publishes a request for undeveloped eggs of Lysurus borealls.
He gives an account of the Gastroinycetes of Schweinitz's Herbarium,
correcting the determinations of specimens in several cases. In No. 30,
the Phalloids of Japan are dealt with, including the genera Phallus,
Mutinus, Lysurus, and Latemea. Additional notes on Lysurus Gardnerii
and Anthurus aserceformis are given. Lloyd prints photographs of the
homes of A. P. Morgan and of Linnasus, with a portrait of the former.

Handbook of Fungi.*— There bas recently been issued from the
British Museum a new edition of the Guide to Sowerby's Models of
Fungi. The book claims to be only a description of these, some 200 in
number, but it forms a good introduction to the field-study of the
larger fungi, as the models represent largely the more familiar and
conspicuous forms. Special attention is paid throughout to tbe cooking
properties, the main object of the models being to enable people to
distinguish between edible and poisonous species. A glossary of
technical terms is added.

Book of Garden Pests.t — P. Hooper Pearson has issued a useful
handbook of fungoid and insect pests that infest cultivated plants.
The plants are divided into sections of miscellaneous garden plants,
fruit trees, and vegetables, and arranged alphabetically. Under each
plant are recorded the fungi and insects that cause diseases, with short
accounts of each and the most practical methods of dealing with them.
A full account is given of insecticides and fungicides. The book is
well illustrated by drawings and photographs, and forms one of a series
of Handbooks of Practical Gardening-.

',-•

Plant Diseases 4 — As many Baldwin apples are marred by the
presence of fruit spots, Charles Brooks has made a study of the subject,
and finds that the spotting is due to a fungus, CyJindrosporium pomi
sp. n. Tbe fruits are attacked in July or early in August, probably
from spores developed on apples that may have lain on the ground all
winter. If the apples are infected at an early stage the fungus is cut
off from the apples by a layer of cork cells, forming a barrier to its
f urther development. If the attack supervenes later, when the apples are
more mature, the fungus develops rapidly and causes the browning and
drying of the host tissue. Spraying with Bordeaux late in June or early
in July is recommended.

Ugo Brizi § reports on samples of grain sent for examination to the
Agricultural School of Milan. He had noted the low percentage of
germination and tbe poor growth that resulted from sowing the seed.
The grains were, to outward appearance, healthy, but microscopic
examination showed the presence of fungal mycelium which had
probably gained entrance at an early stage of seed development.
Cultures determined the fungus to be AsperyiUus fumiyatus. Brizi

* British Museum (Nat. Hist.) : Wortbington G. Smith, 1908, 85 pp. (91 figs.)

t London: John Lane, 1908, 216 pp.

t Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xxxv. (1908) pp. 423-56 (7 pis.).

§ Reale 1st. Lomb., xli. (1908) pp. 668-71.

ZOOLOGY AXD BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 87

found that the appearance of the seeds corresponded with the pellagra
seeds of maize ; he tested their toxic properties on eight mice, four of
which died in the space of three days. He compares the fungus with
th" mycelium observed in the seed of darnel grass.

C. J. J. van Hall ami A. AY. Drest* describe the disease of cacao
caused by Golletotrichum luosificum sp. n. The spores of the fungus
alight on the buds and penetrate the young tissue, inducing abnormal
growth of the branch, on which are fully developed the fungus pustules.
If a fruit bud is infested, the mycelium lodges in the ovary and the
fruit suffers from hypertrophy. Many of the apple trees have been
killed by the fungus and the yield of fruit seriously affected. The
authors give in detail their various culture experiments, and recommend
methods of dealing with the disease.

Ch. Bernard f reports on the parasitic fungi of several cultivated
plants. On Thea assamica, Pestalozzia palmarum works considerable
harm by destrovimr the leaves. Cutting off affected leaves and
preventive spraying with Bordeaux mixture are both advisable.
Hi/pochnus Then, forms felt-like growths on twigs and leaves. Although
entirely superficial, it weakens the tree and renders it more liable to
injury from other parasites. Guignardia Them forms spots on the leaves
similar to those caused by the Pestalozzia, the methods recommended
for dealing with these fungi are all the same, destroying the affected
parts and spraying with Bordeaux mixture as a preventive.

On Kicksia elastic a the most troublesome fungus was a species of
I 'apnodium, which lived on the honey-dew of Aphides, and covered the
leaves with a felt of dark-coloured mycelium. In this case the insect
had to be destroyed, and the most effective agent was a petroleum emul-
sion ; washing with water also proved useful.

Paul Hariot $ writes on the Oidiam of oak trees which appeared in
France towards the end of 1907, and which has spread rapidly, doing
extensive damage to young trees. He discusses the various theories as to
the importation of the disease and explanations of the sudden outbreak ;
the fungus had been noted in previous years, but only to a very limited
extent.

Thierman § describes an epidemic of Sclerotinia bar car am on the
bilberry in Tharandt. It was accompanied by a wide-spread attack of
caterpillars on the same plants, and the writer considers that the cater-
pillars helped to disseminate the spores as they crawled over the leaves.
The berry harvest was completely destroyed.

A number of diseases have been reported || from Nebraska by various
workers. W. V. Pool discusses several diseases of tomatoes. Altemaria
fasciculata causes black rot at the blossom-end of the fruit ; inoculation
experiments proved that only ripe fruits took the disease. A black rot
of apples was found by L. B. Walker to be caused by a Spharopsis which

* Rev. Trav. Bot. NeerL, iv. (1908) pp. 243-319 (17 pis.). _

t Bull. Pep. Agric. Indes NeerL, vi. (1907) 55 pp. (4 pis.). See also Zeitscnr.
Pflanzenkr., xviii. (1908) pp. 240-3.

t Comptes Rendus, cxlvii. (1908) pp. S16-18.

§ Ann. MycoL, vi. (1908) pp. 352-3 (1 fig.). ■

Ann. Rep. Agric. Exp. stat. Univ. Nebraska, Jan. 1903. See also Bot. daz.
xlvi. (1903) pp. 391-2.

88 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

differs from the ordinary form in the size of the pycnidia and spores.
F. 1). Heald describes various types of barley-smuts, with notes on ex-
periments as to the best methods of treatment ; the percentage of ger-
mination was lessened by all the substances used except hot water.
F. A. Wolf found Pestalozzia uvicola on ripe grapes ; the spores were
borne in pycnidia and not in pustules, as in other members of the genus.
F. I). Heald and W. V. Pool examined the mould of maple syrup. It
is Torula saccharma, and grows in pure cultures on media of varying
composition ; concentration of the sugar solution in which the fungus
was growiug did not affect the size of spores or hyphae.

F. W. Neger* discusses the mortality among pines in Saxony and
elsewhere. The trees show first symptoms of declining by losing their
needles and smaller branches. The causes, he considers, are the presence
of smoke to a small extent, occasionally the growth of the fungus Corti-
cium amorphum, but chiefly the disease is due to Armillaria mellea, which
attacks and kills the roots.

A. W. Borthwick | reports a disease on Picea pungens ; an Ascomy-
cetous fungus resembling Gucurbitaria attacks the buds and induces
black conical swellings : the bud dies off or produces a twisted and
cankered shoot. Another Ascomycete was signalled on the leaves of
Abies pectinata ; the leaves turn brown, and considerable damage is done
to the trees.

G. H. Pethybridge and E. H. Bowers $ have made a special study of
the dry-rot of the potato tuber. This disease had appeared on a farm
in Kilkenny, and caused considerable loss in the field and among the
stored potatoes. Observation and experiments left no doubt that the
disease was due to Fusarium Solani, of which the parasitic nature was
fully demonstrated. Advice is given as to measures for checking the
spread of the disease.

H. Grisson § has examined the canker of rose trees, formerly thought
to be caused by frost, and finds that it is due to the presence of a
fungus, Goniothyrium Fi/ckelii, the pycnidia! form of Leptosplmria
Goniothyrium, which is frequently found on dead twigs of Rubus. The
development of the disease is described. The author recommends
cutting off the cankered twigs and the coating of the wound with wood-
tar or grafting- wax.

Grisson also reports a disease of blackberry of a similar nature. The
canker in this case is caused by a species of Goniothyrium not yet
described, which he names 0. tumcefaciens. It causes excrescences the
size of a pea or a walnut on the shoots of the blackberry.

From the Department of Agriculture and Technical Instruction for
Ireland || there have been issued two popular papers on black scab
in potatoes and mildew on gooseberries. The first-mentioned is
spreading widely over England and Scotland, and doing very great
damage ; it has not yet appeared in Ireland, so the paper is written as a

* Tharandt. Forstl. Jahrb., lviii. (1908) pp. 201-25 (3 pis. and 2 figs.). See also
Bot. Centralbl., cviii (1908) pp. 495-6.

t Trans. Bot. Soc. Edin., xxiii. (1907) pp. 232-3.

% Econ. Proc. Roy. Dublin Soc. i. (1908) pp. 547-58 (1 pi.).

§ Joum. Hort. Soc, xxxiv. (1908) pp. 222-30 (4 figs.)

II Dept. Agric. and Tech. Inst. Ireland, Leaflets No. 76 and 91 (1908).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 89

warning to growers to avoid buying diseased seed. It is otherwise with
the American gooseberry mildew which made its appearance first of all
in Ireland. The appearance of the disease is described, and prompt
treatment recommended in order to check the disease or to stamp it out.

Schaffnit-Bromberg * gives a summary of plant-diseases noted in
Posen and West Prussia during 1907. Most damage was done to
cereals by various species of rust and smuts. The survival of the
uredospores of Puccinia dispersa was completely proved. Late sowing
of seed is recommended. Notes are added as to the efficiency of
the various methods of destroying the fungus. Instructions are also
given as to the spraying of fruit trees, etc., and as to the choice of
immune potatoes for seed.

0. Knischewsky | has given a review of the diseases of tropical
economic plants in recent years. On cocoa PhytopMhora and Nectria
Theobromm have worked great damage. Catling away diseased parts of
the host and thinner planting of the trees are recommended. Hymnm-
chmte noxia destroys a number of useful trees iu Samoa, Java, and New
(iiiinea. Cocoa, breadfruits, Eryihrina Cassia, and others, suffer from
its depredations. It attacks the base of the stem and gradually encircles
the tree. Pestalozzia palmarum and Lastadia Thece are recorded on
the tea plant, PhytopMhora on tobacco, and Septogloewn Manihotis on
Manihot. The latter tree is also attacked by an undetermined fungus
that destroys the roots and base of the stem.

Aranzadi, Telesfoeo de — Hongos observados en Cataluna el otono de 1907.
(Fungi noted in Cataluna in the autumn of 1907.)

[A list of Basidiomycetes.] Bol. Soc. Hist. Nat., viii. (1908) pp. 351-6.

Dietel, Paul — Uredinaceae paraensis. (Uredineae from South America, several
of them new species.) Bol. Mus. Qoeld., v., pp. 262-7 (1908).

Hansen, Emil Che. — Rechercb.es sur la physologie et la morphologie des
ferments alcooliques. (Research on the physiology and morphology of alcoholic
ferments.) C.R. Lab. Carlsb., vii. (1908) pp. 179-217 (10 figs.).

Hohnel, F. von — Mykologiscb.es xviii.-xxi.

[Notes on species of Leptosphoeria, Cladosterigma Fusisponim, Spharia
cooperta and Sporidesmium hypodermium ; the latter is a species of
Pestalozzia.] Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr., lvii. (1907) pp. 321-4.

See also Bot. Centralbl, cviii. (1908) pp. 494-5.
Piedallu, Andre— Sur une levure qui agit sur les corps gras, son role dans
le tannage a l'huile.

I A yeast which acts on fatty hodies, and its role in the process of tanning
by oil.] C.R. Soc. Biol, lxv. (1908) pp. 114-16.

Quilter, H.— A Contribution to the Micro-Fungi of Leicestershire.
[Ninety-four species are included in the list.]

Leicester Lit. Phil. Soc., xii. (1908) pp. 70-4.
Rehm, H. — Ascomycetes novi.

[Discomycetes and Pyrenomycetes from America, Europe, India and Aus-
tralia. The new genera described are : Pleiopatella near to Tryblidium
and Mollisiopsis allied to Mollisia, both from North America.]

Ann. Mycol, vi. (1908) pp. 313-25.
Rota-Rossi, G.— Terza contribuzione alia micologia della Provincia di Bergamo.
[Third contribution to the mvcology of Bergamo.]

Atti 1st. Bot. Univ. Pavia, ser. 2, xiii. (1907) pp. 195-212.
See also Bot. Centralbl, cviii. (1908) p. 418.

Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr., xviii. (1903) pp. 272-1. t Tom. cit,. pp, 276-85.

90 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Rouppert, Casimie — Discomycetum species novae tres.

[Three new sx^ecies : Sphc&rosoma Jcmczewskianum,Lachnea Chclchoivskiana
and Cubonia Niepolomicensis, are described.]

Bull. Int. Acad. Sci. Cracovie, 1908, pp. 651-2.
Schionning, H.— On Torula in English Eeer Manufacture.

C.R. Lab. Carlsb., vii. (1908) pp. 138-78.
Stranak, Fe. — Studie o temnostni nore jeskyn sloupskych. (Study of the myco-
logical flora of caverns.)

[Fungi from the caverns in Moravia.]

S.B. Ges. Wiss. Math. Nat. CI., 1907, Vestnik, part xii., 41 pp. (text figs.).
See also Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxiii. (1908) pp. 253-4.
Theissen, F. — Novitates Rio-grandenses.

[New species of Xylaria, Hypoxylon, Stilbohypoxylon, Penzigia, Ustulina,
Nummularia and Rosellinia, from Rio Grande do Sul (Brazil).]

Ann. Mycol., vi. (1908) pp. 341-52 (4 figs.).
Tiraboschi, Carlo — TJlteriori osservazioni sulle muffe del granturco guesto.
[Species of Aspergillus, Cladosporium, Hormodendron and Dlplodia are
discussed.] Ann. Bot., vii. (1908) pp. 1-31 (1 pi.).

Zahlbruckner, A. — Schedae ad " Kryptogamas exsiccatas" editae a Museo Pala-
tine- Vindobonensi. (Fungi, Cen. xv.-xvi.)

[The species are listed and accompanied by full bibliography.]

Ann. k.k. Nat. Hofmuseinns, Wien, 1907, pp. 81-102.

Lichens.

(By A. Lorrain Smith, F.L.S.)

European Lichens.* — H. Olivier publishes the first fascicles of this
comprehensive work. There is a very short introduction, a more full
and general discussion being promised at a later stage. Olivier begins
with the old classification of heteromerous lichens and gives the first
place among these to the fruticulose, then the foliaceous. Of these he
records for Europe 310 species. The largest number has been found in
France, 243 in all. In the British Isles there have been found 206, so
that 104 are wanting to complete the list. A key is published of the
genera, and similar keys to the species precede each genus. No detailed
diagnosis is given beyond that contained in the keys, but a certain
amount of bibliography accompanies the name, and the habitat and
localities are added.

American Lichens.t — G. Lindau has determined a number of
lichens from the Andes of Peru and from Colombia, collected by
Weberbauer and Pehlke. The collection, although small, shows the
different lichen vegetation in these two territories. Lindau describes
four new species.

Baron i, E. — Seconda contribuzione alia Lichenologia della Toscana. (A list of
118 species recorded from Tuscany.) Ann. Mycol., vi. (1908) pp. 331-40.

Galloe, D. — Danske Likeners Okologi. (Oncological studv of Danish Lichens.)

Bot. Tidsskr., xxviii. (1908)"pp. 285-372 (14 pis.).

Hue, A. — Heppiearum ultimae e familiae Collemacearum tribubus nonnullas species
morpholc-gice et anatomice elaboravit. (Some species of Heppia, the concluding
family of Collemacese, described anatomically and morphologically.)
[A number of new species described and a key of the genus given.]

Mem. Soc. Nat. Sci. Nat. Math. Cherb., xxxvi. (1906-7) pp. 1-44.

* Mem. Soc. Sci. Nat. Cherb., xxxvi. (1906-7) pp. 77-274.

t Eng. Bot. Jahrb., xlii. (1908) pp. 49-60. See also Bot. Centralbl. cviii. (1908)
pp. 553-4.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 01

M i-.rril, G. K.— Li:hen Nctes, No. 7. (A list of lichens from the Upper Yukon
collected by J. Macoun.) Bryologist, xi. (1908) pp. 105-11.

Wilson, A., & J. A. Wheldon— Inverness-shire Cryptogams. (A large number
of lichens are included in this list.) Journ. Hot., xlvi. (1908) pp. 353-G.

Zahlbecckjee, A.— Schedae ad ' Kryptogamas exsiccatas ' editae a Museo Pala-

tino Vindobonensi. Lichenes (Decades 35 38).

[Diagnoses are given of some of the species and
bibliography of all those listed.]

Ann. h.k. Nat. Hofmuseums, Wien,
1907, pp. 107-17.

,, ,, Lichenes Amazonici. (First contribution to the Lichen

flora of Brazil.)

Bol, Mus. Goeld., v. pp. 258-61 (1908).

Schizophyta.
Schizomycetes.

Elastico-tropic Appearances in the Growth of Bacillus anthracis
and Allied Bacilli in Serum Medium.* — P. Eisenberg considers that the
peculiar feathery growth of B. anthracis aud other organisms ou inspis-
sated serum must he regarded as a meau of the elastic-pulling force,
influenced by two factors — the force of gravity and the drying of the
medium towards the edges ; the pulling forces being directed respectively
from above vertically and from without horizontally, giving the branches
a resultant diagonal direction. The firmness of the serum and the strong
aerophilia of the organism limit the branched growth almost entirely to
the surface, thus contrasting with the growth of B. Zopfii in the substance
of gelatin.

Tetragenus tardissimus.f — G. Altona has isolated a new variety of
micrococcus from the blood and liver of guinea-pigs which had died in
his laboratory at Sassari, after a wasting illness of about twenty days 1
duration. The organism grew as a small non-motile micrococcus arranged
in tetrads and usually inclosed in a capsule ; it stains readily with anilin
dyes and by Gram's method ; it does not grow below 15° C. and flourishes
best at 37° C, but on various media the growth is slight ; in broth it
forms a fine dusty deposit, the medium remaining clear ; if blood-serum
is added to the broth the growth is more abundant and the fluid is
clouded ; it does not coagulate milk ; on agar it forms small round
granular colonies with jagged margins ; on serum-agar the colonies are
larger and may become confluent ; on nutrient gelatin growth is scanty
and slow, appearing only after 2 to 3 months, the colonies bavin _
brown tint and granular structure ; the gelatin is not liquefied ; glucose
is not fermented. Animal inoculation gave negative results.

Organisms of the Gaertner Group.}— AY. I). Savage finds that
fuchsin-agar and lactose-bile-salt-neutral-red-agar are media which allow
the organisms of the Gaertner group to be sharply differentiated from
those of the B. coll group, and are valuable for isolation purposes.
Malachite-green 0*05 p.c. exerts an inhibitory action upon the growth
of B. coll, and the author obtained gocd results in the isolation of

* Centralbl. Bakt,, lte Abt. Orig. xlviii. (1908) p. 125.

f Tom. cit.. p. 42. J Rep. Local Govt. Board, 190G-7. p. 25-3.

s

92 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Gaertner organisms when dulcite broth containing ' 05 p.c. of rnala-
chite-green was employed. In view of the possibility that not all the
members of this group will flourish in • 05 p.c. malachite-green broth,
the author advises that direct plating methods should also be used.

Animal inoculation methods are not trustworthy, since it is not
uncommon to obtain Gaertner organisms from the heart-blood of animals
that have been inoculated with organisms other than those of the Gaertner
group ; the pathogenic effects of the B. coli group may entirely mask
those produced by the Gaertner group ; and it is also possible that
Gaertner group organisms may be present but non-virulent.

The author examined the intestinal contents of some healthy animals :
three bullocks, six pigs, and one calf ; he found in the bullocks no
organisms resembling those of the Gaertner group ; from five pigs
organisms culturally resembling B. paratyphoid A were isolated ; only
four bacilli were isolated from the pigs which culturally were allied to the
other Gaertner sub-groups, and of these one did not ferment dulcite, while
the other three fermented saccharose ; none of these organisms were
agglutinated by sera obtained from rabbits immunised from well-known
members of the Gaertner group. The calf showed both in the colon
and caecum numerous organisms culturally indistinguishable from the
ordinary Gaertner group bacteria, but when tested against different
immune sera these organisms were not agglutinated ; they were, how-
ever, highly pathogenic, and the author considers that further research
is needed to determine to what extent these organisms are common in
calves, and whether their presence is hurtful to those using such animals.

Bacterial Studies of Milk.* — W. G. Savage finds that streptococci
were present in the majority of samples of milk taken from healthy
cows ; no cocci resembling the Diplococcus intracellular is meningitidis
Avere met with ; staphylococci were found in large numbers in most of
the plates made from cetitrifuged milk deposits, and were recognised as
two distinct classes ; bacilli were only occasionally met with, and in
scanty numbers.

The author groups the streptococci morphologically, according to
length of chain, into short, medium, and long, and biologically according
to thek reaction with different sugars and alcohol media, and also
according to their pathogenicity, as shown by their action on mice,
although in this respect, out of twenty-five streptococci, the virulence of
which was tested, the results were in every case negative.

The author finds that the mere presence of streptococci bears no
relation to the existence of local condition of the cow, the number of
calves, or the stage of pregnancy ; but there seems to be a connection
between local condition and the presence of a certain kind of strepto-
coccus. This variety forms long chains ; stains by Gram's method ;
grows at 21° C. and at 37° C. ; clots milk within 3 days ; ferments
lactose, saccharose, and raffinose (and usually salicin), whereas mannite,
coniferin, and inulin are unaffected. This organism was isolated from
the milk of seven cows, three of which had ulcerated teats, and a fourth
had nodules at base of two teats.

Referring to the staphylococci present in milk, the author considers

* Rep. Local Govt. Board, 1906-7, p. 205.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 93

they are without significance. In the milk from sis healthy cows and
three cases of mastitis, diphtheroid bacilli were met with, but were
probably of no significance.

Considering the presence of leucocytes in milk, the author found
they varied in number within very wide limits, independent of the age
of the cow, the number of calves, the period since calving, and the stage
of pregnancy; but present or past mastitis causes a high count of
leucocytes.

Pyogenic Cocci.*— F. W. Andrewes and M. H. Gordon agree with
other observers in failing with Wright's capillary pipette method to obtain
evidence of any bactericidal effect exerted upon Staphylococcus pyogenes
aureus (1) by human blood ; (2) by normal and immune rabbit's
blood ; (3) by normal and immune horse serum ; or (4) by normal
horse serum in the presence of living leucocytes.

The authors find that S. pyogenes aureus rapidly perishes at 37° C.
in distilled water, tap- water, or in water containing salts or organic
substances incapable of serving as nutriment for the cocci ; but that
the addition of a trace of proteid material permits survival and multi-
plication of cocci, which is apparent within two hours. By exposing
8. pyogenes aureus to normal rabbit's blood, a marked bactericidal
action was noted during the first few hours of contact, but which was
exhausted by the end of 3 to 4 hours ; the action was more marked
with immune rabbit's blood. Previous exposure for half an hour
to 55-56° C. diminishes this action. By previously saturating the
defibrinated rabbit's blood with killed cocci, the bactericidal substance
was removed. Similar results were obtained by using serum in place of
blood, and also by employing human blood and human serum.

Micro-organisms in Sewer Air.f — F. W. Andrewes finds that
streptococci, isolated from drain air, correspond biologically with those
of sewage, and only to a slight extent with the streptococci abounding
in fresh air ; the type of streptococci most abundant in fresh air are not
found in the air of sewers and drains. The author has also shown that
the bacilli of the colon group, obtained from drain air, correspond
biologically with those of sewage, and can only rarely be isolated from
fresh air.

When cultures of Bacillus prodigiosus were added to the contents of
drains under suitable conditions of splashing, the organism can be
recovered from the drain air at distances of 50 feet and 390 feet from
the point at which they were added to the sewage.

The author concludes that under certain circumstances sewage may
give up its bacteria to sewer air.

Micro-organisms and Rheumatic Fever.J — T. J. Horder finds that
in cases of rheumatic fever, no micro-organisms can be grown in
cultures made from the blood during life, or from the heart-blood,
endocardial vegetations, pericardial and pleural exudates in fatal cases ;
that in most cases film preparations are negative.

Cultures, made during life, from the blood in cases of malignant

* Rep. Local Govt. Board, 1906-7, p. 141.
f Torn, cit., p. 183. J Tom. cit., p. 279.

54 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

endocardites yield DO p.c. of positive results. The organisms thus
obtained are not of the nature of terminal infection, but are causal
elements of the disease. In 77 p.c. of cases streptococci are found ;
Pfeiffer's (Bacillus infiuenzcc) in 6 p.c. The streptococci conform to the
salivary and fsecal types, defined by Gordon and Houston, and differ
little from the saprophytic streptococci of the mouth and intestine ;
when isolated from cases of malignant endocarditis they can reproduce
the disease when injected intravenously into rabbits, and can be re-
covered from the lesions. Similar results can be obtained by injecting
saprophytic streptococci, isolated from normal human saliva or fasces.

New Acid-fast Bacillus.* — G. Basile isolated from a case of
gangrene of the lung a non-pathogenic acid-fast bacillus resembling
B. tuberculosis in its cultural characters, its morphological aspect, and
in its staining reactions. The chief differences were that it was de-
colorised a by 2 p.c. alcoholic solution of lactic acid in a few minutes,
while Koch's bacillus resisted for half an hour ; it grew readily in
broth, or on gelatin or glycerin-agar in 24 hours, and was only feebly
and locally pathogenic to guinea-pigs.

Anaerobic Pseudo-coli Bacillus.f— M. Jimgano isolated from the
stools of an infant an essential anaerobe which morphologically might
be mistaken for B. coll. In fascal matter and on solid media, it presents
itself as a coccobacillus with rounded ends, staining less deeply in the
centre. In liquid media bacillary forms predominate. It is easily
stained, but not by Gram's method. It is motionless, and forms terminal
spores. It does not form gas or indol, nor coagulate milk. When
injected into the peritoneal sac of guinea-pigs a definite capsule is
developed. It is pathogenic to guinea-pigs, and is very resistant to
thermal and chemical action.

Bacillus parvus liquefaciens.J — M. Jungano describes a new
organism which has the following characters : It is an essential an-
aerobe, is small, and very polymorphic. It stains with the usual anilin
dyes, and is Gram-positive ; in old cultures the organism does not stain
uniformly. Other positive characters are : that it coagulates milk,
liquefies gelatin, is pathogenic to guinea-pigs, forms acid, and has
considerable vitality.

R. Gee ig- Smith— Opsonisation from a bacterial point of view, and Opsonic
Technique. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxxiii. (1908) pp. 689-700.

* Giorn. Internat. Sci. Med. Naples, xxx. (1908) p. 577. See also Brit. Med.
Journ., 1908, ii. epit. 341.

t C.R Soc. Biol. Paris, lxv. (1908) pp. 457-9 (2 figs.).
t Tom. cit., pp. 618-20.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

95

MICROSCOPY.

A. Instruments, Accessories, &c*
(1) Stands.

Reichert's Demonstration Microscope. - ]"— This instrument (No. 115
in the maker's catalogue), is shown in fig-. 7 5 and will be easily under-
stood from the illustration. A prominent feature is the hand-grip bow.

Fig. 7.

Watson's " Standard " Microscope. £ — -This instrument (fig. 8) is
of a new type, in which the milled head of the fine-adjustment is placed
at the side of the limb. The foot and limb are of solid brass. The
coarse-adjustment is of the diagonal rackwork and spiral pinion form.
The fine-adjustment, one rotation of the milled head of which raises

* This subdivision contains (1) Stands; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives: 5(3)
Illuminating and other Apparatus ; (4) Photomicrography ; (5) Microscopical
Optics and Manipulation ; (6) Miscellaneous.

t C. Keichert, Vienna, Catalogue, Mikroscope, No. 36 (1908) p. 46.

t Watson and Sons, Ltd., Catalogue, 1909, pp. 54-5 (fig.).

96

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

or lowers the body « Ju? is effected by a coned pin of steel, a steel roller
being kept in contact with the cone by a reactionary spring. The body-
tube is 145 mm. long, and by extension of the draw-tube is 225 mm.

Fig. 8.

The stage, 3J in. scpiare, is covered with ebonite and fitted with grip
stage springs. The instrument is adapted for either comround,
rackwork substage, or spiral focusing substage.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICKOSCOPY, ETC.

97

Watson s Club Portable Microscope.*— This instrument (fig. 9),
adapted for travelling purposes, is rigid and compact, and can be stowed
away m its case without taking any parts to pieces. The legs fold back-

Fig. 9.

wards around the limb ; the mirror tail-piece pushes upwards through
the stage, and there is sufficient space in the leather case for eve-pieces
and objectives.

* Watson and Sons, Ltd., Catalogue, 1909, p. 66 (1 fig.).

Feb. 17th, 1909 "

98

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Watson's "Simplex" Dissecting Microscope.*— This stand (fig. 10)
is adapted for the firm's aplanatic magnifiers mounted for dissecting.
For focusing it is supplied with a spiral-screw adjustment, and it is

Fig. 10.

fitted with a glass disk for stage, a plane mirror and matt opal reflector,
and hand-rests.

03) Eye-pieces and Objectives.

Bifocal or Multifocal Lenses.f — Under the title of " An Interesting
Lens " the English Mechanic describes an improved method of manu-
facturing bifocal lenses. It will be seen that the method may be applied
to multifocal lenses. The process consists in so uniting two or more
bodies of glass, differing in index or kind, while both bodies are in a
molten state, and in so shaping the united bodies, while molten or
plastic, that bifocal, achromatic, and compound or toric lenses can be
produced by simple grinding. By uniting white and coloured glasses of
tie same or different indices a lens may be produced having a coloured
and a clear portion. By joining the different kinds of glass in such a
manner while both are in a molten state the blank, from which the
tinished lens will be subsequently formed, may be blown, pressed, rolled,
or otherwise shaped into spherical, cylindrical, or curved shapes, as may

* Watson and Sons, Ltd., Catalogue 1909, p. 70 (1 fig.).

t English Mechanic, lxxxviii. (Nov. 20, 1908) pp. 367-8 (6 figs.)

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

H!

be desired, Although it is possible to form the blank by rolling or
pressing, the inventor of the process, W. J. Seymour, of the Merry
Optical Co., Kansas City, prefers to form the blank by blowing bbe
united bodies. He accomplishes this by gathering on the end' of a
blowpipe a body of glass of a certain kind, or index, oi colour, and by
then dipping it into a pot of molten glass of a different kind, index, or
colour. In the action of dipping care must be taken that the molten
glass moves progressively along the body, thereby washing away any
air-bubbles, foreign matter, or imperfections on the surface of such
body ; this, moreover, insures a perfect union between the two layers.
The body of glass, consisting of the two uniting layers, may be shaped
by blowing alone, but preferably by blowing in a suitable mould in the
manner well known in the art of blowing, so as to insuri regularity and

12.

Fig. 11.

Fig. 13.

. 14.

uniformity of contour (fig. 11). After the shell, consisting of two or
more layers, has been produced a section or blank (shown by dotted
lines in figs. 12, 13, 14) is cut from the body of this shell. This section
is then ground so as to form a lens (shown in full lines in figs. 12,
13, 14) which is made up of a plurality of kinds or colours of glass. In
making bifocal lenses the blank is ground to the shape shown in full
lines, so that the different focal centres are placed in the desired parts
of the finished lens. Thus a lens is secured of as many focal powers as
desired, the number being dependent upon the number of glass layers
of different kinds, index, or colour, which have been formed into one
integral body, the arrangement of the focal centres being adjusted by
the grinding process. It will be understood that in grinding a bifocal
lens from a blank which has been formed by this process one or more
of the layers of which the blank is composed may be cut entirely away,

n 2

100 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

except for a portion of the lens surface, and thus a lens will be produced
having a number of foci. In fig. 14 is shown an achromatic lens formed
by grinding the outer surfaces of the blank, the uniting surfaces between
the two layers being properly curved in forming the shell.

(5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation.

Microscopic Measurements.* — A correspondent, J. D., in the
English Mechanic, points out the too frequent omission of information
as to the real sizes of objects delineated in book-illustrations of micro-
scopic objects. Even when a size is given (e.g. X 200), such a state-
ment is incomplete unless the particular combination of the eye-piece
and objective used is stated. The writer suggests that it might be
desirable to give the magnification obtained in microns (e.g. 100//.).
He also emphasizes the convenience of the squared eye-piece micrometer,
and points out that it may even be used for angular measurement. If
the left-hand bottom corner of a group of squares be regarded as the
centre of a circle, radii may be imagined intersecting the horizontal and
perpendicular lines where they cross one another. Taking the bottom
line as radius, the tangential perpendiculars may be expressed as decimal
fractions of this radius, from which decimals the included angles can be
found by inspection in any table of natural tangents, and other angles
thereby estimated. On the same principle the angles round any point
of intersection, within the group of squares, may be easily determined
and tabulated, if likely to be of use ; and for angles above 90°, the
choice of a suitable centre, conjoined with a little additional calculation,
is all that is necessary.

(6) Miscellaneous.

Gage's Microscopy.t — The Microscope : an Introduction to Micro-
scopic Methods and to Histology, by S. H. Gage, has quite recently
reached the loth edition. The"" work has been practically re-written,
and though retaining the well-known features which have rendered it
so popular and valuable, a vast amount of information as to recent
advances and improvements in Microscopy and Technique has been
added, more especially in the direction of Histology. To enter into
detail as to its merits would nowadays be superfluous, but it is per-
missible to state that this text-book will be found of the greatest service
to teacher as well as student, whether they be of the " brass and glass "
or " bug and slug " tendency.

Cholesterol, Fluid Crystals, and Myelin Forins.:}: — C. Powell
White draws the following conclusions from facts ascertained after many
complicated experiments. The potassium salts of " oily " fatty acids can
be obtained in a crystalline fluid condition, which probably represents
a hydrate of the salt. In aqueous solutions of these salts (where the
corresponding acid is insoluble in water) cholesterol and some other
substances give myelin forms, which are due to variations in surface

* English Mechanic, lxxxviii. (1908) p. 356.

t Comstock Publishing Co., Ithaca, New York, 1903, 345 pp. (258 figs.).

X Med. Chron. (1908) pp. 1-19.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 101

tension acting on the cholesterol fatty acid mixture. This mixture is
quite different from the correspondim: ester, the acid presumably existing
as an "acid of crystallisation." Anisotropic globules and myelin forms
occurring in the tissues are, therefore, no evidence of the presence of
oleates or cholesteryl esters as suggested by Adaini, Aschoff. and others.
Anisotropic globules and anisotropic myelin forms are probably identical
in structure, though differing in shape ; it is possible that their presence
in some tumours has given rise to the suggestion that " parasites " were
responsible for the condition. Finally, the association of cholesterol and
fatty acid in unstable combination being so frequent, it may be deduced
that cholesterol lias an important place in the processes of fat metabolism.

Crystals in Tumours.* — C. Powell White, as the result of various
micro-chemical experiments, comes to the following conclusions : (1)
That crystals consisting of a loose combination of cholesterin with fatty
acids, lecithin, or other substances occur in or among the cells of
malignant tumours, and in some other conditions. (2) These crystals
seem to be associated with cell proliferation rather than with cell
degeneration, in which condition simpler crystals of fat, fatty acids, or
cholesterin are more usual. (3) There are grounds for supposing that
cholesterin may be in some way associated with the regulation of cell
proliferation.

Crystals in Fat-cells.f — T. Lorrain Smith and C. Powell White
conclude that the crystals found in fat-cells, hitherto spoken of as
margarine, margaric acid, stearic acid, etc., are in reality those of
neutral fats.

Quekett Microscopical Club.— The 451st Ordinary Meeting was
held on November 6, 1908, the President, Professor E. A. Minchin,
M.A., F.Z.S., in the chair. Reference was made to the death, on
October 11, of Mr. W. Saville Kent. F.L.S., F.Z.S., etc., author of the
well known manual of Infusoria, The President exhibited and described
a number of preparations of blood-parasites— trypanosomes and trypano-
plasms— of fresh-water fish, chiefly from the Norfolk Broads. It was
supposed that the infection of the fish was effected by leeches. The
group was entirely confined to the Vertebrates ; nearly every known
species was the host of a trypanosome, but very many are quite harmless.
Mr. T. A. O'Donohoe read a note on " The Photographic Evolution of
the Fine Structure of the Podura Scale." He had photographed the
fine mycelioid structure and minute horizontal filaments joining the
vertical lines described by Mr. Nelson (see this Journal, 1907, p. 400).
Mr. F. P. Smith contributed a paper on "Some British Spiders taken
in 1908." He also gave a lecture, illustrated with lantern slides, on
" Flies, from several points of view." The " points of view " dealt with
were those of the man at the museum, the individual who recognises
some 40,000 species of flies, then the man with the Microscope and the
man with the pocket-lens. Following these were the man at the [arm,
the medical man, and the man in the street, and the final view-point—
a consideration of those creatures which assisted in the destruction ot
superabundant flies.

* Journ. Pathol, and Bact., xiii. pp. 3-10. t Med. Chron., 1907.

102 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

The 452nd Ordinary Meeting was held on December 4. A new
growing cell for use with the highest powers, designed by Mr. A. A. C.
Eliot Merlin, F.R.M.S., was exhibited by Messrs. Baker. Mr. D. J.
Scourfield, F.Z.S., F.R.M.S., gave a lecture, illustrated with lantern
slides, on "The Locomotion of Microscopic Aquatic Organisms." The
organisms discussed included Amaba, flagellated organisms, and those
with cilia. Other more specialised types were dealt with, such as those
with medusoid motions, the methods adopted by Nematodes and by
Salpa, and the highest form of locomotion— that due to appendages
actuated by muscles— in more complex forms.

At the 453rd Ordinary Meeting, held on January 1, 1909, Mr.
A. Earland gave a lecture, illustrated by a large number of specimens
under Microscopes, on ''The Selective" Powers of Arenaceous Fora-
minifera." The preparations shown were chosen to show the great
diversity of structure and technical skill exhibited in the tests of this
group. Nearly every species has well marked characteristics, which
serve to distinguish its test from those of closely allied forms, and
nearly all possess the power of selecting material, which, when considered
in relation to the extremely low organisation of these animals, can only
be regarded as wonderful. This selective power reaches its highest
development in the genus Technitella, but varies in different species. A
new and as yet undescribed species of this genus was shown, which
built its test entirely of calcareous plates from Echinoderms.

Rules for the Sections and Sectional Meetings.— Sections for the
informal study and discussion of such branches of science connected
with the Microscope and its use as may from time to time be sanctioned
by the Council may be formed by voluntary association on the part
of not fewer than ten Fellows of the Society, subject to the following
rules : —

1. Membership of the Sections shall be open to all Fellows. Any
Fellow joining one or more of the Sections shall signify his adhesion
thereto and his acceptance of these rules by signing a book to be re-
tained in the custody of the Hon. Secretaries of the Society.

2. The general management of each Section shall be vested in a
Committee consisting of a Secretary and four other Membars of the
Section. The Committee shall be elected at the first Meeting of the
Section in each year, Any vacancies occurring during the year shall be
filled up by election by the remaining Members of the Committee. The
Sectional Committees shall be responsible to the Council for the proper
management of their respective Sections.

3. Each Sectional Secretary shall keep a list of the Members of his
Section and an attendance book to be signed by all persons attending a
Sectional Meeting. He shall report to the Council any infringement of
these rules, or any matter connected with the Section that may appear
to him to be necessary. He shall also report any other matter on which
the Council may desire to have information. He shall not be required
to keep any Minutes or other record of the proceedings of hi&\Section.

4. Sectional Meetings may be held in the Society's Rooms at any
convenient time between 6 p.m., and 10 p.m., on any Wednesday
except the third in each month, from November to June.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 103

5. Only one Sectional Meeting shall be held on any one evening,
the dates of Meeting for each Section to be fixed by the Sectional Secre-
taries in agreement with the Assistant Secretary of the Society.

6. Visitors may be present at Sectional Meetings on the invitation of
Members of the Sections.

7. No account of the proceedings at the Sectional Meetings Bhall be
published in any form whatever, except such as the Editor may think
fit to publish in the Journal of the Society, and no action shall be taken
by the Sections which would involve the Society in any financial or
other liability.

8. Any Member of a Section may withdraw therefrom upon notice
given to the Secretary of the Section, and he shall cease to be a Member
if he discontinues his attendance at the Meetings of the Section for the
period of a whole Session, or if he ceases to be a Fellow of the Society.
In case the Membership of any Section shall fall below the number of
five and continue to be less than five for the period of a Session of the
Society, that Section shall be dissolved and automatically become extinct
at the end of that Session. Any Section may at any time be dissolved
by a resolution of the Council of the Society.

9. The Council may suspend any Fellow from Membership of a
Section for the infringement of any of these Rules or for any other
reason it may deem sufficient.

Note. — For the present the Sections authorised are as follows : —

A. Microscopical Optics and Microscope Construction Section

(Brass and Glass).

B. Biological Section (Pond Life and Microscopical Organisms

generally).

C. Bacteriological Section (Histology, Bacteriology, Disease-

producing Organisms, etc.).
These Sections have been duly constituted, and are now meeting as
follows : —

1st Wednesday at 8 p.m Bacteriological.

2nd „ „ 7 for 7.30 p.m. . Biological.

•4th „ „ „ ... Brass and Glass.

B. Technique.*
CI) Collecting Objects, including- Culture Processes.

"Marine Expeditions.! — A- &• Mayer laments the loss of time, the
yaste of money and energy of the numerous marine expeditions
organised by civilised nations, and then describes his plan for obtaining
more valuable results. It is an improvement on the general practice
which has hitherto obtained, viz. that of sending out a collecting vi -
and relegating the catches to experts at home. For this procedure the
author would establish shore stations, properly equipped in all respects,
i.e. as to men and material. These stations would be served by the

* This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro-
cesses; (2) Preparing Objects ; (3) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes;
<4) Staining and Injecting ; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservative fluids, etc. ;
(6) Miscellaneous. t Science, xxvii. (1908) pp. 669-71.

104 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

collecting steamer, on which would reside a small permanent staff, and
would be suitable for the transport of the staff and material of the shore-
stations.

The author also points out some of the marine problems on which
much light would be thrown by adopting his suggestions.

Methods of Plankton Research.*— VV. J. Dakin, in an interesting
and very useful paper on Planktonology, continues a description by
J. T. Jenkins in 1901 of the nets and methods invented and devised by
Victor Hensen.. The author describes plankton nets : method of using
the quantitative net ; preservation and estimation of the catch ; pump,,
tube, and filter method; method of investigation for the smallest,
organisms; other plankton apparatus used for qualitative work ;_ and
then gives a summary of the results of the plankton work and its aims.

The author had personal experience of the acquaintance with the
apparatus he describes on the occasions when he was permitted to
accompany the German expeditions in the North Sea and Baltic.

Behaviour of Certain Pathogenic Micro-organisms at Low-
Temperature, t — E. Almquist finds that certain strains of Bacillus
paratyphosus and B. coli grow well on agar slopes at 10°. C. ; but the
organisms of cholera, typhoid, and dysentery grow only feebly, and
appear as coarser forms, which produce germinating granules (kugeln).
If these forms are transferred to fresh medium at a higher temperature
they rapidly produce " granules," which begin to germinate at once. The
earlier forms thus produced are non-motile ; the cholera granules
quickly give rise to comma-bacilli, and can also form new granules ; the
typhoid and dysentery granules may form new granules, but usually only
give rise to rods.

The author found the same developmental processes occurred witb
all strains of cholera and dysentery organisms, but not with all examples-
of B. typhosus.

Differentiation of Bacilli of Typhoid Group.}— G. C. Chatter jee
employs the following tests for differentiating the organisms of the
typhoid group. Bacillus typhosus is grown on agar slopes, the whole
surface being inoculated ; after 3 to 4 days at 37° C, all visible growth
is washed away by sterile normal salt solution ; if these washed surfaces
are re-inoculated with B. typhosus, no growth occurs, but if inoculated
with B. paratyphosus A, or B. paratyphosus B, Shiga's bacillus, or i>\
coli, growth occurs in all tubes after 48 to 72 hours at 37° C. Similar
tests are made with scraped agar cultures of B. coli, B. paratyphosus A,.
etc., with similar results, except in the case of B. coli, where the scraped
surface has a growth-inhibiting effect not only on B. coli but also ort
B. typhosus and bacilli of the typhoid group.

The author concludes that the bacilli produce in the agar a specific
growth-inhibiting toxin, which is insoluble in salt solution ; it is
destroyed at 55° C. for one hour : though inhibiting growth it does

* Proc. and Trans. Liverpool Biol. Soc, xxii. (1908) pp. 500-52 (7 figs.)
t Centralbl. Bakt. lte Abt. Orig., xlviii. (1908) p. 175.
J Tom cit., p. 246.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC 10.>

not kill the bacilli : this specific property can he used to identify

B. typhosus from other allied bacilli.

Achromogenic Cultures of Micrococcus prodigiosus.*— M. Cordier,
H. Rajat, and G. Peju placed open agar-tube cultures of Bacillus pro-
digiosus in a 150 c.cm. flask tilled to one-third with sulphuric ether ; a
glass vessel, part full of cotton wool, was inverted over the whole,
covering at the same time the opening of the culture tube and of tin
flask ; after standing in the dark, at the temperature of the laboratory.
growth slowly appears, but of a white porcelain aspect, and showing no-
trace of pigment. A control tube, inclosed in a similar flask containing
water, showed typical pigmented cultures.

If the achromogenic cultures are transferred to fresh media, the-
subcultures are also free from pigment, but after a few generations tin
red colour reappears. The author finds that the longer the duration
of cultivation in ether vapour, the slower is the reappearance of pig-
ment in subcultures ; but a true achromogenic variety cannot be
permanently obtained. Similar results were observed by substituting
ethyl- or methyl-alcohol, chloroform and xylol for ether.

Blood Cultures.f — Lafforgue adopts the following procedure for
blood cultures. The blood is obtained by venous puncture and mixed
with citrate of soda : one drop (5^ c.cm.) of 20 p.c. citrate solution to
1 c.cm. of blood. The mixture is centrifuged and the supernatant
liquid decanted, and the deposit is distributed into flasks or tubes of
broth. The removal of the serum, which contains comparatively very
few germs, is not likely to cause serious error, and at the same time its
slightly inhibiting action is also removed.

The method is economical, and permits the transmission of blood
specimens, without any liability to interfere with subsequent bacterio-
logical investigation.

Action of Meningococcus and similar organisms on Sugar Media. %

C. Dopter and Raymond Koch employ the following media for studying
the action of meningococcus and allied organisms in various sugars. To*
75 c.cm. of slightly alkaline agar is added 1 grm. of lrevulose, dextrose,.
or maltose, etc. ; after sterilisation there are added 25 c.cm. of ascitic
fluid, and 1 c.cm. of sterile 1 p.c. solution of neutral red ; the mixture-
has an orange tint, and is kept in a water-bath at 60° C. for 1 hour,
until the formation of a fine precipitate of neutral red occurs. The
medium is then poured into Petri dishes — it has a yellowish tint in thin
layer — and cultures are made for meningococcus, pseudo-meningococcns,
and gonococcus, and incubated at 37° C.

The authors find that meningococcus, after 2-4 hours on dextrose and
maltose, gave a carmin-red colour ; on laevulose and other sugars no-
fermentation occurs. The coccus catarrhalis is without action on any
sugar. Flavus i. and ii. ferment laevulose, dextrose, and maltose, bnt
Flavus iii. has the same reactions as meningococcus.

Diplococcus crassus {Pseudomeningococcus Jaeger) ferments most all
the sugars. Gonococcus only ferments dextrose.

* C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, lxv. (1908) p. 344.
t Tom. cit., p. 340. X Tom cit., p. 351.

10G SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

(2) Preparing Objects.

Researches on the Leucocytes and Lymphoid Tissue of Inverte-
brates.* — M. Kollinann fixed the material with Zenker's fluid (with and
without acetic acid), Lindsay's fluid, and in certain cases with Dekhuysen's
mixture (potassium bichromate 6 • 25 grm., filtered sea-water 250 c.cm.,
2 p.c. osmic acid 54 c.cm.). The last fluid is isotonic with sea-water,
and gives excellent results for very delicate elements. In some cases,
■Gastropods, Lamellibranchs, and Echinoderms, the plasma being de-
ficient in albumen coagulates in flakes, and does not stick to the slide.
Various devices to meet this emergency must be resorted to, the only
one mentioned being that of Regaud, which consists in collodionising
the slides. For staining the films the following were used : hsematoxylin-
eosin-orange, toluidin-blue-eosin-orange, saf ran in-light-green, magenta-
Benda. For the granules, the triacid, the C mixture of Ehrlich and
Giemsa, were used. For the lymphogenic organs, the same fixative
which succeeded best with the blood was used, while for demonstrating
the stroma, 2 per thousand potassium bichromate, or Merkel's fluid, was
substituted Sections were made by the gum method, but if the
presence of a network can be detected by the naked eye, the paraffin
method may be adopted.

The author then describes his method of making a differential count
of the corpuscles. A drop of blood is obtained by means of a pipette ;
this is spread on a slide fixed with osmic acid vapour, dried and stained
with triacid. All the corpuscles in the whole of the film are then
counted and classified. It is advisable to count several thousand.

(4) Staining- and Injecting:.

Bacillus of Anthrax and Silver Impregnation. — J. Yamamoto
finds that young vegetative forms of Bacillus anthracis are silver-nega-
tive, only the contour staining as a sharp black line ; in older forms,
when spore-formation is commencing, the entire bacillary body is dif-
fusely stained, more especially at the centre, but also at other points
black flecks are found which later become larger and circumscribed, and
appear as spores. In older cultures they stain less well. These ob-
servations applied to cultures on all the media investigated.

The bacilli in smears from heart-blood or in organs from an anthrax-
infected mouse, are not so constantly silver-negative, many organisms
showing a black stain ; the capsule remains unstained, as is the case
with other encapsuled bacteria.

Staining of Fat with Basic Anilin Dyes.f — J. Lorraiu Smith says
that if a section of fat-containing tissue be stained with an aqueous
solution of a basic anilin dye, and then exposed to the air in a thin layer
of Farrant's solution for 2 or 3 days, the fat will attract the dye from

* Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool., viii. (1908) 210 pp. (2 pis.).
+ Centralbl. Bakt., lieAbt. Orig., xlviii. (1908) p. 253.
X Journ. Pathol, and Bact., xii. (1907) pp. 415-20.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 107

adjacent tissues and stain deeply. This is due to the carbonic acid of
the air converting the neutral fats into fatty acid and glycerin, the
former taking up the basic stain very readily. CO., produces a parallel
change in carbohydrates, glycogen, and possibly proteids. This method
may be expected to throw light on the action of excessive C0 2 in the
blood, it also affords an explanation of why the tubercle bacillus with its
fatty capsule is '-acid-fast." The acid rather fixes the dye than fails to
remove it. In the case of the Smegma bacillus the compound so formed
is very soluble in alcohol ; in the case of tubercle it is less so, i.e.
tubercle is also " alcohol-fast."

Simultaneous Staining by Oxazine Dyes.* — The same author
describes an investigation on the staining of fat by oxazine dyes, under-
taken with the view of finding a stain which would, in the same section,
differentiate neutral fat from fatty acid.

Xile-blue, and certain other dyes of the oxazine series, are capable of
being converted into a red compound, and aqueous solutions of (e.g.)
Nile-blue are found to contain two liases, a blue oxazine base which
forms a blue soap with fatty acid, but does not combine with neutral fat,
and a red oxazone base which is soluble in and colours both fatty acid
and neutral fat. The oxazone base can be obtained from the oxazine by
heating with a little sulphuric acid.

The practical application of this method of fat-staining requires
further elaboration ; but to give an example of the results obtained, it
was found in sections of liver from cases of obstructive jaundice that
the fat adjacent to the congested bile -ducts stained deep blue ; and that
more remote, purple or red. This may be presumed to indicate that the
action of the bile is instrumental in converting neutral fat into fatty
acid.

Principles of Weigert's Method.t — According to J. Lorrain Smith
and W. Mair, there are certain substances of a fatty nature present in
most tissues which are able to combine with chromium oxide ; the com-
pound so formed will lake hematoxylin, i.e. will "stain." The
chromium-oxide compound is best obtained by keeping the unsaturated
substances in a concentrated solution of potassium dichromate at incubator
temperature (37° C.) for some days ; but if this action be allowed to
continue too long, the compound capable of hiking kamiatoxylin is con-
verted into a fully saturated compound which is unstainable, or "over-
chromed."

The spinal cord contains various elements differing in the rate at
which they oxidise, so that by stopping the bichromatini;- at different
stages we can stain separately, first the medullary sheath, then in order
the nucleoli, the axis-cylinder, the cell-body and processes, and. lastly,
the neuroglia. If the bichromating be longer continued, no staining at
all takes place, all the unsaturated groupings being occupied.

Even entirely unsaturated fats, however, stain less readily than the
medullated nerve-sheath, and this seems to depend on the presence in

* Journ. Pathol, and Bact., xii. (1907) pp. 1-1.
f Op. cit., xiii. (1908) pp. 14-27.

108 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the latter of substances which, on examination by crossed Nicol prisms,
are found to be anisotropic. These substances appear as globules, or
" myelin figures " ; they are normal in the suprarenal gland, and occur
very frequently in pathological tissues, characterising a most important
type of fatty degeneration. These substances are composed of fatty
acids and cholesterin, neither of which will stain separately ; but if the
two are present in a " myelin-like " compound, staining or oxidisation
immediately takes place. Several experiments make it almost certain
that cholesterin is the substance oxidised. This seems to throw fresh
light on the part which cholesterin plays in cell-metabolism. Two other
constituents of the medullary sheath, viz. lecithin and protargon, do not
seem to be concerned in the results of Weigert's myelin method, which
would appear, then, to depend on the existence in the medullary sheath
not merely of unsaturated fats, but of such in the form of a compound
with cholesterin, which gives "myelin figures" when heated in contact
with water.

(5) Mounting-jiincluding: Slides, Preservative Fluids, etc.

Mounting Amphibian Eggs.* — K. Ogushi describes a procedure
for mounting eggs of Amphibia for demonstration purposes. It con-
sists in immersing the eggs in • 5 p.c. formalin, after previous fixation
in chrom-acetic acid, Zenker's fluid, or sublimate. In about six months
the gelatinous sheath has dissolved away. The next step is to make a
very thick ring on a slide with balsam by aid of the turntable. The
circular well is then filled up with the prepared roe and closed by means
of a cover-shp, previously heated. After pressing down the slip, the
margin should be further secured by means of some varnish. The
slides should be allowed to rest for some months.

(6) Miscellaneous.

Photomicrographic Atlas of Fibres important in Arts and
Commerce.! — The first part of this atlas (the sub-title of which is
A Manual of Microscopical Research Methods for materials used in
textile fabrics, in the manufacture of paper, rope, string, and yarn) has
recently appeared. The author is Alois Herzog, one of the principals in
the Prussian High School at Sorau, where there is a special textile
industry department. The work, which is subsidised by the Prussian
Government, represents the results of fifteen years' labour. In the
text are described the apparatus required, the necessary technique, the
microchemical reactions, and the microscopy of the fibres and of the
plants from which they are derived. The atlas contains 222 photo-
micrographs, one being in three colours. These are all most excellent,
and of course are faithful reproductions of the originals. This atlas will
form one of the most valuable works on this particular branch of
microscopy, and will be of the greatest assistance to students and
learners.

* Anat. Anzeig., xxxiii. (1908) pp. 381-2.
t Munich : J. B. Obernetter, 1908.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

L09

Apparatus for the Aeration of Aquaria.*— B. Jockel describes the
following arrangement (fig. 15) for aerating aquaria. The completely
closed cistern A is connected by the tube \Y with a water supply ; through
an opening in the top of A is passed a siphon tube H that reaches
nearly to the bottom, and has its free arm ending as low as possible
below the vessel ; a second opening in the top of A admits the tube L,
which is the commencement of the air supply which passes through the
bent tube L to the valve flask V, and air box W K, to the aquarium D ;
a third opening admits the open tube St.

st

^

cc

■W"

Fig. 15.

When a constant stream of water passes into A the bottom of the
vessel will soon be covered, and when the lower openings of the tubes
H and St are closed then the connection of the inside of A and the air
present in the air supply tube with the outside atmosphere will be broken ;
water now begins to rise in the siphon tube H and in the tube St, and
continues to do so until the pressure is sufficiently great to overcome the
resistance at the outlet nozzle in D, and at this moment ventilation
commences. When the cistern A is full the columns of water in the
tubes St and H rise until the liquid tips over the bend of H and brings
into action the free arm of the siphon, whereby the vessel A is quickly
emptied, when it will be filled with air sucked in by the tube St ; the
process is then repeated. It is necessary that the upper end of St and

* SB. Gesell. Naturf. Freunde, 1906 (Feb.) p. 66.

110

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the highest point of L should be higher than the bend of the siphon
tube H.

Aeration of Aquaria.* — 0. Thilo describes the following apparatus
for ventilating aquaria (fig. 16). A piece of rubber tubing of 2-3 mm.
bore and 30 cm. long is drawn through the tube of a glass' funnel so as
to leave the upper portion of the rubber tubing sticking out of the
funnel tube ; into the lower end of the tubing is pushed a piece of

Fig. 16.

metal tubing, and on to the free end of this tube is fixed a rubber tubing
of about 4-5 mm. bore, and the end of this rubber tube is pulled over
another metal tube E, (fig. 17). The funnel is suspended under a tap,
and water is allowed to drip into it ; the air in the tubing will be driven
into the aquarium, on the floor of which rests the tube R. The author
finds it is necessary that for a depth of 50 cm. of water in the aquarium,
the funnel should be at least 150 cm. above the floor of the aquarium.
It is also useful to place a perforated shield over the tube R in order to

* SB. Gesell. Naturf. Freunde, 1906 (May) p. 139.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTAN, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

Ill

distribute the air after it escapes ; and this is also facilitated by tilting
the end of the tube R to 23' from the horizontal.

Schweizer's Reagent.*— G. B. de Toni has discovered a way of
making this reagent, which obviates the tiresome task of repeatedly
washing the copper hydroxide, and thus simplifies the preparation:
10 gnu. of pure crystallised sulphate of copper are reduced to a fine
powder in a mortar. While grinding, 2 grm. of powdered caustic soda
are added a little at a time : from time to time a few drops of distilled
water are allowed to fall on the mixture. To the resulting greenish

R

Fig. 17.

mass are added gradually, and stirring the while, 25—40 c.cm. of strong
ammonia (26-29 Baume), which dissolves the hydroxide of copper
formed by the action of the soda on the copper sulphate. The mixture
is then filtered through glass wool : the filtrate of a dark blue colour
has all the properties of Schweizer's reagent. Cotton, when treated
with this fluid, is completely dissolved, and when the cupro-ammoniacal
solution is treated with water, or better with acidulated water, cellulos<
is precipitated in fine white flakes. - •■-

Another method of preparing the reagent is given by the author :
10 grm. of copper sulphate are dissolved in 200 c.cm. of distilled water
and mixed with 7 grm. of barium hydroxide dissolved in 200 c.cm. of
water. The precipitate which forms is filtered off on glass wool, and

* Atti K. Istit. Veneto, lxv. (1905-6) pp. 593-6.

112

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

then 50 c.cni. of strong ammonia poured over it. The blue liquid
which passes through is poured back again several times over the
precipitate in order to obtain all the copper hydroxide and leave only
the insoluble barium sulphate. The fluid thus obtained is found to
have a strong solvent action on cotton.

Apparatus for Observing- the Suction of Insects.* — G. Zirolla has
devised the following apparatus (fig. 18), by means of which an isolated

8

r^\

Fig. IS.

insect can be retained whilst it sucks blood from a healthy or infected
man or animal. It consists of a small glass tube C, which is inclosed in
a nickel vessel provided with an easily movable disk, by which the tube
can be closed or opened. This tube is hitched to a nickel stand D,
which at its base has an iris-diaphragm with a convex lower surface.

Centralbl. Bakt., lte Abt. Orig., xlviii. (1908) p. 173 (1 fig.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

ii.;

This stand is placed on the body of the animal whose blood the insect
in the tube C is required to suck ■ the disk in the tube is removed, and
the diaphragm of D is opened, and the insect is thus brought in contact
with the skin. When suction has taken place the diaphragm is slowly
closed, whereby the insect is drawn back again into the tube ; the
apparatus is now removed and inverted, so as to allow the insect to fall
to the bottom of the tube C, which is then closed again by the metal
disk, and removed from the stand. In this way a number of insects
may he successively used and preserved for further observation of
experiment. *

Small Bacterial Grinder.*— B.White describes a small mill (fig. 19) for
grinding dried bacterial cultures. It consists of a thick glass flask with
a ground stopper, holding 20-30 smooth agate marbles, about 1'5 cm.

tsm*

Pig. 19.

diameter. The flask is fixed to a metal holder, fitted with an axis,
which by a simple mechanism can be slowly rotated. The apparatus is
readily sterilised, and very fine state of powder can be obtained.

After ten hours a dried culture of Bacillus typhosus exhibited no
bacillary bodies.

Methods of Textile Chemistry. | — This work, by F. Dannerth,
though it does not directly appeal to the microscopist, will be found very
useful by anyone interested in textile fabrics, owing to a very excellent
glossary of trade terms.

* Centralbl. Bakt., lto Abt. Orig., xlviii. (1908) p. 254.

t New York : John Wiley and Sons ; London : Chapman and Hall, 1908, viii.
and 164 pp.

Feb. 17th, 1909 I

114 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Metallography, etc.

Quenching Velocities.* — C. Benedicks has carried out a lengthy
and painstaking investigation on the cooling power of liquids, on
quenching velocities, and on the constituents troostite and austenite.
From the results given by two different methods, in which the tem-
perature of a body heated by electrical energy and cooled by a flowing
liquid was measured, it is concluded that, as Le Chatelier had found
by another method, mercury is much inferior to water in cooling power,
that the main factor in the cooling power of a liquid is its latent heat
of vapour ; specific heat has a secondary influence ; conductivity for heat
and viscosity may probably be neglected. Experiments in which photo-
graphic time-temperature curves of small pieces of steel quenched in
water were taken, demonstrated that the time occupied in cooling
through a given range (700°-100° C.) is directly proportional to the
mass, but almost independent of the surface area of the specimen.
Speed of cooling is increased by raising the temperature from which
the sample is quenched. Troostite is held to be a solid colloid solution
of cementite in iron, and " osmondite " is a state with a maximum
content of troostite. For the detection of austenite, a new etching-
reagent, 5 p.c. alcoholic solution of metanitrobenzolsulphonic acid was
found to be useful. The preservation of austenite in carbon steel re-
quires a high mechanical pressure.

Iron-Carbon Equilibrium.t — Gr. B. Upton proposes a greatly modified
iron-carbon diagram, based upon the experimental results obtained by
Carpenter, Wiist, Goerens, and others. The hypothesis of iron-graphite
as the stable system with iron-ironcarbide metastable, is considered to
be unnecessary. The phases crystallising from the melt are solid solu-
tion and graphite, forming a eutectic at 1145° C. of4 - 3 p.c. carbon.
At 1095° C. the inversion y + graphite to y + Fe 6 C, or Fe 6 C +
graphite occurs. At 800° C, Fe 6 C breaks up into Fe 3 C -f- y ; and at
G15°C, Fe 3 C decomposes into Fe 2 C -f Fe. The two new phases Fe 6 G
and Fe 2 C are introduced to account for the thermal critical points found
by Carpenter and Keeling in the neighbourhood of 800° and 600° C.
The existence of these compounds appears to be supported by the work
of Campbell and others on the chemical constitution of cast irons.

The author deals in a very thorough manner with the various
phenomena (such as formation of temper-carbon) exhibited by the cast
irons, and accounts for all of them in his equilibrium diagram, which,
however, appears likely to meet with much well-founded criticism.

Copper and Copper Alloys.^ — J- T. Milton discusses niirnerous cases
of abnormal behaviour, and indicates directions in which investigation
should be pursued. The effect of hot and cold work, and of anneal-
ing, is imperfectly understood. The influence of heat-treatment on the

* Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., lxxvii. (1908) pp. 153-257 (51 figs.),
f Journ. Phys. Chem., xii. (1908) pp. 507-49 (13 figs.).

% Ironmongers' Chronicle (Special Report Number, Institute of Metals,
Birmingham Meeting) lxi. (1908) pp. 11-15.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 115

copper-zinc alloys is discussed. The author suggests that the effect
of high casting temperature on copper-tin and other alloys is due to
dower rate of solidification caused by the greater heating of the mould.

Mechanism of Annealing.* — G. D. Bengough and 0. V. Hudson
discuss the annealing process in copper alloys. In the case of single
phase alloys or pure metals the effect of annealing seems to be essen-
tially the conversion of Beilby's hard A phase into the C or crystalline
phase. In more complex alloys, such as Muntz metal, annealing may
produce a change of constitution. The annealing temperature of
cartridge brass may be between 550° and 730° C, preferably 600°-650° C.
The Microscope affords a ready means of controlling the annealing
process.

Phosphor Bronze.f — A. Philip has collected a large number of
chemical analyses and mechanical tests of phosphor bronze, and from
them deduces the following as a suitable specification : — copper 90-92,
tin 7 "4-9 "7, phosphorus - 3-0"6 p.c. The author prefers to examine
micro-sections polished but not etched. A grey network is probably
€u 3 P. The presence of this network of hard copper phosphide in a
matrix of softer copper-tin alloy renders the metal suitable for bearings.

Metallographic Investigation of Alloys. f—W. Rosenhain discusses
inetallographic methods, dealing chiefly with those in which there is con-
siderable divergence in the practice of different investigators. The
necessity for using pure materials, for checking by actual analysis the
composition of each alloy prepared, for using reasonably large quantities
of metal in the thermal investigations, for accuracy of temperature
measurement (by a potentiometer method when thermocouples are used),
and for employing slow rates of cooling, is emphasized. The paper con-
tains much criticism of the methods employed in Tammann's laboratory
at Gottingen.

Intermetallic Compounds.§ — C. H. Desch gives an account of
criteria for the existence of compounds. In binary metallic systems
the methods available for the establishment of the existence and formula?
of compounds are,: — 1. Thermal analysis. 2. Microscopic examination.
3. Determination of electromotive force between an alloy and one of
its component metals. 4. Chemical examination of residues (apt to give
misleading results). 5. Measurements of (a) hardness, (b) density,
(c) electrical conductivity. 6. Determination of heat of formation (an
untrustworthy method). The combination of thermal and microscopic il
examination offers the most certain means of detecting compounds,
electrical conductivity probably ranking next in importance. The author
gives a list of well established compounds.

Structure of a Brittle Steel Sheet.||— A. Sauveur has examined a
steel sheet, carbon ■ 05 p.c, exhibiting brittleness of the kind described by

* Ironmonger's Chronicle, lxi. (1908) pp. 5-20.

f Tom. cit., pp. 25-30. { Tom. cib., pp. 30-40 (5 figs.).

§ Tom. cit., pp. 40-3 (5 figs.).

)| Electrochem. and Met. Industry, vi. (1903) p. 271 (3 figs.).

I -1

116 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Stead, probably the result of prolonged heating between 600° and 700° C\
In micro-sections taken from a strip annealed at <Sli5° C.^thick bands
were observed in the ferrite grains. The bands in any one grain were-
parallel, and appeared to have been attacked by the etching solution
more strongly than the remainder of the grain.

Magnetic Changes in Steel.* — H. M. Boylston describes a labora-
tory experiment for illustrating the changes in magnetic properties
occurring at the thermal critical points in steel. A drilled test-piece,
within which is the hot junction of a thermo-couple, is supported just
below an electromagnet, and is heated by blast lamps. The critical
point is indicated by the test-piece beginning or ceasing to be attracted
by the magnet, on cooling or heating.

Hard Spots in Steel Castings. f — A. P. Scott found that a hard
spot in a roll casting consisted of an envelope of metal containing
12 p.c. manganese, 1*8 p.c. carbon, sharply differentiated from the
steel and surrounding a cavity. Manganese had been added to the
molten steel in the ladle only in the form of 80 p.c. ferromanganese.
From the results of a number of experiments, in which molten steel was
poured into small moulds containing small pyramids of ferromanganese,
the author concludes that ferromanganese, when added to molten steel r
first melts and then gradually absorbs iron, and probably gas also, fvom
the surrounding metal. Complete diffusion does not take place till the
liquid manganese alloy has been very considerably diluted. Solidifica-
tion of a globule of the manganese alloy results in the formation of a
hard spot.

Methods of obtaining Cooling Curves } — G. K. Burgess gives an
outline of the various methods which have been developed for obtaining
cooling curves, and briefly describes the apparatus employed. Only those
methods of measuring temperature which depend on the use of thermo-
couples of the platinum metals are considered. An analytical discussion
concludes the paper, and leads to the same result as the examination
of the experimental methods : that the most certain and complete data
may be obtained by combining temperature-time observations with those
given by the differential method.

Recalescence Curves. § — W. Rosenhain discusses the methods of
observing recalescence phenomena, and gives examples of heating and
cooling curves obtained by the " time- temperature " and the " differ-
ential " methods. The " inverse-rate " and " derived differential "
methods of plotting are explained. The author considers that the
differential method of obtaining cooling curves is eminently satisfactory r
and has important practical advantages over the " inverse-rate" method.
The critical point at about 600° C., found by Roberts-Austen in iron,
and by Carpenter and Keeling in iron-carbon alloys, is attributed to the
presence of crystalline silica in the furnace walls. The author has
found a recalescence in crystalline silica at about 580° C.

* Electrochem. and Met. Industrry, pp. 273-4 (2 figs.).

t Tom. cit., pp. 281-6, 323-6 (11 figs.).

% Tom. cit., pp. 366-71, 403-5 (11 figs.).

§ Proc. Phvs. Soc, xxi. (1908) pp. 180-208 (18 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1 17

Transparent Metallic Films.*— T. Turner finds that thin films of
gold, silver, or copper, heated in air between glass slips, become trans-
parent at temperatures below 550° C. In the case of gold and silver,
microscopic examination proves that the apparent transparency is due
to destruction of continuity of the film, the metal aggregating when
heated into separate granular masses. Under similar conditions copper
oxidises, forming a continuous transparent film, bright green at first,
then gradually darkening to deep brown. The discovery of a trans-
parent stage in the oxidation of copper supports the view thai the
spectrum colours, which appear on the surface of certain metals by
-oxidation, are due to the formation of a transparent film.

Structure of Eutectics.f — As a preliminary to the study of a pure
eutectic alloy, W. Rosenhain and P. A. Tucker have re-determined the
equilibrium diagram of the lead-tin system. $ The eutectic point is
placed at a concentration of 63 p.c. tin. Transformations of the lead-
rich alloys, occurring in the solid state, are regarded as the separation of
tin from the solid solution of tin in lead, which changes from the /? to
the a state. The eutectic consists of grains, in each of which there is a
systematic orientation of the laminations produced by layers of the two
constituents. The authors take the view that these grains are true
spherulitic crystals.

Partition of Silver between Zinc and Lead.§ — G. N. Potdar has
investigated the constancy of the partition coefficient of silver between
liquid zinc and liquid lead. Weighed quantities of the three metals
were maintained at 540° C. for several hours, the mass was allowed to
solidify, and the percentage of silver determined in each of the two
layers. The separation of the lighter and heavier layers was not quite
perfect : this caused discrepancies in the results. The author concludes
that the coefficient is constant for the more dilute solutions, and is
about 300. The partition coefficient of silver between solid zinc and
liquid lead (of importance in the Parkes process), is much higher.

Troostite.|| — C. Benedicks defends the appellation " colloidal solu-
tion " as applied to troostite, on the ground that dispersed systems
containing ultramicroscopic particles of metals are universally admitted
to be colloidal solutions. H. le Ohatelier considers that the expression
" colloidal solution" must fall out of use, since the condition indicated
is not one of solution in any true sense.

* Proc. Roy. Soc, Series A, lxxxi. (1908) pp. 301-10 (9 figs.).

t Tom cit., pp. 331-4 (1 fig.).

t See this Journal, 1908, p. 523

§ Journ. Coll. of Sci. Tokyo, Japan, xxv. (1908) Art. 9 (4 figs.).

j| Rev. Metallurgie, v. (1908) pp. 878-9.

118

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

MEETING

Held on the 16th of December, 1908, at 20 Hanover Square, W. r
Conrad Beck, Esq., A^ice-President, in the Chair.

The Minutes of the Meeting of November 18, 1008, were read and
confirmed, and were signed by the Chairman.

The List of Donations to the Society, exclusive of exchanges and
reprints, received since the last Meeting, was read, and the thanks of
the Society were voted to the Donors : —

From
Dannerth, Frederic, The Methods of Textile Chemistry, i y. Publishers

(New York and London, 1908) J

Twelve Slides of Foraminifera from Soundings off the Coast I yr Ernest Heath

of Somaliland J

Mr. J. E. Stead, F.R.S., read the following papers :— (1) " On a
Workshop Microscope for the Examination of Opaque Objects " ;
(2) "On a Simple Method of Illuminating Opaque Objects" — specimens-
of the Microscopes and of the electric light fixed to the object-glasses,
with portable battery attached, being exhibited in illustration. He also
described and illustrated some simple methods of mounting irregularly-
shaped pieces of metal, one side of which had been faced for micro-
scopical examination.

Mr. Rosenhain said that it had given him great pleasure to see this
very ingenious form of Microscope, which he thought was one which
would meet a great want in the workshops for which it was intended.
The only danger was, however, that some manufacturers might use it
under the impression that they could get the best possible results from
it, and would therefore neglect the more important instruments and
apparatus specially constructed to obtain them. In the ordinary work-
shop they could only look at the surface of things, and as a rule this
was not sufficient ; to find out what was the matter with a bar of metal
they must cut it in half and examine the section — so that for this
reason he imagined that this Microscope would have a somewhat limited
use. As regarded the illumination being placed above the objective,,
this was of course a very old method, but he thought it would be better
to cut off the unsilvered half of the thin cover-glass, as this only served
to obstruct a portion of the light. The pill-box arrangement was a
very good method of mounting specimens for examination, but it
involved using the Microscope in a vertical position, and this was all

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 119

right for a few minutes ; to have to work by the hour over an instru-
ment so placed would become very distressing. It was a very pretty
way of mounting and keeping the specimens ; but metals such as iron
and steel were very apt to rust on the polished surface, and so ibe-
come spoilt, and he thought this method of keeping them would not
obviate this risk, so that it would be necessary to keep them in a
desiccator to prevent rusting, unless the surface was varnished, which
would necessitate cleaning off when it was desired to examine them.
He wished to express his interest in and appreciation of the apparatus
which Mr. Stead had brought before the Society, and to thank him for
having done so.

Mr. J. W. Gordon said he had been extremely interested in the
subject of this paper, but with regard to one point mentioned by Mr.
Rosenhain, he thought they need not be dependent upon the cardboard-
box maker for a special shape to enable the Microscope to be used in an
inclined position, because a little seccotine would stick the pill-box to an
ordinary Microscope slip, which could be held in position by the clips
on the stage, and would enable the instrument to be used at any angle.
He thought the method of using a silvered mirror covering half the
aperture "would result incidentally in producing oblique illumination ;
and with regard to the method proposed by Mr. Stead of producing
oblique lighting, namely, by exposing the lamp without the mirror, it
appeared to him that this would limit the oblique lighting to one
particular angle. For that reason he wished to suggest for Mr. Stead's
consideration whether it would not be better to reflect the lamp light by
means of a small mirror which could be moved in any direction re-
quired, and so throw the light under any desired angle upon the object.
He desired to associate himself with the thanks to the author of the
paper to which Mr. Rosenhain had given expression.

Mr. Stead, in reply, said he thought the result of using this Micro-
scope by manufacturers was likely to be the opposite of that feared by Mr.
Rosenhain : for when they began to appreciate elementary things, they
would not be likely to remain long contented with them, but would want
to possess what would afford them still greater advantages— an instance
of this had, in fact, only lately occurred. As regarded cut sections of
metal, such as steel shafts, etc., after they had been turned up and
polished in the machine shops they were really cut sections, and the
structure of the metal could be examined nearly as well with the aid oi
the portable Microscope as on sections cut out of them and brought into
the laboratory for examination in the usual way. Of course they could
not destroy shafts by cutting such pieces from the finished work.
Unfortunately, iron and steel did rust if exposed to damp atmosphere,
but after examining them, a drop of suitable varnish on the surface pro-
tected the polished and etched surfaces. If the sections were properly
prepared, and heated to about 100° C, and then were placed into tubes
and packed close with dry cotton-wool, rusting was prevented, and
this alternative method was most useful. Varnish, howe\ er, was usually
quite sufficient for the purpose, but in course of time the surfaces under
the varnish sometimes became dull, but not rusty. In such cases the
varnish could be removed by a suitable solvent, and the surfaces re-
polished and etched. As regarded oblique illumination, he intended to

120 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

improve the present design by placing a concave mirror not opposite
to but behind the lamp, so as to obtain more light on the object. The
mirror at 45° placed below the object-glass was simply a plain cover-
glass not silvered, and this had been found to be quite sufficient for low-
power magnification, but did not give such perfect illumination as the
silvered glass placed half through the objective at an angle of 45°. As
stated previously, the novel and useful departure in this class of Micro-
scope was the arrangement in which the electric illumination was fixed to
the object-glass itself.

The Chairman said it was not necessary, after the appreciative way
in which Mr. Stead's paper had been received, to pass any formal vote
of thanks. The Society was indebted to him not only for his paper, but
for most interesting demonstrations in former times on the methods of
preparing and examining metals under the Microscope, the importance
of which was becoming more and more fully recognised. Quite recently
he met with a notable instance, showing the value of microscopical
examination. A large manufacturing firm found that the metal they
were using was splitting during the process of manufacture. On subject-
ing it to chemical examination, they found that the ingredients were pure
and the alloy was correct, so twenty minutes were spent in cutting and
polishing a specimen and examining it under the Microscope, with the
result that the trouble was at once located. Investigation showed that
a workman in one department had been annealing the metal badly, so
that another man should get into trouble when it came into his hands
for manufacture. This was only one illustration of the value of this
method of testing metals, and no one had been more prominent in
furthering this kind of research than Mr. Stead.

The Rev. Eustace Tozer read a paper on " Mounting Rotifers and
Protista in Canada Balsam," which he illustrated by a number of
specimens exhibited under Microscopes in the room, including Brachionus,
Floscularia, Hydatina, (Ecistes, Pterodina, Euglena, ciliated embryo of
Membranipora pilosa, Polytoma uvella, etc.

Mr. Charles S. Bright suggested that instead of oil of cloves, cajuput
oil should be used, as being less liable to oxidise, and also much more
absorbent of alcohol, one volume of cajuput oil absorbing from seven to
nine times as much alcohol as the same volume of oil of cloves would do.
Oil of cajuput has a greater affinity for Canada balsam, belonging
chemically to the same class, Canada balsam being of the terebene or
turpentine series, .which includes cajuput, lemon, orange, citron,
cedrat, etc.

Mr. Rousselet said he noticed Mr. Tozer spoke of using osmic acid
first, but he had always found it necessary to narcotise the Rotifers with
cocaine first, otherwise they would at once shut up. He had prepared a
few notes on the subject of mounting Rotifera, which he proceeded to
read as follows : —

The difficulty of mounting Rotifera in media appreciably denser
than water, such as glycerin or Canada balsam, is well known to all who
have made the attempt. This difficulty arises from the fact that the
body of a Rotifer is a closed vesicle containing a perivisceral fluid of

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 121

about the same density as the water in which the creature lives. The
integument is a thin membrane, which allows an exchange of fluid only
by osmosis. When a Rotifer — which has been duly narcotised, fixed, and
killed, fully extended with osmic acid or other fixing agent — is placed in
say, a 5 p.c. watery solution of glycerin ( having a specific gravity of about
1-017), the fluid within the body-cavity will pass out quicker than the
denser outer fluid can flow in, and the result is a shrinkage and often
complete collapse of the Rotifer. By beginning with a very weak solu-
tion of glycerin and increasing this h p.c at a time, I have with infinite
trouble succeeded in about three weeks in mounting some Euchlanis and
other Rotifers in pure glycerin, but the advantages gained were hardly
worth the expenditure of time involved. When Rotifers are to be
mounted in balsam, the trouble begins with the alcohol ; then there is
the passage through oil and balsam, each denser than the preceding fluid.
The method is therefore a work of very considerable difficulty, skill, and
patience, and Mr. Tozer must be congratulated on accomplishing so much.
A minor drawback is the necessity of deeply staining the Rotifers, other-
wise the balsam will render their tissues and organs so transparent
as to be scarcely visible.

The mounting of Infusoria in Canada balsam does not present the
same difficulties, because Infusoria have no proper body-cavity, and
their bodies consist wholly of protoplasm, which can be fixed and
hardened by well-known reagents to any desired degree.

Of previous successful attempts to mount Rotifera in balsam, may
be mentioned that of N. de Zograf, who fixed the animals with osmic
acid and raw wood vinegar.*

Quite recently I received a few Eosphora quite well mounted in balsam
from a correspondent in Germany, who fixed the Rotifers with mixtures
of picric acid and acetic acid, and picric acid and chromic acid, and,
after passing through alcohol, adding graduated mixtures of absolute
alcohol and clove oil, and finally balsam.

Of the advantage, for permanent keeping, of mounting Rotifers
in balsam there can be no doubt, but it seems evident that all the
methods of doing so will always be very tedious, and involve much ex-
penditure of time. The Society, however, must be grateful to Mr.
Tozer for bringing this subject before them, and describing his method
of procedure and exhibiting the results he has achieved.

Mr. Wesche said that he had been rather surprised, on examining
Mr. Tozer's preparations, to see how good the results were, although he
was still of the opinion that the only really good Rotifer was a live Rotifer.
But whatever the process, a permanent" record was valuable, and even
necessarv, to enable the naturalist to differentiate between the species of
difficult * genera, As an illustration of the permanence of such mounts,
he had some slides of the aquatic larvae and pupa of gnats (Cidex) which
had been mounted in Canada balsam forty years ago. One of these slides
had been accidentally damaged, and the balsam in the centre was still in a
fluid state.

The Rev. Eustace Tozer said there was a reason for using oil of

* Described by birn in Comptes Rendus, exxiv. (1897) pp. 245-6. For exi
see tbis Journal, 1897, p. 173.

122 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

cloves by preference, as it did not evaporate and allowed manipula-
tion of the specimens. He had said very little as to the method of ex-
panding Rotifers, as he thought most people knew all about how that was
done ; and as regarded the success of his method, there were the slides
to witness for themselves, and he claimed that they showed the objects
without shrinkage, and they had been seen and commended by some of
the most eminent scientists in Europe. Mr. Rousselet was a specialist in
water-mounting, a process which had nothing against it except that the
results might not be as safe, owing to the risk of leakage.

On the motion of the Chairman, a vote of thanks was unanimously
passed to the reader of the paper, and those who had spoken on the
subject.

It was announced on behalf of the Council that they had nominated
the following Fellows to serve as Officers and Council during the ensuing
year : —

President— Six E. Ray Lankester, K.C.B., F.R.S., etc.

Vice-Presidents — Mr. Cheshire, Rev. Dr. Dallinger, Sir Ford North,
and Mr. Spitta.

Treasurer — Mr. W. E. Baxter.

Secretaries — Mr. J. W. Gordon and Dr. Hebb.

Ordinary Members of Council — Messrs. F. W. Watson Baker, Disney,
Eyre, Heron-Allen, Plimmer, Powell, Price-Jones, Radley, Rheinberg,
Rousselet, Scales, and Scourfield.

Auditor on behalf of the Council — Mr. D. J. Scourfield.

The Chairman having asked the Fellows present to nominate an
Auditor on behalf of the Society, Mr. C. L. Curties was proposed by
Mr. Soar, and seconded by Mr. Taverner, and on his name being sub-
mitted to the Meeting he was declared to have been duly elected Auditor
of the Society's accounts for the current year.

It was announced that the next Meeting of the Society being the
Annual Meeting, the ballot would be taken for the election of Officers
and Council for the ensuing year, and the President would deliver his
Address, " On Seeds, with Special Reference to British Plants."

It was further announced that the rooms of the Society would be
closed from December 24 to January 4.

New Fellows. — The following were balloted for and duly elected
Ordinary Fellows of the Society : — Messrs. Theodore Brooks and W. F.
Herzberg.

The following Objects, Instruments, etc., were exhibited : —

Mr. J. E. Stead : — The following objects under examples of the
" AVorkshop " Microscope with appliances for illuminating opaque
objects and portable electric light — 1. A section of Cleveland pig-
iron containing 1| p.c. phosphorus, strongly etched with 10 p.c.
nitric acid in water ; the phosphorus-iron eutectic remained

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 123

brilliantly white on a dark ground. 2. An alloy of iron-phosphorufi
and carbon polished and " heat-tinted " : the carbide of iron was
coloured red, the phosphorus-iron eutectic purple. 3. Cemented
bar of steel, containing 1 ■ 25 p.c. carbon, etched with picric acid
in alcohol: the carbide appeared white on a brown ground.
4. Cemented bar, same as No. 3, polished and " heat-tinted " : the
carbide of iron appeared red on a light ground.

Rev. Eustace Tozer :— The following objects, mounted in balsam, in
illustration of his paper: — Brachionus pala, with sporozoa ; Flos-
cularia ; Hydatina senta ; CEcistes stygis ; Pterodlna pala ; Euglena ;
ciliated embryo of Membranipora pilosa ; Polytoma uvella ; etc.

Mr. C. F. Rousselet : — Notops brachionus, mounted in formalin.

SPECIAL MEETING.

The Chairman declared the Meeting to be now made "Special,"
pursuant to notice given at the last Meeting on the requisition of
11 Fellows of the Society.

Mr. D. J. Scourfield then moved the resolution of which notice had
been given — to the effect that the By-laws of the Society be altered as
might be found necessary to admit women to the Meetings of the Society,.
and to remove any other restriction of privileges due to the distinction
of sex.

Mr. Scourfield said that, in moving the resolution, he realised that it
was a very important one for the Society, and one therefore to be
carefully considered from all points of view. He frankly admitted that
it would not be sufficient in such a case to be content with a mere
majority vote if that vote w T ere obtained in the face of strong opposition,
even though the opposition were based upon what appeared to those in
favour of the resolution to be misapprehension. In a Society such as
the Royal Microscopical Society, depending for its very existence upon
voluntary co-operation, he thought that to carry out a radical change
such as that now proposed, there should be something approaching
mutual consent, and this could only be obtained by putting the good of
the Society before every other consideration. Believing as he did that
the admission of women to the full privileges of Fellowship would be
for the benefit of the Society, he would deal with the matter simply
from that point of view by indicating some of the advantages which
might be anticipated to follow from the proposed alteration of the
by-laws.

In the first place, he thought that the carrying out to its logical
conclusion of the policy introduced many years ago of allowing won
to become Fellows would redound to the credit of the Society, by
removing the reproach that women were not being treated fairly in^thi^
matter. The Society posed before the world as one granting Fellowship
without distinction of sex, and yet said that lady Fellows must not come
to the meetings or vote, and the real trouble was that this had be
going on for a long time without any serious effort being made to see if

124 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

matters could not be put right. Was it to be wondered at that people
smiled when they were told of the conditions of Fellowship for women ?
He thought that the Society had not only lost many women, but men
also, who would under more logical conditions have become Fellows.
The Society could not go on indefinitely having thiugs both ways. It
might do so for a time, but it would bring discredit in the long run,
unless it could be made quite apparent that there were no possible means
■of putting things on a more satisfactory basis.

Secondly, if the Society wanted to maintain its position as a first-
class scientific Society, it was bound sooner or later to follow the
example of the Linneau, Zoological, and other similar Societies, which
had already adopted the principle of the admission of women to the full
privileges of Fellowship. It was so evidently to the advantage of the
Society to attract as much ability as it could, whether the possessors
were men or women, that it seemed quite clear that the Society should
do all in its power to make the privileges of Fellowship as many as
possible for both men and women. The tendency for women to possess
knowledge in microscopical matters was growing. If women were kept
out much longer, as they certainly were being kept out by the present
conditions, the Society would have to face the certainty of taking a
much lower position among scientific societies than it had hitherto done.

Lastly, the admission of women to full privileges would undoubtedly
increase the membership of the Society. How could it be expected that
women would join in any numbers when the conditions were so unequal
for men and women ? It was a wonder that any women had joined
under such conditions, and the fact that some had so joined was, he
thought, sufficient to show that others would be glad to avail themselves
of the benefits of belonging to the Society if they could do so on equal
terms with men. That a large number of women would ever be
attracted to the Society was of course unlikely, but the present number
of lady Fellows might very well be increased four- or five-fold, and
that would mean eventually an addition of thirty or forty to the
.Society's membership.

In concluding his remarks in favour of the resolution, Mr. Scourfield
said he had not attempted to answer in advance any objections which
might be urged to the admission of women to the meetings, but he was
•most anxious to hear and consider everything that could be brought
forward by those opposed to the resolution.

Mr. Frederic J. Cheshire, in seconding the motion, said that there
were three important points that should be constantly borne in mind by
those taking part in the discussion about to take place. In the first
place, it was important to remember that this was not a motion made for
the purpose of admitting women as Fellows of the Society — that had
already been done — but simply for removing certain disabilities under
which women Fellows laboured. Secondly, the present position of the
Society as regards the question at issue was an untenable one. To require
women, as was done, to pay the same entrance and subscription fees as
men, and then to refuse them practically all the benefits of the Society,
was a procedure which could only be characterised as absolutely grotesque
in its unfairness. Thirdly, and lastly, it should be recognised that the
Society is not being asked to take a leap in the dark. Women have

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 125

already been admitted to the full benefits of several learned soeieties r
with- -so far as he, the speaker, knew or had been able to learn — nothing
but the happiest results.

The Chairman said that, before they went further, lie thought the
Society would be glad to kiw: the opinion of the Council on the
matter, and consequently he stated that at the Meeting of the Council;
it had been very carefully considered, and they had passed a resolu-
tion which it was proposed to submit to the Meeting for approval —
by which they declared that the time had arrived when this question
must be seriously considered, and they recommended that a special com-
mittee be appointed to go into the matter, and to draw up a report as
the result of their deliberations, such report to be afterwards submitted
to a special Meeting of the Society to be called by the Council, for their
acceptance or otherwise.

Mr. J. W. Gordon thought that in the present circumstances it would
be extremely inconvenient to discuss this epiestion at that Meeting,
before it had been more completely considered in all its bearings.
The question had been very fairly stated on one side by Mr. Scourfield,
but, although he had given it his best attention, he was not himself in
favour of the proposal. At the same time, he was in agreement with
Mr. Scourfield that it was a question which should be very carefully
considered, especially as there were some serious difficulties of a practical
nature to be faced in carrying out the proposal. 1. Assuming that they
had succeeded in attracting a number of ladies to the Society, a serious
question presented itself as to providing them with proper cloak-room
accommodation. There were no such conveniences available in this
building, and to provide them would, if permission were obtained to do
so, involve a considerable outlay. 2. The introduction of ladies to
their Meetings, which took place in the evening, would be very likely
to lead to what might be called the evening-dress habit ; and if this
became general it would probably affect the attendance at their Meet-
ings, by involving inconvenience to many Fellows of the Society. He
himself belonged to the Royal Institution, where ladies attend the
evening Meetings in considerable numbers, and at which consequently
the wearing of evening dress had become customary. He personally
found that by reason of the evening-dress habit he did not attend more
than three or four of these Meetings in the season, because he was
generally too busy, or, as some friend had put it, too indolent, to get
into evening dress for the purpose, and then get back into working
dress when he got home in order to resume an interrupted task at the
lathe or bench. He wished to suggest that this was a matter for
serious consideration. 3. Communications have reached the Officers of
the Society which showed that there were Fellows who took a very
strong adverse view of the proposal, and it would obviously be un-
wise to proceed with it in the face of any considerable opposition, and
possibly provoke, what had, in fact, been threatened, a secession from
the ranks of the Society. For these reasons he submitted that it would
be very desirable, before coming to any definite decision, that the opinion
of the "Fellows generally should be ascertained, and the subject in all its
aspects investigated by a committee. He therefore moved that the
suggestion of the Council be adopted, and that a small committee be

126 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

appointed to consider the matter fully and to report the result to the
Society, and submitted an amendment to that effect.

Mr. W. T. Webster thought that some of the older Fellows of the
Society should also be appointed to serve on this Committee.

Dr. Price-Jones seconded Mr. Gordon's proposal that the matter
should be referred to a committee appointed for the purpose.

The Chairman said they had received a letter from Lord Avebury
approving of the proposal to admit ladies, which letter he read to the
Meeting : — " As regards the admission of ladies, may I say that at the
Anthropological Institute and the Linnean Society we have found no
inconvenience, but, on the contrary, an advantage ; and from a practical
point of view, a substantial addition to our funds."

Mr. Heron-Allen thought the. extremely clear setting forth of the
case by Mr. Scourfield seemed to comprise everything to be said in its
favour ; but whilst some persons might think Mr. Scourfield going too
fast, others might think that Mr. Cordon was going too slow ; but the
questions was certainly a very wide one. Mr. Gordon's proposal seemed,
however, to make rather a Star Chamber matter of it, and if this
committee was appointed it seemed to him that it should be wider than
the narrow limits suggested by Mr. Gordon, and should be composed of
persons of different opinions, who should be asked beforehand if they
were in favour of the proposal or not, because if the committee con-
sisted of persons who would all go one way, their recommendation
would be a foregone conclusion. The objections put forward by
Mr. Gordon did not seem to be practical ones ; the cloak-room diffi-
culty would be solved by the non-attendance of those persons to whom
it constituted a difficulty, and the question of evening dress was not
likely to give trouble.

The Chairman hoped it would not be thought that by making this
proposal the Council desired that the subject should not be discussed, as
no doubt some Members had specially attended this Meeting with the
intention of expressing their opinions.

Mr. Hopkinson said that he could answer the two objections to the
admission of ladies to their Meetings which had been raised by
Mr. Gordon. As regards cloak-room accommodation, the Council of
the Selborne Society, on which were several ladies, met in this building,
and no difficulty had arisen ; and as to evening dress, it was not worn
at the Linnean, the Royal Meteorological, and other Societies which
admitted ladies to their Meetings. At the Linnean Society ladies had
to take off their hats, the Meeting room having a flat floor ; but this
was not necessary at the Meetings of the Royal Meteorological Society,
held in the lecture theatre of the Institution of Civil Engineers. At
their previous Meeting he heard it objected that ladies would want to
do all the talking, but in his experience with several scientific societies
it was very rarely that a lady made a remark, but if one did speak it
was audibly and to the point, which was more than could always be said
of the men. Moreover, some of the best papers recently read at the
Linnean and Geological Societies were by ladies. Since they were
admitted into the Linnean Society, four years ago, with full privileges
(one now being on the Council), about twelve per annum had been elected,
and as nearly one-third had compounded, the addition to the funds of

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 127

the Society must have already readied at least £1000. He thought
that the Fellows generally would value any step which tended to add to
their numbers, increase the attendance at their Meetings, and induce
ladies to contribute papers ; and he felt sure that the presence of ladies
would make their Meeting brighter, and on their conclusion increase
the pleasure of social intercourse. Mr. Hopkinson wished to be permitted
to add, that although ladies have not yet the privilege of Fellowship
of the Geological Society, they have lately been admitted to the Meet-
ings, and invited to speak when a paper by a lady has been read.

Mr. Wesche said it was within their knowledge that some sort of
canvass had been going on in connection with this matter, but, though
the opposition to this motion seemed rather unreasonable, it came from
Fellows of the Society whose feelings it was most repugnant to him
to hurt, and lie suggested that each Fellow should be circularised, so
that they might get a distinct idea as to the wishes of the majority, and
as to how large that majority was.

The Chairman said that there had been no official ballot taken on the
question, but it was thought that this should be done, and that was one
reason why a committee was suggested to deal with it. As regarded
abstract justice, he did not see that this entered into the question, as it
was quite competent for any number of persons to form a Society and to
make what rules and conditions they pleased, and those who joined knew
those conditions beforehand.

The Chairman was about to put Mr. Gordon's motion to the Meeting,
when Mr. Marks interposed with a question as to why the matter could
not be settled at once ?

Mr. Freshwater said he should like to ask the Chairman, before the
vote was taken, the following questions : Were not visitors present, and
and if so, was it not usual for them to retire before a special Meeting
began ? He also asked, What was the qualification for voting ? — was
there not a rule that no person should be allowed to vote if his subscrip-
tion was in arrear ?

Mr. J. W. Gordon said he understood that the mover and seconder
of the original motion had accepted the amended form suggested by the
Council, which he had moved, and which therefore stood to be voted
upon, the amendment by consent taking the place of the original motion.
It was, of course, quite competent to anyone to move a further amend-
ment, which would then have to be considered, but at present the
reference of the whole subject to a committee for investigation and report
was the only proposal before the Meeting.

Mr. Cheshire quite agreed that in a matter of this kind the greatest
tact was necessary, and that it should not be decided hastily in the face
of strong personal feelings. Under these circumstances, and in the
best interests of the Society, he thought it very desirable that all the
Fellows should be consulted, although if there was no such opposition
there did not appear to be any reason for not deciding the matter by a
vote at once.

The Chairman said that if anyone wished to move that the original
resolution be put to the Meeting at once, it was quite within his rights
to do so.

Mr. J. M. Allen said it was not a question for the Council, nor was

128 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

it one for that Meeting, but for the Society qua Society, and therefore
for all the Fellows ; and that he therefore thought that all the Fellows
should be circularised, and the opinion of each and all ascertained.

Mr. Hopkinson said that in the case of the Geological Society, a poll
having been demanded on the question of the admission of women, three
points were submitted to the Fellows : — (1) Should women be admitted
as Fellows with full privileges : (2) should they be admitted as Associates
with restricted privileges ; and (3) or not admitted at all. The result
was that a large majority were in favour of their admission as Fellows.
He thought that the committee should be more representative than the
small one proposed, and that this would tend to inspire confidence in any
decision arrived at.

Mr. Webster proposed that a circular inviting an expression of
opinion should be sent to each Fellow of the Society.

Mr. J. M. Allen seconded this.

Mr. Cheshire, rising to a point of order, said he understood from the
rules that this question could not be settled by a postal vote, but it
must be done by vote at a Special Meeting called for the purpose.

Mr. J. W. Gordon said they wanted first to find out what arrange-
ments it would be necessary to make, and whether they could be made,
hence the necessity for a committee to go fully into the matter.

The Chairman inquired if it would meet the wishes of those present
that the last proposal should be included in the resolution to be put to
the Meeting.

Mr. J. M. Allen raid he thought the Assistant Secretary should be
instructed to send a circular to every Fellow.

Dr. Hebb thought this would put the matter off a very long time,
as they had Fellows living in all parts of the world, for whose replies
it would be necessary to wait.

A Fellow thought it probable that there might be some prejudice
against such an alteration as was proposed, and, judging from Mr.
Gordon's remarks, it appeared that this was so ; the committee would
therefore have to ascertain to what extent it prevailed.

Mr. Scourfield was understood to agree to the proposal made, and
to the necessity for circularising the Fellows in order to ascertain their
feelings on the general question.

The Chairman said that, the original motion being withdrawn, he put
the amendment to the Meeting, and declared it to be carried unanimously.

The following Fellows were then appointed Members of the special
committee — Messrs. Conrad Beck, Cheshire, Hopkinson, Scourfield, and
Spitta, the President, Lord Avebury, the Treasurer and the two Secre-
taries becoming ex-officio members, in accordance with the By-laws.

PROCEEDINGS til' tiik SOCIETY. L29

ANNIYEIiSAKY MEETING

Held on the 20th oe January, 1909, at 20 Hanover Square, W
The Rt. Hon. Lord Avebury, F.R.S., etc., President, i.\ the Chair.

The Minutes of the Meeting of December 16, 1908, and qf the
Special Meeting of the same date, were read and confirmed, and were
signed by the President.

Mr. J. E. Conrady and Mr. J. I. Pigg were appointed by the
President as Scrutineers of the Ballot for Officers and Council for the
ensuing year.

A Reflecting Microscope, made by Amici, presented to the Society by
Mr. S. R. Roget, was exhibited, and was described by Mr. Rousselet,
by whom it was regarded as a very valuable donation, as the Society had
not hitherto possessed an instrument of this type. It was made in the
early part of the last century on the principle of' the Newtonian reflecting
telescope in an attempt to overcome the chromatic errors in the
Microscope — achromatic objectives not having at that time given
satisfactory results.

The President said this was a most interesting addition to their
collection of old Microscopes — for which the thanks of the Society were
unanimously voted to Mr. Roget.

Dr. Hebb said he rose to propose a vote of thanks to Sir Frank Crisp
and Mr. E. M. Nelson, who loaned several Microscopes to the Society in
order that the collection shown at the Franco-British Exhibition might
be rendered historically complete. He begged to move that the special
thanks of the Society be given to those gentlemen for their kindness.

The motion having been put to the Meeting by the President, was
unanimously carried.

Mr. Conrad Beck exhibited and described an instrument, invented
by Dr. Leslie Buchanan, consisting of two small Microscopes with
negative eye-pieces converged at an angle and used as a binocular
instrument for the examination of the eyes of patients by oculists.
The eye-pieces are prismatic and adjustable, the distance between the
eyes is adjustable — when in use it was strapped upon the head of the
operator, the eye-pieces being at a sufficient distance from his eves to
enable him to look down to select his instruments, whilst the working-
distance was about 3 in. and the magnifying power x 18.

Mr. P. Watson Baker (for Messrs. W. Watson and Sons, Ltd.),
exhibited a new form of Portable Microscope, designed to be free from
the complicated folding up and taking to pieces which is usually

Feb. 17 th, 1909 K

130 l'HOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

associated with this class of instrument. In this Microscope the legs
alone fold backwards and the mirror stem is pushed upwards through a
fitting in the stage. Provision is made, in the small leather case
measuring 7J by 4J by 3J in., for the stand, four objectives, two eye-
pieces, and other accessories.

He also exhibited a Student's Microscope of new design called the
"Standard," the chief features of which were the new design -of the
foot and a fine-adjustment working by means of a milled head at the
side of the limb, the movement being effected by a slightly coned pin
bearing against a roller, each turn of the milled head raising or lowering
the body ^io °f an mcu -

Mr. F. Plaskitt exhibited some high power photomicrographs of
Poclura scales, taken to show their transverse markings, a short paper in
description of this exhibit being read to the Meeting. The scales were
mounted dry on the cover-glass and taken on an ordinary 4-plate, being
subsequently enlarged to 10 by 8 for better inspection. The transverse
markings lie beneath the usual exclamation marks, undulating at varying
depths from side to side.

The thanks of the Society were voted to these three gentlemen for
their exhibits.

Attention was called to an exhibition by the Society under Micro-
scopes in the room of a number of slides of Foraminifera dredged off
the coast of Somaliland, presented by Mr. Heath at the last Meeting.

The Report of the Council for the year 1908 was then read to the
Meeting by Dr. Hebb.

REPORT OP THE COUNCIL FOR 1908.

FELLOWS.

During the year 1008, 15 new Fellows have been elected and 3 re-
instated ; 11 have died, 14 have resigned, and 1 has been removed.

Eight of the deceased were Fellows for from 20 to 58 years.

Among the deaths the Council regrets to notice the names of two
distinguished Fellows, viz. of Henry Clifton Sorby, F.Pt.S., a former Pre-
sident (of whom an obituary notice has already appeared in this Journal),
and of Jean Alfred Nachet,'the eminent French microscopist and optician,
who presented to the Society one of its most valuable possessions.

The list of Fellows now contains 383 Ordinary, 1 Correspond
42 Honorary, and 7i> Ex-Officio Fellows, being a total of 505.

FINANCE.

The income of the Society has not been diminished, and the subscrip-
tions have been paid with the usual regularity, but the expenditure is
still in excess of income. This can be best remedied by an increase in
the number of Members. It is to be hoped that the efforts now being

mg,

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 131

made to accomplish this desirable object will bear fruit, and early fruit ;
but the Council commends this matter to the special attention of the
Fellows, as it is only by the exercise of individual influence that new
Members can be recruited to the Society's ranks.

JOURNAL.

In the Transactions are recorded 2 1 original papers, a greater number
than the Society has received for many years.

The obituary notices of Sorby and Wenharn are of great interest and
value.

The summary of current researches in Zoology, Botany, Microscopy,
and Metallography, has maintained its previous high standard of ex-
cellence.

The extent and thoroughness of this branch of the Society's work is
limited by pecuniary considerations, and with increased financial support
the work could be made still fuller and more exhaustive than it is.

LIBRARY.

The Library has been maintained in as efficient a manner as the
funds of the Society will allow. Some valuable additions have been re-
ceived from various generous donors, both authors and publishers.

At the suggestion of a Fellow — who also offered a donation towards
the object he had in view — a subscription list has been opened for pro-
viding the funds for printing a new Catalogue. It is to be hoped that
the Fellows will liberally support this scheme, as an up-to-date record of
the Society's belongings, viz. Books, Instruments, Apparatus, and Slides,
is a desideratum.

INSTRUMENTS AND APPARATUS.

The Instruments and Apparatus in the Society's Collection continue
to be in good condition.

During the past year the following additions have been made :—

January 15.— An Old Microscope, by Jones, successor of Adams.
Presented by Mr. A. C. Michie, through Sir Frank Crisp.

April 16. — An Old Microscope, made by Shuttleworth about 1780.
Presented by Mr. Wynne E. Baxter, Treasurer.

CABINET.

The following additions to the Slide Cabinet have been made during
the past year :— a slide of Protococcus nivalis, presented by the Peary
Arctic Club; 12 beautifully mounted slides of Foramimfera, from
soundings off the coast of Soinaliland, presented by Mr. Ernest Heath.

The Council desires to recall the occasion of the Society being in-
vited to participate with other scientific and learned bodies in the
celebration of the jubilee of the joint paper by Charles Robert Darwin
and Alfred Russell Wallace by the Linnean Society, when it was re-
presented by its President ; and in this connection it is gratified to be

132 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

able to announce that Lord Avebury has also consented to honour the
Society by becoming its representative at the commemoration of the
centenary of Darwin's birth, and the fiftieth anniversary of the publi-
cation of the Origin of Species, to be held at Cambridge in June next.

To another jubilee, that of the Museum of the University of Oxford,
the Society was also bidden, when Mr. F. Shilling ton Scales represented
it on the invitation of the Council.

In response to an invitation of the British Science Section of the
Franco-British Exhibition, the Society lent a number (28) of instru-
ments in the form of a collection illustrating the progress and develop-
ment of the Microscope from the earliest times. Certain gaps were
kindly supplied by Sir Frank Crisp and Mr. E. M. Nelson.

The selection, arrangement, and description of the instruments were
carried out under the personal direction and supervision of Mr. C. F.
Rousselet, to whom the thanks of the Society are in a special measure
due in this connection.

The Society was awarded two Diplomas for Grand Prize for its
exhibit.

Quite recently a revival of a former practice has been re-inaugurated,
viz. informal meetings of Fellows on certain Wednesday evenings from
November to June. At these Sectional Meetings, which are under the
direction of Mr. Cheshire, Dr. C. Price-Jones, and Mr. D. J. Scourfield,
there will be exhibits, short papers, and discussions, relating to (1) Brass
and Glass ; (2) Bacteriology and Protozoology ; and (3) Pond-life.

On December 16, 1908, a Special Meeting was held, in response to
a demand by eleven Fellows, for the purpose of considering the amend-
ment to the By-laws in reference to the admission of female Fellows to
the Meetings, and to participating in the management of the Society.
After discussion, the following resolution was passed : —

" That in the opinion of this Meeting the time has now arrived when
the question of the admission of women Fellows to the full privileges of
the Society must be seriously considered, and that a special committee be
appointed for the purpose of considering the proposals dealing with this
subject, and preparing a report thereon, to be submitted to a further
special Meeting of the Society to be called for the purpose by the
Council."

The Council anticipates that the special committee will be able to
report in the course of a few weeks, and that the question will be settled
during the current session.

The Treasurer also submitted his Statement of Accounts and duly
Audited Balance Sheet.

The President, in moving that the Report of the Council and the
Treasurer's Balance Sheet be received and adopted, and printed and
circulated in the usual way, said that, though their balance in hand was.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

oo

T2

© o n co

02

(hh
<l
w
>1

H

p-i
o
PR

52;

H

w

CO

o

&

_• o X H H

1— 1 rH t— I

„ 53 r-. o CN

«+l CO SO O

CO "*l O r-l O t> SO CO O CO

00 (P O MO » 05 CO O (B

1— t rH rH !— (

O CO 1— I 1— 1 JO o

CO CM

-r

o3

P
—

Tj CM ■*! I CD

000

»-- CO ^
1— -HH

cd
O

if.

>h .5

B ® •§

» c3 o o

PHtcpqpq

-CO CO

. •* CO

P

o

*"' bC

=*h a
a-

be

en

o
Ph

OB'S

« s

O c3
*» tf J
43 r3

— —

EH
X

O

CO

CD

co ^ a

CD

CO

co

P»o3

'-♦!

a

CD

a

o
en
~ co

"« a

§Ph.

o -

CD l " H

a) -a

c3

_p O

p rrj O

CD CO

a a
o 1— 1

o3 02

-h C73
n3 o
rP C3

CD c^-.

bO o
03 *=

i -p

3 ■" cd £ .P -
Ph M«2|JmPhPhP5QM

05 -w CD

*■• - P °

— en r-

03 O 3

a- a* J2

CU CD

., co t^

^ 10 OJ

locoenooeoosooo

o 10 O O O CO CN -H H o

OO't^OKhMOHO
-— 1 iro 00 CO O

CO <M CM

OHNOSOO
COHOt-HOH

co 1— 1 en 1— 1 co 1— m

C+J 1— 1 CO CO CM

c*l

t>

o
05

I— I

2;

p

«n

CD '
O

a

"3'

«•
o

p
o.

1 _ -*h O CO t> 00 OS O

03 O

a <-•

a

<

0000
O cr oa Ci

a

CD

CD

"-

o

en

o
P3

£.2 2 CO

a S 3,5.

hh E cd o.

o —

as o

s 3 a j; 5
3 o cd 5 iv-

° 1-^ .2 02 M

« Cm -g «4i

«ogo

CD CD > 'CD T

a'3'5'3

£ 02 <! co

CD

* CO

* o

<D c*h

CD

a
b£

S3

O
>.

s

o
-m

o -

V.

V'

c— w

'-

"2

2

a J
~

V

L.

C-H

•a

W

92Sh

H

~ j, sc as

<
pq

og«3

h- CD O

- a ° «

en en . w

3 n^'H

W

IZi

5 T3

h

►? p

^

> '-a

CD 13

^j

O O O O

^§

H

co

O

HJ-d"

c= a

«+{

O

CD .2

O O O O CM

CM

§a

-*l -f T 1 t~ rl

O

CM

S <u

. ,

Hi

3

CD H

• • •

^a cd

— >

: :

2^

* -/

" /.'

4-1 en

a- ca

a co

0^

C CD

ao

: 3 sh

T3 "C

■*J

Ph i

P P

S

^T Ph

S3 CD

*

® r

CD

• Cy c *h

p EhW

HJ~C0
S «

g

•^ c3

CO

§"8

S

CD r—

2

Ph

<c_

»+l w

■CO c3 "T3

X r '?

a fi as

.a >■

way
ratio

Thr€
ents.
er Bo

*

=3 as *

CC CD

CD >

itish R
am Cor
th Wal
ree per
itan W

j S3

T3 CD

CD i
P

hBr
ingh
Sou
a Tii
ropol

a te

S3 -h

S.2

CD O

03

o ©

m02

03 O

P Ph
O CD

CI
O
CO

-«

C3»

4

134 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

■only a small one, it was satisfactory to note that it was on the right side.
As regarded the mention in the Report of their exhibit at the Franco-
British Exhibition, he should have been very glad to have coupled
Mr. Gordon's name with that of Mr. Rousselet, with whom he had been
associated in making the arrangements, but with his usual modesty
Mr. Gordon had not wished this to be done, and as he was a Member of
the Council and one of their Hon. Secretaries it was agreed that the
name should be omitted.

The Motion was then put to the Meeting and carried by acclamation.

The Scrutineers, having handed in their Report on the result of the
ballot, the following gentlemen were declared to have been unanimously
elected as Officers and Council of the Society for the ensuing year : —

President— Sir Edwin Ray Lankester, K.C.B. M.A. LL.D. F.R.S.
F.L.S. F.Z.S.

Vice-Presidents — Frederic J. Cheshire ; Rev. W. H. Dallinger,
LL.D. D.Sc. D.C.L. F.R.S. F.L.S. F.Z.S. ; The Right Hon. Sir Ford
North, P.C. F.R.S. ; E. J. Spitta, L.R.C.P. (Loud.) M.R.C.S. (En?.).

Treasurer— Wynne E. Baxter, J.P. F.G.S. F.R.G.S.

Secretaries— R. G. Hebb, M.A. M.D. F.R.C.P. ; J. W. Gordon.

Ordinary Members of Council — F. W. Watson Baker ; A. N. Disnev,
M.A. B.Sc. ; J. W. H. Eyre, M.D. F.R.S. (Edin.) ; Edward Heroii-
Allen, F.L.S. F.Z.S. F.R.Met.S. ; Henry Geo. Plimmer, F.L.S. ; Thomas
H. Powell ; C. Price-Jones, M.B. (Lond.) ; P. E. Radley ; Julius
Rheinberg ; Charles F. Rousselet : F. Shillington Scales, M.A. (Cantab.) ;
David J. Scourfield, F.Z.S.

Librarian — Percy E. Radley.

( 'urator of Instruments, etc. — Charles F. Rousselet.

Curator of Slides — F. Shillington Scales, M.A. (Cantab.).

The President then read his Annual Address, entitled " On Seeds,
with Special Reference to British Plants." In this he more particularly
•dealt with the seeds of Gymnosperms and Monocotyledons, in continuation
of the address of the previous year, in which the seeds of Dicotyledons
were considered. At the conclusion of his address the President took
the opportunity of thanking the Society and the Council for their
courtesy and kindness to himself during his period of office ; especially
he wished to thank their Secretaries, Dr. Hebb and Mr. Gordon. He
felt all the more grateful to them because, on accouut of important
debates in the House of Lords having been fixed for the nights of the
Society's Meetings, he was prevented from attending so regularly as he
■could have wished. He might also mention that he had for more than
half a century been a Member of the Society, and was, in fact, one of
their two or three oldest Members. He congratulated the Society upon
having elected as their next President Sir Edwin Ray Lankester, and it
was a matter of satisfaction to him to know that his successor in that
chair would be one of the most able naturalists in this country and in the
world. He hoped the Society would be even more prosperous in the
future than in the past.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 1 :''- r >

Dr. D. H. Scott said he rose to propose the thanks of the Society to
Lord Avebury for what they must all feel had been an extremely in-
teresting address. He was sorry to think that Lord Avebury's presidency
would now end, but he was quite sure they would all agree with the
President's remarks as to his successor, Sir E. Ray Lankester. The
subject chosen was not only remarkable in itself for the interest attaching
to it, but Lord Avebury spoke upon it with an authority possessed by
no one else — they all knew his books on seedlings, so closely related with
the subject of his address, and there was simply an infinity of points of
interest which had been touched upon, as they would realise even better
when they came to read the paper in print. The study of seeds was of
great botanical importance from many points of view, and he had him-
self been particularly interested in their early history. He did not
think anything like all the categories of seeds enumerated seemed to
have been represented in the Palaeozoic floras. They did not, for
example, find there the very small seeds like those of Poppies or Orchids,
which did not appear to have been elaborated then, which was curious
because the sporangium from which the seed was presumably derived
was of comparatively small size ; the fleshy, drupe-like seeds of the
Cycad type were, however, very characteristic of Palaeozoic times.
The work of Mr. Clement Reid had been attended with remarkable
success in identifying the plants of the Glacial and Post-Glacial periods
by means of their seeds, results which had only been obtained by very
minute study. The glimpses which they got all through the address of
the innumerable adaptations for the dispersal of seeds were always very
fascinating, and although there were persons in the present day who
sought to minimise the importance of adaptation, he had always thought
it was the great point of Darwin's theory that it alone afforded an
explanation, other than a supernatural one, of teleology. He had much
pleasure in moving that the best thanks of the Society be given to
Lord Avebury for his address, and that he would allow it to be printed
in the Journal of the Society.

Mr. Wynne E. Baxter had much pleasure in seconding the resolution,
especially as it gave him an opportunity of expressing the pleasure all
felt to see the ex-President amongst them again. Lord Avebury was
almost the oldest Fellow of the Society, and his engagements were
certainly as numerous as most. He thought, therefore, they would
understand that their President had had great difficulty in being able to
come to their Meetings, and they were all very much obliged to him for
coming as often as he could. He hoped that his lordship had yet many
years of health and usefulness before him.

Dr. Scott having put the resolution to the Meeting, it was carried
unanimously, with applause.

The President said he was very much obliged to Dr. Scott and to
their Treasurer for their extremely kind remarks. Dr. Scott had made
some very interesting suggestions with regard to the older plants, but
it should be remembered that it was the parasitic plants which had the
small seeds, and it seemed quite natural that in the Carboniferous periods
there should have been no seeds adapted to birds, because there were no
birds till long subsequently. He thanked the Fellows of the Society
very heartily for their resolution.

136 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

Mr. J. M. Offord moved that the thanks of the Society be given to
the Honorary Officers of the Society for their services during the past
year. They were greatly indebted to them for the time and attention
given to its affairs, and for the large amount of work done, and though
much of this was not known to the Members generally, they were very
glad to have this opportunity of expressing their appreciation of the
management of the Society.

Mr. Plaskitt having seconded the motion,

The President said that, though he had not been able to attend all
the Meetings, he had been often enough to appreciate the very valuable
services rendered by the Officers and Council. The motion was then
put to the Meeting, and carried unanimously.

Mr. J. W. Gordon said he had been asked to acknowledge this vote
of thanks on behalf of his colleagues, and thought that the selection had
fallen upon him because lie happened to be the junior member of the
party. So far as he knew, the chief anxiety connected with their work
lay with their Honorary Treasurer in the matter of getting in the sub-
scriptions ; but apart from the annual difficulty arising from how to meet
their expenses, the rest of their duties were a pleasure, bringing them
into pleasant contact with many friends connected with the Society. He
could only assure them that their best efforts would be made in the
interest of the Society during their coming year of office. Whilst speak-
ing, he would take the opportunity of reminding them that the next
meeting of the " Brass and Glass " section would take place on
Wednesday the 27th inst.

Mr. W. J. Marshall moved a vote of thanks to the Auditors and
Scrutineers for their services.

Mr. Gardner having seconded the motion, it was put to the Meeting
by the President, and unanimously carried.

The following Instruments, Objects, etc., were exhibited :—

The Society : — Twelve Slides of Foraminif era, dredged from off the coast

of Somaliland.
Messrs P. and J. Beck : — Dr. Buchanan's Corneal Microscope.
Messrs. Watson and Sons : — New " Club " Portable Microscope and New

" Standard " Microscope, for students.
Mr. F. J. W. Plaskitt : — Photomicrographs of Podura scale, showing

transverse markings.

New Fellows : — The following were balloted for and duly elected
Ordinary Fellows of the Society : — Fred. William Gordon, Ernest Heath,
Robert Kennedy Levett, and Edward James Sheppard.

JOUENAL

OF THE

ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

APRIL, 1909.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY

VII. — The President" s Address : On Seeds, with Special Reference to

British Plants.

By The Right Hon. Lord Avebury, P.C. D.C.L. LL.D. F.R.S.

(Read January 20, 1909.)

Following to some extent the example of my distinguished pre-
decessor, I devoted my Address last year to the consideration of
"Seeds, with Special Reference to British Plants," but time and
space compelled me to restrict my remarks to Dicotyledons. At
the same time, however, I intimated that if it met with your
approval I should hope this year to deal with the Gymnosperms
and Monocotyledons.

Your courtesy in printing the Address, and the demand I have
experienced for separate copies, encourage me in the hope that I
shall be acting in accordance with your wishes in carrying out this
year the remainder of my programme.

Gymnosperms.

Coniferje. — Although the Conifers form so important an
element in our woodland scenery, they are only represented in
Britain by four indigenous and one introduced, or, rather, re-intro-
duced species, belonging to three, in many respects very distinct,
genera. The flowers are monoecious or dioecious ; the ovules and
seeds are naked, that is to say, there is neither ovary, style, nor
pericarp. The fruits differ widely in aspect, though in origin they
are similar.

In the Pines, Firs, etc., the micropyle points away from the free
April 21st, 1909 l

138

Transactions of the Society.

margin of the scale ; in the Cypresses, on the other hand, towards
the free margin, and away from the axis of the cone.
The cotyledons are often numerous.

In the Ginkgo tree (Ginkgo biloba) the integument of the seed
becomes succulent and is of a bright orange colour. It is a remark-
able species in many ways. It possesses mobile antherozoids,* a pro-
vision which does not, so far as we know, occur in any Phanerogams,
or in any other Gymnosperms except Cycas and Zamia. They
swim by means of cilise.

Pinus sylvestris (the Scotch Pine). — The fruit is a cone, consist-
ing of more or less hardened, imbricated scales, each protecting
two winged seeds (fig. 20). These are easily transported by the
wind, and the cones themselves are often carried by squirrels and
birds. The scales are more or less thickened, or " umbonate,"

at the apex, and especially on the outer
aspect.

The cones take two years to ripen, and
often remain for several more attached to
the tree. Sooner or later, however, the
scales open in dry and warm weather,
liberating the seeds. These are produced
into a wing four or five times as long as
the seed itself. The wing is straight on
one edge, and more or less curved on the
other. This form is due to there being two
seeds to each scale.

The texture of the wing is very thin,
pale brown, subtransparent, and finely
As in many other cases where there is a
single wing, the centre of gravity is excentric, which gives the
seed a spinning motion, and thus facilitates its passage through
the air.

In several species of Pine, as, for instance, in P. serotina, the
scales are produced into sharp spines, which serve to protect the
seeds. In other cases they are protected by the resin contained in
the scales. The development of the seed is slow.

The pollen is shed in spring, it then remains dormant, or, rather,
completing its development, for more than a year, and the ovule is
not fertilised till the following July, more than twenty months
after its commencement.

Juniperus. — We have two species. In J. communis the flowers
are usually dioecious.

The fruit of the Juniper is known as a galbulus. It is com-
posed of decussating whorls of three scales, which are evidently
homologous with leaves, and serially continuous with them. The

Fig. 20.— Seeds of Scotch
Pine. Nat. size.

SS, seed-scale ; ch, chalaza ;
MM, micropyles of the
two seeds.

striate longitudinally.

Hirare, Journ. Coll. Sci. Imp. Uniy, Japan, 1895 and 1898.

The President's Address. By Lord Avcbury. 139

outer or lower whorls remain small and infertile ; the scales are
triangular, with an acute cuspidate point, and arranged in six rows.
The leaves of one or two of the inner whorls alone are fertile, each
bearing one or two ovules. These enlarge, gradually envelop the
seeds, become fleshy and more or less connate, forming what
appears to be a berry, at first green but ultimately blue-black and
glaucous. It takes two years to mature. Each fruit contains three
to six, or even more, seeds. The seeds are ovoid or trigonous, or
variously angled by mutual pressure, and contain much resin. The
testa is hard and bony.

In J, nana the fruits are rather longer in proportion.

Taxiis (the Yew). — In the Yew the flowers are mostly dioecious ;
the scales remain small and infertile, while a single ovule at the
apex of the twig develops, and is surrounded by a large, cup-like,
pulpy aril. This is a favourite food of thrushes, which either
swallow the fruit entire, or reject the stone when swallowing the
aril. In either case the hard woody coat of the seed preserves it
from digestion, and it passes through the alimentary canal without
injury to the embryo.

CYCADAOEiE. — The Cycadacea?-, which used to be placed near the

r

Fig. 21.— Cycas. Section through Fig. 22.— Mature anthe-

nearlv ripe spermatozoid. x 300. rozoid of Zamia. x 90.

After" Ikeno. (From Journ. Coll. After Webber. (From

Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokio, 1898-1900, Bot. Gaz., xxiv. 1897,

pi. xiii. fig. 32.) p- 18, fig. 4.)

Palms, or even the Tree-ferns, are evidently more nearly related
to the Conifers.

The ovules are naked, sessile, and orthotropous. The seed is
drupe-like, with several openings corresponding to the embryonic
vesicles, from which proceed folded cords, terminating in embryos,
one of which only is developed. The testa is fleshy outside,
crustaceous within' ; the albumen is fleshy, with a central cavity in
which is the embryo. The cotyledons cohere so closely, that there
seems to be only one.

A very remarkable point connected with the Cycadacea? is that,
as already mentioned, they possess mobile so-called spermatozoids.
The large pluricellular pollen-grains are sucked into the pollen
chamber, which is provided with a special strand of tracheides

l-2

140 Transactions of the Society.

to insure a supply of moisture, and there undergo a period of
maturation, after which free-swimming bodies are liberated. These,
therefore, do not correspond to the pollen of other plants, but to
the special fertilising cell. The possibility of this was long ago
foreshadowed by Hofmeister and by Pringsheim.

This remarkable fact was first discovered by Hirase * in Salis-
buria, confirmed by Ikenof in Cycas (fig. 21), and by Webber X
in Zamia (fig. 22).

The antherozoids of the Ginkgo are egg-shaped, those of Zamia
are pear-shaped, with a spiral ciliated band.

Monocotyledons.

HvDROOHARiDEiE. — The species of this order are aquatic, mostly
submerged, and in some cases marine, occurring on the shores
of the| Indian and Pacific Oceans, and of the West Indian islands.
There are fourteen genera, and about forty species.

The flowers are produced singly, or several together in spathes,
which raise themselves above the water, when the flowers are about
to open.

The ovary is inferior, 1-celled, with three parietal placentas,
or divided, sometimes into as many as nine cells. The fruit, which
is small and indehiscent, ripens under water. The seeds are few or
many. They are generally small, covered with filaments or spiny
in Limnobium, rugose or spiny in Thalassia. There is no albumen.
We have two native genera, each with one species.

, Hydrocharis Morsus-ranx , the Frogbit, is a floating plant ; the
perianth has three outer segments, which are pale green, shorter
and narrower than the inner ones, which are white.

The fruit is fleshy, small, ovoid or narrowed at the base in
its early stages, and strongly 6-ribbed, indicating the six carpels
of which it is composed. The ovules are numerous and inserted on
the septa, but only a few develop into seeds, which are small, ovoid,
and imbedded in a jelly-like mucus or pulp. These are not
naturally liberated until the decay of the fruit, which, however, is
no doubt often attacked by birds and other animals, which thus
effect the distribution of the seeds.

The plant, like many other aquatic species, also multiplies by

, * Hirase, S., "On the Spermatozoid of Giyikgo biloba." Bot. Mag. Tokio, x.(1896).
" Etud. s.l. fecondation et l'Embryogenie du Ginkgo biloba." Journ. Coll. Sci. Imp.
Univ. Japan, 1895.

t Ikeno, S., " Unt. u.d. Entw. d. Geschlechts organ bei Cycas revoluta." Journ.
Coll. Sci. Imp. Univ. Japan, 1890. See also Jahr. f. Wiss. Bot., xxxii. heft 4
(Leipzig, 1898).

X Webber, H. J., " Spermatogenesis of Zamia and the Pollen-tube App. of
Ginkgo." U.S. Dep. of Agric. Washington, 1901. " Div. of the Antherozoids of
Zamia." Bot. Gaz. Chicago, 1897.

The President's Address. By Lord Accbury. 141

means of small ovoid bulbs or bulb-like structures, which detach
themselves from the parent plant, and no doubt are carried about
by the water or by animals.

Though we have only two native species, a third representative
of the order, Elodea canadensis — a native, as its name denotes, of
North America — is now firmly established in our waters. It appeared
in Ireland in 1836 and in Great Britain a few years later, and
spread rapidly. The plants are dicecious, and the male, which is
rare in America, has not yet been observed here, except near
Edinburgh.

The plant is very brittle, which materially assists in its
dispersal.

Stratiotes. — The male flowers of Stratiotes have about twelve
fertile stamens, and fifteen to thirty others which serve as honey-
glands. The female flowers have similar honey-glands. It is said
that in Northern Europe no male flowers have been observed, while
in Holstein they are not infrequent. The increase is with us mainly
by offshoots. During the winter the plant remains at the bottom
of the water. In spring it rises to the surface, producing fresh
leaves, flowers, and floating roots. After flowering it again sinks,
so that the seeds ripen in safety. Young plants are also pro-
duced at the end of long stalks which spring from between the
leaves. Towards the end of August the plant rises a second
time, and is at first surrounded by the young ones. The connect-
ing stalks then die and decay, thus setting them free. Finally,
they descend to the bottom for the winter.

Oechidace.e. — We have in Britain sixteen or seventeen genera
and about forty-four species. The ovary is inferior, 1-celled, with
three parietal placentas, though there are a few species of Cypri-
pedium, in which the ovary is perfectly 3-celled.

The testa is loose and reticulate, in a few cases flattened out
into a wing. These, and indeed all the seeds, are no doubt dis-
persed by the wind. They would, moreover, of course readily
adhere to any passing animal.

The capsule is 3-valved, with innumerable minute more or
less fusiform seeds (fig. 23). It has been estimated that a capsule

Fig. 23. — Seed of Orchis maculata. x 40.

of Cattleya contains more than 1,000,000, and the seed of G-oodyrra
repens is said to weigh only 0*000002 of a gram.

In some tropical Orchids, as, for instance, in Vanda, the fruits
■contain, besides the small seeds, hair-like cells with oblicpiely pitted
walls. These are very hygroscopic, and twist about if the con-
ditions of the air vary, thus carrying the seeds from the interior to

142 Transactions of the Society.

the surface of the capsule, and exposing them to the action of
wind.

In some species the ovules are undeveloped or very rudimentary
when the plant is in flower. According to Hildebrancl, in Den-
drobium the formation of the ovules has not yet commenced, even
the placentae are not fully developed, and it is not till four months
after the deposition of the pollen that the formation of the embryo
begins.

Iride.e. — The flower, is superior, with six petal-like leaves.
The ovary is inferior, 3-celled, with many ovules.

The order is a large one, comprising 700 or more species,
inhabiting especially South Africa and other dry, sunny climates.
Five genera and six species only are truly British, four others
being more or less naturalised.

The fruit is a capsule, bursting from the apex to the base into
three valves, along the line of the dorsal suture. Each cell may
contain few or many seeds, superposed in a double row. The seeds
of our British species are relatively large, but differ considerably in
this respect. They may be globose, angled, flattened, and some-
times winged. At least two types may occur in the same genus.
The embryo is small.

Iris. — We have two species, 7. fcetidissima, the Blue, and
/. Pseudacorus, the Yellow Flag.

The seeds of the former are large, globular, smooth, glossy, and
rich orange-red, or even scarlet. The bright colour, perhaps,,
deceives birds into the belief that they are sweet, and may thus
assist in their dissemination. The testa is fleshy.

Fig. 24. — Seed of Drosera rotundifolia. x 20.

The seeds of I. Pseudacorus are yellowish-red or brown ; more
numerous, much flattened by mutual pressure, when young and
soft. The testa is less spongy than in I. fojtidissima.

The seeds of Gladiolus illyricus have a narrow wing. In G.
communis it is broader. The capsule opens at the upper end and
the seeds are jerked out. Perhaps their bright colour may assist
in their dispersal by birds.

Dioscoeide^;. — The flowers are unisexual, with a perianth of
six divisions. The stamens are also six in number. The ovary is
inferior, 3-celled, and with one to three ovules in each cell. Styles
or stigmas, three. The embryo is minute, and the albumen hard.

The order includes eight genera, with about 200 species, mostly
inhabitants of hot countries. The fruits are baccate in about half
the species, and capsular in the other half. The seeds are globose,,
or flattened, and even winged, as in Dioscorea.

Two species only are European.

The President's Address. By Lord Avebury. 143

We have only one British, the Black Bryony, Tamus com-
munis. It does not extend to Scotland or Ireland, and is, indeed,
confined to the South of England. It is widely distributed over
Europe, North Africa, and temperate Asia.

The flowers are small, yellowish-green, in slender racemes. The
berry is oblong, indehiscent, bright red at maturity, and contains
about five seeds.

The seeds are large, globular, minutely and finely netted, the
meshes being arranged, more or less regularly, in longitudinal lines.
They are slightly flattened at each end, like an orange. The testa
is membranous, and light reddish-brown.

The fruit, though not attractive to us, is eaten by birds. The
seeds, being very hard, no doubt escape digestion, and are in all
probability as a rule rejected.

The cotyledon has lost almost all trace of its leafy character,
and seems to absorb nourishment from the seed.

In the first year only one leaf develops. It is situated almost,
or perhaps directly opposite to the cotyledon, so that it might
easily be taken for a second cotyledon.

Miss Sargant * has adopted the suggestion originally made by
Agardh, that the Monocotyledons are derived from Dicotyledonous
ancestors, and their single cotyledon is derived from the fusion of
the two cotyledons of their ancestral Dicotyledon. Some of the
Kanunculacere show, no doubt, a tendency in this direction, as, for
instance, species of Ranunculus, Trollius, Delphinium, Anemone,
Aconitu/n, Eranthis, etc. More or less similar cases occur in other
orders, as, for instance, in Corydalis. Miss Sargant also points out
that some Monocotyledonous cotyledons seem to show traces of a
double origin : thus, that of Chamtvrops humilis has a bifid apex,
and that of C. Fortunei is even more completely bilobed. I doubt,
however, whether these cases have in reality any bearing on the
problem. It seems more probable f that the advantage is in
giving greater strength.

On the other hand, Mr. Hill % considers that the Monocoty-
ledonous habit may have been acquired by the adaptation of the
two cotyledons of the ancestral Dicotyledons to different functions
— one acting as a suctorial organ, the other developing into a typical
aerial leaf.

Amaryllide^:.— The ovary is inferior and 3-celled. The fruit
is a capsule, opening in three valves, loculicidally, or fleshy and
indehiscent. The seeds are few, numerous, or reduced to one only.
The order comprises about sixty genera and 650 species, mostly
perennial and bulbous. The species grow mostly in tropical and
warm regions. We have three genera and four species, two of

* Sargant, Ann. of Bot., xvii.

t Aveburv, " On Seedlings," pp. 90-97.

% Ann. of Bot., xx. (1906).

144 Transactions of the Society.

which, however, are so often grown in gardens that it is very
doubtful whether they are truly native.

The seeds are sometimes flattened, or angled by mutual pressure.

LiliacEjE. — Over 2500 species are recorded, generally annual or
perennial herbs, often bulbous, but sometimes shrubby, or even in
some few cases attaining the size of a tree. The bulbous species
are partial to dry, sandy, or gravelly soil, the alluvial banks of
rivers, meadows, and woods.

In Britain we have nineteen genera and thirty-six species.

The ovary is free, 3-celled, with several or rarely only one ovule
in each. The fruit of our British species is a capsule, except in
Paris, Ruscus, Asparagus, Polygonatum, Maianthemum, and Con-
vallaria, which have baccate fruits. These are red, except in Paris
and Polygonatum, which have bluish-black berries. The carpels
of Tofieldia are almost free, and might be called follicles.

The seeds are generally globose, and very hard in Ruscus,
Asparagus, Convallaria, Polygonatum, Maianthemum, Simethis,
Scilla nutans, Muscari raccmosnm, Ornithogalum nutans, Gagea,
Paris, and Colchicum.

Scilla verna, S. autumnalis, and Ornithogalum have smaller
capsules and angular seeds, as also have some species of Allium
(the Onions) and Lloydia.

Fritillaria, Tulipa, and Lilium have a different type of seed.
In these species they are very numerous, and superposed in two
rows, densely packed, much compressed and flattened, horizontal,
and more or less winged.

Some species multiply by means of bulbils or small lateral
bulbs. These send out roots which grow horizontally at a right
angle to the axis of the parent bulb. They attain a considerable
length, and when they cease growing they are said to contract and
thus to draw the young bulbil away from the parent bulb. Such
cases are said to occur in Allium,, Muscari, Ornithogalum and
Tulipa.

Lilium bulbiferum ot the Swiss Alps, which is sometimes
considered, as for instance by Grenier and Godron,* to be a local
form of L. croceum, hardly ever produces fruits, but is propagated
by bulbils, which are formed in the axils of the leaves. Kerner
statesj that there is no difference noticeable in the structure of
the flowers in these two Orange Lilies, and it is difficult to explain
their difference in mode of propagation, save on the assumption
that in the regions where L. bulbiferum grows, those insects
are wanting which should convey its pollen from flower to flower.
As the Orange Lily possesses no arrangements for autogamy, no
fruits are formed in the absence of insect-visits. It appears that
this plant has lost the capacity for autogamy ; at any rate if a

* Flore de France, iii. p. 182. t Nat. Hist, of Plants, ii. p. 461.

The President's Address. By Lord Avebury. 145

stigma be pollinated with pollen from the same flower, on plants
in a garden, no result follows. On the other hand, offshoots in
the form of numerous bulbils are produced by L. bulhiferum,
by means of which it is propagated and dispersed. In several
valleys of the Central Alps it does not flower at all, and thus
obviously depends entirely upon its bulbils for propagation.

Allium {A. Ampeloprasum). — The fruit is a trigonous 3-celled
capsule, dehiscing at the dorsal suture. One or two seeds in each
cell come to maturity ; they are more or less acutely angled,
conforming to the cavity of the cell. The testa is membranous,
black, and more or less wrinkled. It is generally carried up on
the tip of the cotyledon during germination. One variety has
bulbils at the base of the umbel.

A. ursinum. — According to Scott Elliot, the seed of this
species germinates at the surface of the earth, but is then carried
down to a depth of 3-4 mm. by a peculiar elongation of the stalk
of the cotyledon.

Paris. — In P. quadrifolia the ovary is a bluish-black or dull
reddish colour, which perhaps attracts flies by its resemblance to a
piece of decaying meat.

Asparagus.— In A. officinalis the fruit is also a berry, globose,
smooth, shining, red, and 3-celled, with three to six seeds.
These are large, flattened on the ventral aspect, hard, black, and
smooth to the naked eye. Their dispersal is evidently due to
birds.

Scilla (S. nutans, or festalis), the Bluebell Scilla.— The fruit is
a 3-celled, many seeded capsule, dehiscing from the apex about
half way down, so that it forms a cup, out of which the seeds are
jerked by the wind, or by passing animals. As is so often the
case in plants having such an arrangement, the seeds are black and
glossy.

Ornithogalum (0. nutans). — In this species the arrangement
resembles that in Scilla nutans. The seeds, as in that species, are
black and glossy.

Narthecium (N. ossifragum). — In this species also the fruit is a

Fig. 25. — Seed of Narthecium ossifragum. (From "Notes on
British Flowering Plants." Macmillan & Co.)

capsule, which dehisces at the summit, and the seeds are jerked
out as in the preceding species. They are, however, very different,
being small, narrowly oblong, striate and pale yellow. The testa
at each end is prolonged into a long, slender, colourless tail. The
central part is only 1 ■ 5 mm. in length, while that of the whole
seed is 8-9 mm. (fig. 25).

146 Transactions of the Society.

This peculiar form would perhaps enable them to float longer,
and prevent them from sinking into the marsh. It could also
serve to attach them to aquatic plants, and to birds.
Seeds of this peculiar form also appear in Nepenthes.
Colchicum (C. autumnale). — What appears to be the flower-
stalk is really the tube of the corolla, and the ovary is under-
ground. Perhaps the advantage of this is that as the plant is an
autumn flower, and lives in northern and mountainous districts,
the seeds would not have time to ripen before the cold weather
sets in. The seed capsule remains, however, underground all the
winter, rising to the surface and ripening its seeds in the following
spring.

The seeds have a comparatively large caruncle, which becomes
viscid when wet, and thus adheres to the feet of passing
quadrupeds.

Juncace^e. — The fruit of this order also consists of three
carpels, and is either 1-celled or 3-celled according to the
degree of development of the septa. The seeds are in some
species few, in others numerous. The capsules dehisce in a
variety of ways, the most frequent being loculicidal, while some
are indehiscent. Our two British genera, the Eush (Juncus) and
the Wood-rush (Luzula) are very widely distributed on the earth's
surface, while the other genera are confined to the Southern
Hemisphere.

About 200 species have been described.

The seeds are ovoid, elliptic, or globose ; very rarely flattened.
Juncus (the Rush). — The fruit is a capsule, opening at the
summit, and from which the seeds are jerked.
The elasticity of the rigid stem assists in this
^""iA considerably.

k. The seeds differ considerably in size and

:\] number. Another striking difference is that in

w some species the testa is closely applied to the

endosperm ; while in others it is produced into a
ty-XJ loose colourless tail at each end, which is con-

tinuous with the funicle or seed stalk at the

SeeToi' Juncus baSe -

acutus. x % 15. ^ ne ^ rst g rou P includes J. conglomerate, J.

ap, op, appendage ; ^US, J. glauCUS, J. balticus, J. filiformis, J.
R, raphe. squarrosus, J. compressus, J. articulatus, J. supi-

nus, J. lamprocarpus, and J. bufonius.

The testa is prolonged and colourless in J. acutus (fig. 26),
J. maritimus, J. triglumis, J. biglumis, J. trifidus, and J. castaneus.
This form reminds us of that in Narthecium ossifragum, and may
be an advantage for the same reason.

The largest seeds are those of J. squarrosus, J. acutus and
J. supinus, while those of J. lamprocarpus, though the plant is
many times larger, are very small, but much more numerous.

The President's Address. By Lord Avehury. 147

A remarkable feature in the flowering of rushes is that it
occurs in pulses. For some days, perhaps, no flowers will be open ;
then, suddenly, without apparently any change in the weather to
account for it, the flowers will all open together. The feature is
especially marked in the species which have single, or few flowers.
For wind-fertilised species the arrangement is obviously advan-
tageous. The flowers open once for all.

Luzula (Wood-rush). — The capsules are 1-celled, with only
three seeds, one for each carpel. The seeds are much larger
than in Juncus.

Those of L. campestris have a marked prolongation of the
testa at the base ; those of L. Forsteri, on the contrary, at the
apex.

Typhace.e. — The Typhaceas are monoecious wind flowers.
The fruit is a small seed-like nut of one or two carpels, 1 or
2-celled, with a solitary pendulous seed in each cell, on a long
thread-like stalk, which bears long silky hairs, insuring dispersal
by the wind. The albumen is copious.

The order is a very small one, comprising only sixteen species,
of which seven are British. They are distributed over Europe,
temperate and tropical Asia, Australia, and the temperate parts of
North America, in shallow streams, ponds, and marshes.

In Britain we have two genera, Typha and Sparganium ; the
former with two, the latter with three or perhaps five species.

Typha (the Eeed-mace). — The inflorescence is a cylindrical
spike, sometimes interrupted in the middle, with male flowers
above and female below. The fruit is reduced to a single carpel
with one seed, having a striated testa, and conforming to the cavity
of the carpel. They are small, densely packed, terminated by a
long style, and enveloped in a copious down (fig. 27), and the
whole is so fluffy, or chaffy, and light, that it is easily blown about
by the wind, or by the water, on which the seeds would float.

Sparganium (Burr-reed). — In Sparganium the flowers form
globular heads, placed at intervals along the summit of the stem,
with leaf-like bracts under the lower ones. The upper heads
are male, the lower ones female, consisting of sessile ovaries, each
surrounded by three or six scales, forming a perianth.

Each fruit consists of one or two carpels, and when mature
consists of an ovoid seed, on a cuneate base, as If stalked, and
terminating in a beak, which is 1- or 2-celled, thick-walled, spongy,
and indehiscent.

S. ramosum has the inflorescence branched and the beak short,
as it is also in S. mini mum. In S. simplex it is much longer.

Auoide.e. Summary of the Order.— Though represented in
Britain by three species only, the order is a large one, including
98 to 100 genera and 900 or more species, abounding in the tropics
of both hemispheres, climbing to the tops of tall trees, and forming
the chief constituent of the lianes of tropical forests. Many of them

348

Transactions of the Society.

t

Fig. 27.— Seed of Typha.

s TJie President's Address. By Lord Avebury. 149

are lowly herbs with handsome foliage, gorgeously variegated in the
case of Caladium and other species, while others, like Diejfen-
bachia, are richly blotched with cream or yellow markings. Some
are aquatics, growing in shallow water, like Orontium, Calla, and
Acorus, while Pistia stratiotes is a floating herb. Some of the purely
herbaceous species attain a gigantic size, as in the case of Amorpho-
phallus, but particularly Conophallus titanus, which produces a
single leaf, with a stalk 6-7 ft. high and a blade 45 ft. in circum-
ference. The spathe measures 3 ft. in diameter, making one of the
largest known flowers, popularly so-called.

In temperate regions the plants are chiefly dwarf herbs, and to
this class belong the land plants, Arum maculat urn and A. italicn un,
as well as the aquatic Acorus, or Sweet Flag. The highly coloured
fruits of Arum are probably adapted for dissemination by birds,
but Acorus Calamus, with its curious, but inconspicuous and un-
attractive, conical mass of fruits, must be generally dispersed by
water, carrying away the fruits or pieces of the plant. The seeds
do not often come to maturity in this country, but when that
happens, the pulpy baccate fruits may induce aquatic birds to carry
them away.

The curious flowers of the common Arum maculatum Linn.
(Lords and Ladies) are crowded together in four series on a central
axis, or spadix, inclosed by a large spathe in direct correlation to
the method by which they are fertilised. Near the base of the
spadix is a group of ovaries, without a protecting perianth, as this
is rendered unnecessary by the presence of the spathe. Above this
is a group of hairs, representing imperfect ovaries. Next comes
a dense cylindrical mass of anthers, likewise without a perianth,
and above them is another group of hairs, representing imperfect
anthers. The crowding together of the flowers in this fashion
would tend to reduce the size of the ovaries and their contained
ovules or seeds. This may account for the presence of infertile
ovaries and anthers, so that the energies of the plant are devoted to
the production of only a few ovules and still fewer seeds.

In this case, nothing would at first sight seem easier or more
natural than that the pollen from the anthers should fall on, and
fertilise, the pistils. This, however, is not what occurs. The
stigmas mature before the anthers, and by the time the pollen is
shed, have become incapable of fertilisation. It is impossible,
therefore, that the plant should fertilise itself. Nor can the pollen
be carried by the wind. When it is shed, it drops to the bottom of
the tube, where it is so effectually sheltered that nothing short of a
hurricane could dislodge it ; and although Arum is common enough,
still the chances against any of the pollen so dislodged being blown
into the tube of another plant would be immense.

As, however, in Aristolocliia , so also in Arum, small flies, espe-
cially those belonging to the genus Psychoda, attracted by the

150 Transactions of the Society.

showy central spadix, the peculiar smell, the prospect of honey, and
perhaps of shelter, enter the tube while the stigmas are mature,
and find themselves imprisoned by the fringe of hairs, which, while
permitting their entrance, prevent them from returning. After a
while, however, the period of maturity of the stigma is over, and
each secretes a drop of honey, thus repaying the insects for their
captivity. The anthers then ripen and shed their pollen, which
falls on and adheres to the insects. Then the hairs gradually
shrivel up and set the insects free,